Qass— 
 Book- 
 
SOmOLISM & PSYCHEISM; 
 
 OR, THE 
 
 SCIENCE OF THE SOUL AND THE PHENOMENA 
 OF NERVATJO::, 
 
 AS REVEALED BY 
 
 CONSIDERED PHYSIOLOGICALLY AND PHILOSOPHICALLY: 
 WITH NOTES 
 
 OF 
 
 iHe^meric arttj IE)0pc!jical (JBjcperience* 
 
 BY 
 
 JOSEPH W. HADDOCK, M.D., 
 
 SECOND EDITION, 
 
 ENLARGED AND ILLUSTRATED WITH ENGRAVING.-?. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 JAMES S. HODSON, 22, PORTUGAL STREET, 
 
 LINCOLN'S INN. 
 1851. 
 

 3\ 
 
 LONDON : 
 
 J. S. H0D80N, I'RINTEIl, PORTUCJAL STUEET, 
 
 LINCOLN'S INN. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Preface P- ix 
 
 Chapter I. — Introduction . . . . . • PP- i — 5 
 Characteristics of the age — Chemistry and geology, new sciences — 
 Psycheism, in a similar sense, new — Mesmerism unfairly judged by 
 scientific authority — Its greatest wonders not more unlooked for and 
 surprising than the electric telegraph — We may never know the real 
 nature of mind, or spirit, and matter; in both cases we only know- 
 some of the laws or properties. 
 
 Chapter II. — Origin and Progress of Vital Magnetism, or 
 Mesmerism . . . . . . • PP« 6 — 19 
 
 Mesmeric phenomena discoverable among the recorded events of an- 
 cient times — Egyptian priests, Delphian oracles and Roman sybils — 
 Truthfulness of some sybilline oracles asserted by Saint Justin — Recog- 
 nized in the hymns of the Romish church — Effect of passes known to 
 Asclepiades and Celsus — Valentine Greatrakes, confirmation of his 
 cures — Perkins, and his metallic tractors — Conduct of Dr. Falconer, of 
 Bath ; humanity sacrificed to scientific pride — Mesmer, his birth and 
 progress — He becomes acquainted with a curative power in magnets, 
 through his intimacy with the professor of astronomy in Vienna — As- 
 certains the mode of using them, as instruments for passing — Success at 
 Paris — Offered a reward by the French Government — Retirement and 
 death — His theory — Uses of animal magnetism — Marquis de Puysegur 
 — Discovery of artificial somnambulism — Mesmer's mode of operating 
 — Report of the First French Commission of Enquiry — Conclusions 
 of the Second Commission — Origin of the name Mesmerism. 
 
 Chapter III — Phenomena and Physiology of Vital Magnetism, 
 or Mesmerism . . . . . .pp. 20 — 62 
 
 Mesmerism comprises a variety of states having one common cha- 
 racter — Classification of states — Brain and nervous system — Cerebrum 
 — Cerebellum — Cranial nerves — Origin of nerves from brain — Spinal 
 marrow, sensory and motor nerves — Connection of cerebellum with 
 sympathetic and pneumo-gastric nerves — State of brain in wakefulness 
 and sleep — Motion of brain — Circulation within in it — Mechanism of 
 
VI CONTENTS. 
 
 arteries and veins ; a perpetual supply, and regulated quantity of blood 
 — Simplest mesmeric state — Hypnotism and electro-biology — Methods of 
 mesmerising — Coma — Catalepsy; its physiological cause — Insensibility 
 to pain ; examples and caution — Phreno-mesmerism ; explanations and 
 elucidations — Phantasy — Transfer of state and feeling — Cerebral lu- 
 cidity and clairvoyance — Case of Madame Lagan dre; verification of her 
 statements by dissection — Application of the anatomy and physiology of 
 the brain. 
 
 Chapter IV. — Philosophy and Psychology of Vital Magnetism, 
 OR Mesmerism — Clairvoyance, Inner Vision, or Trance 
 
 pp. 63—83 
 
 Perception and seeing — Natural vision has a psychological basis — 
 Lucidity has the same sensorium and basis ; but the light, or its ana- 
 logue, is from within — Powers of lucidity and clairvoyance — Atheistical 
 philosophy and rational Scriptural philosophy — Locke; St. Paul — Order 
 and degree in nature — Necessity of observing these distinctions — Psyche, 
 or animus — Psycheism, the science of the soul — Psychological change 
 induced by mesmerism — Influence of operator on subject — Mental at- 
 mospheres — Psychological cause for the observed physiological effects ; 
 Internal and external memory — Superior state, or extasis — Man lives 
 both in the spiritual and natural world at the same time — Definition of 
 a true clairvoyant — Psychological explanation of distant clairvoyance — 
 Cerebral lucidity — Imagination — Conclusion, 
 
 Chapter V. — Particular Mesmeric Experience. — Case of E. L. 
 
 pp. 84--111 
 
 Account of *' Emma" — Discovery of mesmeric capabilities — Etheri- 
 sation — Insensibility to pain — Catalepsy — Phreno-mesmerism — Mag- 
 netic attraction — Personal influence — Removal of teeth while mes- 
 merised — Discovery of the faculty of luciditj' — Experiments — Gradual 
 development of state — Causes of occasional failure — Phraseology and 
 manners in the mesmeric state — Discovery of distant clairvoyance — 
 Fatigue arid mental excitement attending it — Second inversion of state — 
 Discovery of the mode of communication when away — Curious experi- 
 ments with cats. 
 
 Chapter VI. — Successful Clairvoyant Experiments 
 
 pp. 112 — 151 
 
 Mr. Wood's case, loss of cash-box and contents, discovery of the 
 thief, and restoration of the property— Mr. Arrowsmith's case, recovery 
 of £650, miilaid in the Bank of l^olton— Case of farmer from York- 
 shire, recovery of £40— Other cases of lost property — Reasons for dis- 
 continuing such inquiries— First case of distant patient— Description of 
 persons in different parts of the globe— Case of young man in America 
 
CONTENTS. Vii 
 
 Interesting case of Mr. Willey, description of him, and his pursuits, 
 
 in California; original notes of the case, and subsequent verifications — 
 Discoveries of missing registers — Brief general account of the inquiry- 
 relative to Sir John Franklin — Case of personal descriptions of some of 
 the officers— Position assigned to Franklin — All yet should be considered 
 as conjecture. 
 
 Chapter VIT. — Clairvoyance, as applied to Physiology and 
 Medicine ....... pp. 152 — 164 
 
 Use of clairvoyance in physiology and medicine — Emma's first notice 
 of the interior of the human body — Remarkable case of a lady in Man- 
 chester, cure of cerebral disease — Recommendation of homeopathic 
 medicines — Description of Mr, Turner's shop in Manchester, from the 
 bust of Hahneman in the window — Method of testing medicines through 
 the bottles — Remarks on homeopathic remedies — Use of the drugs and 
 preparations of the pharmacopseia — Reasons why numerous cases not 
 published — Cure of blindness in a child — Cure of epilepsy — Method of 
 conducting medical enquiries, by the aid of clairvoyance — Use, and en- 
 deavour to avoid abuse, of clairvoyance as applied to medicine. 
 
 Chapter VIIT. — Clairvoyant Experiments in Electro -Che- 
 mistry and Magnetism . . . • PP- 166 — 179 
 
 Results of reading Dr. Mayho's book — Reichenbach's discoveries — 
 Experiments with Emma in magnetism — The eifect of metals on the 
 livmg force — Direction of the magnetic current — Influence of sunlight 
 on metals — Actual inflammation produced by the contact of a wire, 
 while experimenting — Chemical experiments — Sensitive experiments — 
 Conscious lucidity, verification of mesmeric statements. 
 
 Chapter IX.-^Extasis or Trance . . .pp. 180 — 203 
 
 Ancients acquainted with such a state — What is meant by extasis — 
 Emma's gradual approach to the extatic condition — First spontaneous 
 extasis — Other states of extasis — General statement of Emma's re- 
 vealments — Trances in July, 1848 — Emma repeatedly selects the same 
 passage of Scripture by mesmeric touch and vision although unable to 
 read it — The assigned mode by which she was guided in this action — 
 Mentions facts only known to author and a deceased party — Trance, 
 July 14th, 1848, similar to St. Peter's vision — Trance, September 
 28th, 1848 — Description of it, and notes of Emma's statements — 
 Education of children in the spirit- world — Conjugal union — Vision of 
 sepulchre with attendant angels, brilliant light, significative of the 
 resurrection of Jesus — Case of still-born children — Questioned in phy- 
 siology — Emma describes things unknown to herself and the author, 
 from communication with the spirit of a deceased gentleman — Investi- 
 gation of a mysterious murder ; Emma unravels the transaction ; the 
 facts, as known, confirm her statements — Law of spiritual communi- 
 cation — Conclusion . 
 
Vm CONTENTS. 
 
 Chapter X. — Practice and Use of Vital Magnetism, or Mes- 
 merism pp. 204 — 210 
 
 Direct use as a curative agent — Method of magnetizing patients — 
 Mesmeric passes — How to combine the odylic influence, and terrestrial 
 magnetism, with mesmerism— how to act with patients labouring under 
 nervous, or painful diseases — Diseases in which mesmerism is useful — 
 Old and nev/ medical treatment — Practice of mesmerism ought to be 
 under medical direction — Suggestion of distinctive terms, psycheism, 
 and parapsycheism. 
 
 Appendix. 
 
 Illustrations of the activity of the internal memory . . p. 211 
 
 A singular dream, illustrative of the laws of mental association 216 
 
 Dr. Vaughan on miracles, Sic, ...... 218 
 
 Confirmation of the theory of sleep, from Baron Reichenbach . 220 
 
 Development of new states in Emma . . , . . 226 
 
 Mr. Atkinson and Miss Martineau on the " Laws of Man's 
 
 Nature and Development" ...... 230 
 
 List of Engravings. 
 
 No. I. — A diagram of a section of the brain divided nearly longitudi- 
 nally, illustrative of the arrangement and distribution of the fibres. 
 
 No. 2. — The base of the brain, the arachnoid membrane, the arteries and 
 veins removed, shewing the cerebellum, the medulla oblongata, and the 
 principal nerves. 
 
 No. 3. — Front view of a pair of spinal nerves, shewing the anterior and 
 posterior roots. 
 
 No. 4. — A portion of the brain dissected, shewing a number of motor fibres 
 descending from one of the hemispheres of the cerebrum, passing 
 under the arch of the optic nerves, and through the pons varolii, and 
 converging to form the anterior column of the spinal marrow. 
 
 No. 5. — A diagram illustrating the sympathetic and pneumogastric sys- 
 tems of nerves. 
 
 No. 6. — The principal arteries of the brain removed from their situation, 
 and represented on a plane surface, in order to shew their communi- 
 cations, called the circle of Willis. The arrows shew the course of 
 the blood. 
 
 No. 7. — A diagram representing the venous channels, called sinuses, in 
 the upper and back part of the head, by which the blood is conveyed 
 away from the brain. 
 
 ^o. 8. — A section of the globe of the eye, cut through the middle from 
 front to back, shewing the chambers. 
 
PEEFACE. 
 
 In the advertisement to the First Edition of this work, it 
 was stated, that it contained the substance of Two Lectures, 
 delivered in the early part of 1848, before large audiences, 
 in the Temperance Hall, Bolton, under the auspices of 
 the Mechanic's Institution of that town. To the body of 
 the work was added an Appendix, containing a narrative 
 of facts, embodying interesting mesmeric information, and 
 which was partly intended as a reply to the inquiries of 
 many respectable persons in Lancashire, and elsewhere, 
 as to how, and when, the writer discovered the peculiar 
 susceptibilities of his chief mesmeric subject. When 
 written, it was chiefly intended for local circulation, and 
 was thus rendered as brief and condensed as possible. 
 But it has obtained a wider range than was anticipated 
 by its Author ; and has been republished in New York, 
 with the addition of wood engravings of the brain and 
 nervous system ; and a larger edition than was originally 
 contemplated, has been sold within two years. The work 
 has been also favourably noticed, both in England and 
 America, and the writer has received from professional 
 gentlemen, entirely strangers to him, very flattering opinions 
 and encomiums. 
 
 Under these circumstances, the public is presented with 
 a second, and greatly enlarged edition, containing mucli 
 entirely new matter, and the original part re-modelled, 
 and, in part, re-written, so as to place the whole subject 
 in a clearer light, and easier to be understood : and, in 
 furtherance of this object, several engravings have been 
 
X PREFACE. 
 
 introduced, to illustrate the physiological portion. Know- 
 ing the distaste generally felt to lengthened discussion 
 on the abstruse subject of psychology, the writer has 
 scarcely ventured to exceed the original limits assigned 
 to that portion of the work ; but he has chiefly enlarged 
 the chapter on the physiology and phenomena of mesmer- 
 ism, and introduced a greater variety of notes of mesmeric 
 and psychical experience, which the reader can explain by 
 any theory or suggestion of his own, if dissatisfied with 
 the Author's. There are many gentlemen, of high pro- 
 fessional attainments, who are satisfied of the certainty 
 of the main facts of mesmerism, but consider that the 
 time is not yet ripe for theory. To such, and, indeed, to 
 all his readers, he would say, that he is chiefly desirous 
 that his work should be considered as a truthful narrative 
 of facts, which may confidently be relied on. Of course, 
 the Author considers his theory the best, or he would 
 not have proposed it ; but he is wedded to no dogmas, 
 and he will willingly relinquish it, whenever he is pre- 
 sented with a better, which will meet the whole case. 
 
 It was also stated, in the former edition, that an attempt 
 had been made to explain the phenomena of mesmerism 
 in harmony with science and revelation. With all due 
 respect for the opinions of those who have taken an oppo- 
 site view, and after mature re-consideration, the writer feels 
 that he has adopted the right course, and he is constrained 
 to say, that, to him, the philosophy of Christianity appears 
 to ofler the easiest and most rational solution of the higher 
 mesmeric phenomena, especially as regards the state of 
 extasis, or trance ; and that the narratives of the New 
 Testament, and the facts of mesmerism, are mutually 
 explanatory and corroborative of each other. He also 
 considers, that the progress of sound mesmeric knowledge, 
 and the benefits that might accrue from it, have been 
 greatly retarded, and the interests of truth seriously in- 
 jured, by the atheistic and materialistic views of some 
 
PREFACE. XI 
 
 influential mesmeric writers, and the attempts of others, 
 to upset the received truths of physical science. And 
 his regret on this account, he knows, is shared by scien- 
 tific and professional gentlemen, well able to form a sound 
 opinion. 
 
 The American publisher changed the title to " Psy- 
 chology ; or, the Science of the Soul." The original lead- 
 ing title is, however, retained, as identifying the present 
 with the former edition : besides, the term, psychology, 
 does not generally convey the idea, or meaning, in which 
 the author has used the term Psycheism. But such 
 addition is made to the original title, as, it is presumed, 
 will sufiiciently characterize the work. 
 
 Should this edition be as favourably received as the 
 former, it is the Author's intention to follow it speedily by 
 another work, in which he will enter more fully into the 
 physiology of the brain, and the uses of some parts of 
 the encephalon, deduced from researches that he is now 
 making ; and, also, more extended observations and ex- 
 periments on the imponderable elements, in their re- 
 lations to the laws of nervation, with such further illus- 
 trations of vital magnetism and psycheism, as increasing 
 experience furnishes. 
 
 Wood Street, Bolton ; 
 April, 1851. 
 
 Postscript. — In Professor Gregory's recently published "Letters on 
 Animal Magnetism," the reader will find several additional cases of suc- 
 cessful clairvoyance, tending to confirm the narratives of this work ; but 
 which the writer omitted to record, partly to avoid increase of bulk, and 
 partly because he considered them in the light of private experiments, 
 the records of the whole of which would have occupied all the following 
 pages. 
 
 May \st. 
 
Dr. HADDOCK may he consulted "personally ^ or 
 by letter, in all Medical cases. The terms and conditions 
 of inquiry^ where patients are desirous that the faculty 
 of Clairvoyance should he used as an aid in discovering 
 the cause and nature of their complaints, may he had, 
 on application at his residence in Bolton, or hy sending 
 a stamped directed envelope; and he is now making ar- 
 rangements for a stated attendance in Manchester, with 
 a view to the ultimate establishment of a Sanative 
 Institution, 
 
SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 One of the most striking characteristics of the pre- 
 sent age, consists in the vast amount of knowledge 
 respecting external objects, which has been accumu- 
 lated in a comparatively short period. For within 
 the brief compass of human life, so extensive has 
 been the discovery of the physical properties of na- 
 tural substances, that chemistry, although of ancient 
 date, may be considered as a new science. Geology, 
 with its marvellous revealments, has opened a new 
 world to human enquiry ; and, by the strict rules of 
 scientific induction, has led its votaries back to the 
 infancy of our globe, and traced the wondrous revo- 
 lutions by which the Almighty Creator fitted it to be 
 the natural abode of man : and reason has led the 
 human mind, with sure and certain step, into regions 
 where even imagination dares not follow. While 
 man has thus been permitted to increase his know- 
 ledge of the world without him, we might reasonably 
 expect, that some additional knowledge would be ac- 
 quired of the world within him. That his knowledge 
 would not be confined to the superstitions of the dark 
 ages, or to the assumptions of self-constituted au- 
 thority on the one hand, nor to the barren negations 
 of a sceptical philosophy on the other hand. But 
 that something real, positive, and satisfactory, should 
 be learnt, respecting his own constitution, and its re- 
 lation to things unseen, as well as seen. For wliat 
 
Z SOMx\OLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 knowledge can be so interesting to man, as a know- 
 ledge of himself? — of the nature, powers, and capa- 
 bilities of his own being. 
 
 To the calm, contemplative, and well-informed in- 
 quirer, who has patiently investigated for himself, or 
 dispassionately considered the investigation of others, 
 it will, I think, be evident, that the remarkable phe- 
 nomena displayed in the higher stages of what is 
 called vital magnetism, or mesmerism, — or, as it is 
 considered, for reasons hereafter to be given, would 
 more properly be called Psycheism, — rightly inter- 
 preted, — do afford us the means of acquiring a know- 
 ledge of the laws and nature of the psychical or mental 
 part of our being, as much transcending what is com- 
 monly known and believed, as the recent discoveries 
 in magnetism and electricity, exceed the ancient ideas 
 of these natural powers ; and at the same time they 
 afford us the means of becoming acquainted with the 
 more abstruse points in our bodily organization also. 
 
 The discoveries and doctrines of an enlightened 
 physiology teach us, that all the elements, forms, and 
 forces of the entire universe, are found, in their high- 
 est perfection, in the bodily form of man ; and that 
 in him, as the microcosm, or little world, is to be 
 found all that exists in the macrocosm, or great world 
 of the universe. And, as in the great world with- 
 out us, the most astonishing and transforming powers 
 are displayed by those subtile, imponderable, and in- 
 visible elements, which elude the most acute physical 
 senses, even when aided by the highest artificial 
 means ; so in the world within us, the most w onder- 
 ful and unexpected powers are manifested by those 
 psychical or mental operations, by which the laws 
 and developments of the world of mind, are capable 
 of being openly displayed before our physical sight. 
 
 But the curious and interesting phenomena dis- 
 played by vital magnetism, or mesmerism, instead of 
 being calmly and carefully investigated by all inquir- 
 ing minds, especially by those whose profession and 
 pursuits ought to have interested them in the inquiry. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 3 
 
 have^ in too many instances, been scornfully and con- 
 temptuously neglected. Authority, instead of lending 
 its aid to elicit the truth, has rather scowled upon 
 the attempt which has been made to lift the veil un- 
 der which truth has been concealed; and, in some 
 cases, has misrepresented the character and inten- 
 tions of those, who, at any cost, were determined to 
 seek her for themselves. Notwithstanding these dis- 
 couragements, there have not been wanting able and 
 fearless advocates in eacb of the branches of the 
 learned professions, who have fully proclaimed the 
 general truthfulness of mesmeric phenomena, and 
 thus prevented a most important branch of human 
 knowledge from being consigned, by authority, to the 
 charlatan and the quack. 
 
 It is possible indeed, that the very remarkable re- 
 sults said to flow from the enquiry; — results, so dif- 
 ferent to the expectations and ideas of a materializing 
 age, and in some respects, disclosing matters which 
 seem to clash with established opinions, — may have 
 been the reason for this unfair, and certainly unphilo- 
 sophical mode of proceeding. But, granting that the 
 most astounding statements made by mesmeric ex- 
 perimenters are true, they are not, when properly 
 considered, more wonderful than things now univer- 
 sally admitted as facts. Look at the wonder-working 
 electric telegraph ! The elements on which that in- 
 vention rests, must be as old as the present order of 
 things : yet if any one in the middle of the last cen- 
 tury had ventured to assert, that, by human inge- 
 nuity, electricity, or magnetism, could be made to 
 transmit human thought with mathematical precision, 
 and with the velocity of light ; — '^ that the sun could 
 be made to paint our pictures, and the lightning to 
 carry our messages ;^^ — he would have been set down 
 by the practical authorities of that age, as a dreaming 
 theorist, or an enthusiastic visionary. To us, how- 
 ever, the visionary theory has become a reality : and 
 yet, what magnetism or electricity really are, is no 
 more known to us, than it was to our great ^rand- 
 
 1* 
 
4 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 fathers. The truth is, the mode has been ehcited by 
 which certain comparatively unknown mediums, may 
 be practically applied to subserve the purposes of so- 
 cial life : and herein, and for all practical purposes, 
 consists the useful discovery. If we may never know 
 what magnetism and electricity in themselves really 
 are, we certainly do know much of the mode by 
 which their laws and powers may be developed and 
 manifested : — we have discovered a mode of working 
 certain imponderable mediums, altogether unknown 
 to our ancestors. 
 
 Just so, I apprehend, it is with the discoveries as- 
 sociated with the names of vital magnetism or mes- 
 merism. Here is in fact a discovery of a new mode 
 of working and manifesting the powers of an old me- 
 dium. That mind and matter are both necessary to 
 form the peculiar organism we call man, is no new 
 doctrine : but the true nature of the body, as the 
 mind^s medium or instrument, and of the necessary 
 organization of that superior in-dwelling power, — the 
 soul or mind, which directs and controls the outward 
 form, has been somewhat overlooked. Metaphysi- 
 cians have studied mind irrespective of form or mat- 
 ter ; — some philosophers would resolve all things into 
 material operation, irrespective of mind. I believe 
 that fact, and demonstrative evidence, will prove that 
 both classes of philosophers are wrong. From Divine 
 Revelation we know that there is both " a spiritual 
 body and a natural body,^^ — both a spiritual organi- 
 zation and a natural organization. These cardinal 
 truths will be found to lie at the bottom of all the 
 higher stages of mesmeric experience ; and from that 
 experience it is conceived, that the a priori state- 
 ments of the Scriptures will receive abundant confir- 
 mation : we shall see that in our present state of 
 existence, if we wish to study mind or spirit, we must 
 study it as manifested in its divinely appointed and 
 true correspondent instrument, — the bodily organi- 
 zation. 
 
 With some of the mind^s operations, and the bodily 
 
INTRODUCTIOX. 5 
 
 functions and sensations thence ensuing^ we have be- 
 come so familiar^ that we scarcely ever stop to think 
 of the perpetual miracles involved in our daily expe- 
 rience. Thus the great blessing of sight, involves, as 
 we shall point out farther on, a fact which all the 
 philosophers that have ever lived have been unable to 
 explain ! Yet_, when some manifestation of mind or 
 spirit, which has hitherto eluded general notice, is 
 brought before us, although it may not be more inex- 
 plicable than natural sight, we are apt to deny the 
 possibility of the declared manifestation, simply be- 
 cause we were not previously acquainted with it : — 
 apt to make our present standard of knowledge the 
 measure by which all future acquisitions are to be es- 
 timated. Sometimes too, we are told authoritatively, 
 that it is impossible for us to know anything of mind 
 or spirit. What, it may be asked, do we know of 
 matter ? Simply some of its laivs and properties, and 
 from these we predicate its qualities. So it is with 
 mind or spirit ! Mesmerism, or more truly psyche- 
 ism, furnishes us with a means of acquiring an experi- 
 mental acquaintance with some of its most distinctive 
 qualities ; — distinctive it is meant, with respect to the 
 qualities of inert matter. Whether we shall ever know 
 the essential nature of either spirit or matter, remains 
 for a higher stage of existence to determine. It is 
 privilege enough to be enabled to know^ something of 
 the laws and properties of that higher and imperish- 
 able organism, to w^hich our outward bodily organism 
 is subser^dent. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF VITAL MAGNETISM OR MESMERISM. 
 
 In the records of past ages^ we have many statements 
 of remarkable mental or psychical manifestations^ and 
 also of the performance of remarkable cures^ by men- 
 tal or moral agency^ which ignorance and superstition 
 have ascribed to miracle or magic ; and scepticism^, to 
 collusion and deception. The more extended know- 
 ledge^ and juster philosophy which is progressing in 
 the present generation^ has admitted the possibility 
 and probability of many things which were ridiculed 
 in the middle of the eighteenth century : some of 
 these^ as the fall of large masses of iron, — meteorites^ 
 afc> they are termed, — from, the atmosphere,, are now 
 admitted as established verities ; and the more recent 
 observation of what i^ called mesmeric phenomena, 
 has gone far to establish the veracity of ancient 
 writers on other disputed matters^ and to afford a 
 reasonable explanation of otherwise mysterious, and 
 apparently impossible, events. 
 
 Ancient history speaks of the mysterious doings, 
 oracular sayings, prophetic forebodings, and appa- 
 rently miraculous performances of the Egyptian 
 Priests; of the Delphian Oracle among the Greeks, 
 and of the Sybils among the Romans. From what is 
 known of the practices, the long vigils and fastings, 
 and the peculiar attitudes and manners of the Sybils, 
 there can be little doubt, that by various means, kept 
 secret from the multitude, a condition similar, if not 
 identical with the higher mesmeric, or psychic state^ 
 as it is proposed to call it, was induced ; and that the 
 Sybils and utterers of oracles, were, at times, really 
 clairvoyant, and in a state of trance. Saint Justin 
 says, '^ that the Sybils spoke many great things with 
 justice and with truth, and that when the instinct 
 
ORIGIN AND PROGRESS. 7 
 
 which animated them ceased to exist, they lost the 
 recollection of all they had declaredr"^- It will be seen 
 in the sequel^ that this is so strikingly in accordance 
 with the mesmeric sleep or trance, as to leave scarcely 
 a doubt of its identity with it. That the Sybils were 
 sometimes possessed of super-sensual or prophetic 
 perceptions, is an opinion commonly entertained, as 
 is evident from the well-known hymn of the Roman 
 Catholic church, which commences, — 
 
 Dies irae, dies ilia 
 Solvet sseclum ia favilla, 
 Teste David cum Sybilla. 
 
 Thus anglicised in a number of the ^^ Congregational 
 Magazine,^^ — 
 
 The day of wrath, that dreadful day, 
 When heaven and earth shall pass away, 
 As David and the Sybils say. 
 
 The soothing application of what are now called 
 passes, was evidently known at a very remote period ; 
 for there is a curious passage in the works of Celsus, 
 the Uoman physician, in which, he states that the old 
 Greek father of physic, Asclepiades, practised li(/ht 
 friction, as a means of inducing sleep in phrensy and 
 insanity ; and, what is more remarkable, he says, that 
 by too much friction there luas danger of inducing 
 lethargy.-\ 
 
 * Justin. Adm. ad Grsecos, quoted by Teste. 
 
 t These passages are so curious, that, for the medical or classical 
 reader, I transcribe the sentences. In allusion to blood-letting, he says : 
 *' Asclepiades perinde esse dixit, his sanguinem mitti, ac si trucidenter ; 
 rationem banc secutus, quod neque insaniaesset, nisi febre intenta: neque 
 sanguis, nisi in remissione ejus, recte mitteretur. Sed ipse in his somnum 
 multa friciione qucRsivit^ Again : in representing Asclepiades as caution- 
 ing his disciples against the use of narcotics in maniacal cases, from the 
 danger which might ensue, he says : *' Prsecipit autem, ut primo die, a 
 cibo, potione, somno abstineretur ; vespere ei daretur potui aqua; turn 
 frictio admoverelur lenis, ut ne manum quidetn, qui perfricaret , vehementer 
 imprimeret : postero deinde die, iisdem omnibus factis, vespere ei daretur 
 sorbitio et aqua, rursusquefrictio adhiberetur : per banc enim nos consecu- 
 turos, ut somnus accedat. Id interdum fit, et quidem adeo, ut, illo con- 
 fitente, nimia frictio etiam hthargi pencuhun afferat/' De Medicina. 
 Lib. iii. I subjoin a translation of the second sentence: "But he ordered, 
 that the patient should be made to abstain on the first day from food, 
 
8 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 But as it is not proposed to introduce anything like 
 a history of ancient or middle-aged mystery, we men- 
 tion only one authentic case prior to the discoveries 
 of Mesmer. In the reign of Charles II., a gentleman 
 of the name of Valentine Greatarick, or Greatrakes, 
 acquired considerable notoriety from curing diseases 
 by stroking with his hands. These cures were authen- 
 ticated by the Bishop of Derry, and many other re- 
 spectable individuals. The Boyal Society is said to 
 have accounted for them, by the supposition that 
 there existed ^^ a sanative influence in Mr. Greatrakes^ 
 body, which had an antipathy to some particular dis- 
 eases, and not to others.''^ There is an article in the 
 ^^ London Medical Gazette'' for October 12th, 1849, 
 entitled, ^^ The Practice of Mesmerism for the cure of 
 Diseases in the seventeenth century,'' which, although 
 intended as a sneer at mesmerism generally, and abuse 
 of such professional gentlemen as have had the man- 
 liness to avow their belief in the efficacy of mesmeric 
 treatment, contains the following curious particulars : 
 ^^ In the library at Maldon, there is a curious old 
 book, entitled, ^ The Miraculous Conformist ; or, an 
 account of several marvellous cures, performed by the 
 stroaking of the hands, by Valentine Greatarick, 
 with a physical discourse thereupon, in a letter to the 
 Honourable Robert Boyle, Esq. With a Letter Re- 
 lating some other of his miraculous cures attested by 
 E. Foxcroft, Esq., M.A., and Fellow of King's Col- 
 lege, in Cambr., by Henry Stubbs, Physician, at 
 Stratford-upon-Avon, in the county of Warwick. 
 Oxford: Printed by H. Hall, Printer to the Univer- 
 sity for Ric: Davis, 1666.' '* At page 28th is the fol- 
 lowing : — ^^ The Account of a Leprosy cured by Mr. 
 Greatarick in the presence of the Lord Conway. A 
 
 drink, and sleep ; that in the evening, water should be given him for 
 drink ; then that gentle friction should be applied, so that he who was rub- 
 bing, did not even press the part strongly : then, on the next day, the 
 same things should be repeated, and gruel and water given in the even- 
 ing, and friction again applied ; for the effect would be to induce sleep. 
 It would sometimes happen, as he confesses, that too much friction pro- 
 duced a danger of lethargy." 
 
ORIGIN AND PROGRESS. \) 
 
 boy about fourteen years old, sonne to a Prebend of 
 Gloucester, recommended to the Lord Conway by the 
 Bishop of Gloucester, came with a letter to Ragley : 
 he was afflicted with a Leprosy judged incurable ; and 
 had been so tenne years. At his coming to my Lord^s 
 he found Mr. Greatarick touching people in the field: 
 whereupon he pressed upon, and got him to stroke 
 his body all over : this happened upon Wednesday : 
 on Friday morning the boy came to my Lord and de- 
 livered his letter : whereupon my Lord sent for him 
 up to his chamber, and causing him to be stripped, 
 they found that the moist salt and brinish humour 
 which caused a moist leprosy, was dried up, and in 
 some places scaled off, the skinne under it w^as red 
 (as under all crusts fallen oft') there was no itching 
 or pricking at all nor heat : with which symptoms he 
 had formerly been troubled. Mr. Greatarick stroked 
 him again, and rubbed his body all over with spittle. 
 My Lord ordered his boy to return if he were not 
 cured, but he came no more.^^ At the present day it 
 is plain enough that Greatarick^ s ^^ stroakings,^^ were 
 similar in practice, and identical in effect, with mes- 
 meric passes; and he appears to have been one of 
 those individuals, whose moral and physical constitu- 
 tion was peculiarly fitted for the transmission of a 
 healing agency. 
 
 Another case of success in treating some classes of 
 disease, which appears to have arisen directly from 
 Mesmer^s discovery, and to have been, in fact, a 
 modification of his treatment, occurred in the early 
 part of the Reign of George III. One Perkins, had 
 invented some sort of metallic tractors, by which, as 
 he supposed, in accordance with the theory then pre- 
 vailing, animal magnetism was conveyed to the pa- 
 tient^s body. He obtained a patent for this instrument, 
 and its supposed virtues are set forth in a work, en- 
 titled, ^^The efficacy of Perkins' Patent Metallic 
 Tractors in various diseases of the human body and 
 animals; exemplified by two hundred and fifty cases 
 from the first literary chai-acters in Europe and Ame- 
 
 1*^ 
 
10 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 rica. With a Preliminary Discourse in Refutation of 
 the Objections made by Interest and Prejudice to the 
 Metallic Practice/^ The following quotation from the 
 article ^^ Animal Magnetism/^ in the ^'^ Penny Cyclo- 
 poedia/^ is quite characteristic of what medical science 
 will sometimes do in such cases. ^^ Dr. William Fal- 
 coner^ of Bath^, having made tractors of wood so 
 exactly resembling the patent tractors^ that it was 
 impossible for the eye to distinguish between the one 
 and the other^ tried^ in conjunction with Dr. Hay- 
 garth^ the effect of these fictitious tractors on a large 
 scale, on patients in the Bath hospital_, and produced 
 precisely the same effects with the fictitious as with 
 the genuine, affording a demonstration that whatever 
 effects were produced, were produced solely by the 
 imagination. The publication of these cases put an 
 end to the virtues of the metallic tractors in England.^^ 
 Thus, these gentlemen found, that by traction with 
 similar instruments in appearance to Perkinses, but 
 made of a different material, they could produce the 
 same remedial results ; this certainly proved that the 
 virtue, whatever it was, did not reside in the material 
 of which the instrument was made : what it really 
 was that produced the effect, whether by a change in 
 the electric, or still more subtle elements of the body, 
 they did not stop to enquire ; the evident use was 
 altogether disregarded ; and the interests of humanity 
 were sacrificed at the proud shrine of science. It is 
 not meant to offer any opinion on the nature of 
 Perkins's tractors ; but in the sequel it will be seen 
 that there is some powerful afiinity between the subtile 
 elements of the body and metallic substances, and the 
 wooden tractors must have been coated with some 
 metallic substance, in order to present the appearance 
 of the genuine ones ; and hence, perhaps, the doctors 
 may have been unconsciously following Perkinses 
 practice. 
 
 Frederick Anthony Mesmer, who was born, ac- 
 cording to one authority, in 1734, at Weiler, near 
 Stein on the Rhine, according to another account, at 
 
ORIGIN AND PROGRESS. 11 
 
 Mersburg, on the Shores of the Lake of Constance^ is 
 generally considered as the discoverer^ in modern 
 times, of the agency associated with his name. This 
 individual has been represented in works of authority 
 as an impostor and a cheat, and as owing his celebrity 
 entirely to the silly credulity of imaginative people. 
 Few persons who have really taken the trouble to 
 enquire into the matter, would now hazard such an 
 assertion : yet, whether from ignorance of the true 
 cause of the phenomena he witnessed, or from a de- 
 sire to mystify the subject, it must be admitted that 
 he both did and said many things which justified 
 suspicion. 
 
 Mesmer appears to have been a man of an imagin- 
 ative cast of mind, for the Inaugural Thesis he pub- 
 lished on obtaining his degree, was ^^ On the influence 
 of the Planets on the Human Body.^^ Such a mind, 
 if likely to fall into many errors, was still open for the 
 reception of any new ideas which might present them- 
 selves ; and was not so prone as men of a more scep- 
 tical cast, to reject any new truth because it did not 
 harmonize with preconceived opinions. He thought 
 this planetary influence operated by electricity ; but 
 finding that element inadequate to the solution, he 
 subsequently abandoned it for magnetism. To this 
 he was led in the following manner. Tlie then pro- 
 fessor of astronomy at Vienna, a Jesuit, named ;^Iax- 
 imilian Hehl, was a believer in the efficacy of the 
 loadstone as a remedy in human diseases. Mesmer, 
 who at the age of forty-two, had just graduated as a 
 doctor of medicine in the university, became ac- 
 quainted with the Professor, and from him obtained 
 the secret of a peculiar form of magnetic steel plates, 
 which, it is said, had been applied to the cure of dis- 
 ease with much success. Mesmer applied these in 
 his own way, and, it is reported, with such striking 
 results, that it awakened the jealousy of the Astro- 
 nomer, who published an account of them, but attri- 
 buted the cures performed to the form of the plates, 
 and merely represented Mesmer as a physician cm- 
 
12 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 ployed by him to use them. Mesmer^ who had dis- 
 covered the peculiar mode of using them to insure 
 curative results ; — that is^ in fact,, by mampulations^ 
 now called Passes^ — -was indignant at this^ and ac- 
 cused his friend of a violation of the confidence placed 
 in him. The result was a controversy between the 
 parties^ each accusing the other. Mesmer went on 
 curing in his own way^ and whether from indiscre- 
 tion on his own part, or jealousy on the part of others, 
 he was opposed by the scientific authorities of Vienna, 
 and was ultimately obliged to quit that city. 
 
 In the year 1778, two years after obtaining his de- 
 gree, he arrived at Paris, whither his popularity ap- 
 pears to have preceded him ; for we are told, even by 
 his enemies, that upon his opening in that gay me- 
 tropohs, public apartments for the reception of pati- 
 ents, they were speedily crowded by the numbers who 
 daily resorted to them, including all classes, from the 
 peer to the peasant ; and that hundreds were ready 
 to testify to the cures wrought upon their own per- 
 sons by the great magnetizer. Now making every 
 allowance for imagination or fancy, striking results 
 must have followed his treatment, or no such enthu- 
 siasm could have been raised in his behalf. A French 
 physician. Dr. d^Eslon, became a disciple of Mesmer, 
 and is said to have speedily acquired a more profit- 
 able practice than his master. So great in fact, was 
 the interest in Mesmer^s proceedings, that the Prench 
 government took up the matter, and offered him a 
 large annual income if he would communicate his se- 
 cret, and they appear to have thought so highly of the 
 USE to which this new agent might be applied, that 
 they actually proposed to guarantee him a large sum, 
 even if a commission appomted to examine the sub- 
 ject, should make an unfavourable report ! Mesmer, 
 however, for some reasons, did not accede to the 
 government proposal. The secrecy and mystery he 
 seems to have adopted, may have been deemed neces- 
 sary to ensure a due remuneration for his discovery; 
 but for the sake of his reputation, and the credit of 
 
ORIGIN AND PROGRESS. 13 
 
 the practice itself, it is to be regretted that Mesmer 
 should have pursued such a course. After some time 
 and divers vicissitudes^ the sum of £14^000 was raised 
 by his disciples^ whom he had instructed in his art^ 
 but whom he did not consider entitled to practise it 
 publicly; — a right which they considered themselves 
 to possess. This led to altercation^ and ultimately 
 Mesmer left Paris^ and returned to his native place. 
 This has been represented as '^ running away from 
 his dupes f^ but it appears that he retained faith in 
 his views^ and in his last illness sought relief from his 
 own discovery. He died at Mersburg in 1815^ at the 
 advanced age of eighty-one. 
 
 As Mesmer^s discoveries arose out of the use of 
 magnets^ it is not surprising that he should consider 
 a sort of magnetism^ as the agent by which the effects 
 he witnessed were produced^ this he called animal 
 magnetism; and such is the revolution which time 
 and research effects in public opinion^ that this doc- 
 trine, which was the greatest stumbling block to the 
 savans of Mesmer^s time, and led to his system being 
 rejected as mere pretence and imposition, is now, 
 under another name, beginning to be received as a 
 very probable fact, by many eminent scientific au- 
 thorities. 
 
 Mesmer^s theory is as follows. " Animal magnet- 
 ism is a fluid universally diffused : it is the medium 
 of a mutual influence between the heavenly bodies, 
 the earth, and animated bodies ; it is continuous, so 
 as to leave no void ; its subtilty admits of no com- 
 parison ; it is capable of receiving, propagating, com- 
 municating all the impressions of motion ; it is sus- 
 ceptible of flux and reflux. The animal body experi- 
 ences the effects of this agent : by insinuating itself 
 into the substance of the nerves, it affects them im- 
 mediately. There are observed, particularly in the 
 human body, properties analagous to those of the 
 magnet, and in it are discerned poles, equally difler- 
 ent and opposite. The action and the virtues of ani- 
 mal magnetism may be communicated from one body 
 
14 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 to other bodies^ animate and inanimate. This action 
 takes place at a remote distance without the aid of 
 any intermediate body ; it is increased, reflected by 
 mirrors ; communicated, augmented, and propagated 
 by sound; its virtues may be accumulated, concen- 
 trated, transported. Although this fluid is universal, 
 all animal bodies are not equally susceptible of it; 
 there are even some, though a very small number, 
 which have properties so opposite, that their very 
 presence destroys all the efi*ects of this fluid on other 
 bodies. Animal magnetism is capable of healing dis- 
 eases of the nerves immediately, and others mediate- 
 ly. It perfects the action of medicines; it excites 
 and directs salutary crises in such a manner, that the 
 physician may render himself master of them; by its 
 means he knows the state of the health of each indi- 
 vidual, and judges with certainty of the origin, the 
 nature, and the progress of the most complicated 
 diseases : he prevents their increase, and succeeds 
 in healing them, without at any time exposing his 
 patient to dangerous effects or troublesome conse- 
 quences. In animal magnetism nature presents a 
 universal method of healing and preserving man- 
 kind.^^* How far Mesmer^s theory had a foundation 
 in truth, the reader will be better able to judge after 
 perusing the following pages. But it appears plain, 
 that the great end of all his proceedings, or at all 
 events the ostensible end, was use, — the application 
 of a remedy for human suff*ering. In this we cannot 
 but respect him, however he may have erred in other 
 matters. Besides, his discovery and practice led the 
 way to the observation of other, and more distinctly 
 psychical phenomena, such as artificial somnambulism 
 and clairvoyance. 
 
 These phenomena appear to have been first ob- 
 served in modern times by the Marquis de Puysegur, 
 a French nobleman, of the ancien regime, and one 
 of Mesmer^s disciples. In a letter, dated March 8th, 
 
 * M^moire sur la Decouverte du Magnetisme Animal, par M. Mesmer. 
 Paris, 1779. — Uuoted in *♦ Penny Cyclopoedia." 
 
ORIGIN AND PROGRESS. 15 
 
 1784^ written from his estate at Busancy, to a mem- 
 ber of the Societe de rHarmonie^ he says, ^^ after ten 
 days^ rest at my estate, without attending to anything 
 but my repose and my gardens, I had occasion to 
 enter the house of my steward. His daughter was 
 suffering from a violent toothache. I asked her in 
 jest if she wished to be cured? she, of course, con- 
 sented. I had not been ten minutes magnetizing 
 her, when her pain was completely gone, and she felt 
 no return of it after. Another woman was cured on 
 the following day of the same affection, and in as 
 short a time. 
 
 '^ This slight success made me try to do some good 
 for a peasant, about twenty-three years of age, who 
 had been keeping his bed for four days, in conse- 
 quence of inflammation on his chest. I went to see 
 him : it was last Tuesday, the fourth of this month, 
 at eight o^ clock in the evening; the fever had just 
 become lighter. I made him get out of bed and 
 magnetized him. What was my surprise to see at 
 the end of half a quarter of an hour, this person fall 
 into a tranquil sleep in my arms, without pain or con- 
 vulsion. I urged on the crisis, which caused him 
 some giddiness in the head : he spoke aloud of his 
 ordinary affairs. When I thought his ideas must 
 affect him disagreeably, I arrested them, and began to 
 inspire him with others of a more pleasant and lively 
 turn. It required no great effort on my part to ac- 
 complish this. Then I saw him quite happy, fancying 
 that he loas at a fete, I cherished these ideas in him, 
 and thereby I forced him to move himself with con- 
 siderable activity in his chair, as it were, to dance to 
 an air which, by singing mentally, I made him rej^eat 
 quite aloud/^ The Marquis then goes on to narrate 
 the progress of his patient towards recovery ; but the 
 foregoing extract is all that is of any interest noto, 
 and that, because it is the first recorded instance of 
 the observance of somnambuHsm, in connection with 
 mesmeric practice. 
 
 Mesmer^s mode of applying the agency he deuo- 
 
16 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHElSM. 
 
 minated Animal Magnetism^ was as follows. In the 
 centre of the room^ where the patients assembled^ 
 was placed a sort of oaken tub^ called by him the 
 Magnetic Baquet. The interior was filled with 
 pounded glass^ iron filings, and bottles containing 
 magnetized water. The cover of the vessel was 
 pierced with numerous holes, into which were intro- 
 duced polished iron rods, bent nearly at right angles, 
 and which were capable of being moved. The pa- 
 tients were arranged in successive rows around this 
 haquety and each one held one of the iron rods, which 
 he applied to the part of the body supposed to be the 
 seat of the disease : a cord passed round their bodies, 
 uniting them to each other, and sometimes a second 
 chain was formed by placing the thumb of one patient 
 between the thumb and forefinger of the next patient, 
 and so on round the circle ; each patient pressing 
 the thumb of his neighbour. A pianoforte was placed 
 in a corner of the room, and according to the move- 
 ments, difl'erent airs were played upon it; singing 
 being sometimes added. The magnetizer himsel:^ 
 armed with a metallic rod, walked among the pa- 
 tients, looking steadfastly at one ; pointing with his 
 rod to the presumed seat of diserse of another; and 
 occasionally applying pressure with the finger over 
 the hypochondriacal and abdominal regions; and 
 these various manipulations were assiduously con- 
 tinued for a considerable time. The results on highly 
 nervous, and especially imaginative subjects, may be 
 readily conceived. Some were but little aff*ected; 
 others uttered sighs, and gave way to tears or laugh- 
 ter ; some were depressed; others excited and con- 
 vulsed, and some passed into a state of langour and 
 reverie. Some patients devoted their attention to 
 each other, rushing towards one another, speaking 
 with afl'ection, and mutually soothing each other, in 
 these crises, as they were called, which were supposed 
 to be necessary to effect a cure. All were under the 
 control and power of the magnetizer. 
 
 Such is a sketch of the report of the first commis- 
 
ORIGIN AND PROGRESS. 17 
 
 sion appointed by the French Government to investi- 
 gate the subject. The commissioners^ who^ with one 
 exception^ appear to have been inimical to Mesmer 
 arid his proceedings^ admit, that by these combined 
 means, cures were effected ; but these they attributed 
 entirely to the influence of the imagination; — the 
 ready way of accounting for an influence not under- 
 stood. They also reported that there were operations 
 connected with the science, which might be turned to 
 immoral purposes, and so recommended the suppres- 
 sion of the entire system. They applied to the baquet 
 the usual tests for terrestrial magnetism and electri- 
 city ; they found no indication of these well-known 
 elements, and so pronounced the whole to be decep- 
 tion and the efl'ect of fancy. Persons who have fully 
 admitted the truth of mesmerism, have doubted whe- 
 ther any efi^ect was produced by the baquet and its 
 accompaniments ; perhaps, justly so : but the re- 
 searches of Reichenbach have shewn that there is 
 another and more subtile element, than either mag- 
 netism or electricity, and that this element is even 
 visible to highly sensitive persons. 
 
 The renewed interest in the pursuits of animal 
 magnetism, led to the issuing of another commission 
 by the French Royal Academy in 1826, the report of 
 which was not pubHshed till 1831, thus allowing suffi- 
 cient time for investigation. This report fully ac- 
 knowledges the truth of all the phenomena usually 
 ascribed to animal magnetism, and Avith a few of the 
 chief conclusions of this report, this slight historical 
 sketch will close. The Report consists of thirty 1 
 numbered paragraphs, exclusive of the concluding re- 
 marks. No. 19, says, " We have not seen that a 
 person magnetized for the flrst time fell into a state 
 of somnambulism; sometimes it was not till the eighth 
 or tenth sitting, that somnambulism declared itself. 
 No. 24. — We have seen two somnambulists distin- 
 guish ivith their eyes shut the objects placed before 
 them; they have told without touching them, the 
 colour and value of the cards : they have read words 
 
18 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 traced with their hand^ or some hnes of books opened 
 by mere chance. This phenomenon took place even 
 when the openings of the eyelids was accurately closed 
 by means of the fingers. 25. — We met in two som- 
 nambulists the power of foreseeing acts of the or- 
 ganism more or less distant^ more or less complicated. 
 One of them announced several days^ nay several 
 months before hand^ the day^ the hour, and the mi- 
 nute^ when epileptic fits would come on and return ; 
 the other declared the time of the cure. Their pre- 
 visions were realized with remarkable exactness. 
 They seemed to us_, to apply only to acts or lesions 
 of their organism. 26. — We have met but one som- 
 nambulist^, who described the symptoms of the disease 
 of three persons with whom she had been brought 
 into contact. We instituted researches, however, on 
 a considerable number. 28. — Some of the patients 
 magnetized have felt no benefit; others have expe- 
 rienced a relief more or less marked, viz., one, the 
 suppression of habitual pains, the other, the return of 
 strength ; a third, a retardation for several months in 
 the recurrence of epileptic attacks ; and a fourth, the 
 complete cure of a severe paralysis of long standing. 
 29. — Considered as an agent of physiological pheno- 
 mena, or as a therapeutical means, magnetism must 
 find its place in the circle of medical knowledge; and, 
 consequently, medical men only should practise it, or 
 watch and superintend its employment, as is done in 
 the northern countries. 30. — The commission has 
 not been able to verify, for the want of opportunity, 
 other powers, which magnetizers have declared to 
 exist in somnambulists; but it has collected and com- 
 municated facts sufficiently important, to induce it to 
 think that the Academy should encourage the re- 
 searches on magnetism, as a very curious branch of 
 psychology and natural history. 
 
 " Signed. Boudois de la Motte, President. Fou- 
 quier, Gucneau de Mussy, Guersart, Itard, J. J. 
 Leroux, Marc, Thillagc. Husson, llcporter.'^* 
 
 * Dr. Spillan's Translation of Teste. 
 
ORIGIN AND PROGRESS. 19 
 
 It was soon discovered^ that the steel rods, had but 
 little^ if anything to do with the phenomena wit- 
 nessed: the name of animal magnetism, however, 
 continued to be used^ and is still used on the Conti- 
 nent, and by this name the practice was introduced 
 into Eu gland a few years ago. But the English en- 
 quirers into this remarkable human faculty, finding 
 that the use of a name, which implied the existence of 
 a fluid which could not be demonstrated to the senses, 
 was frequently turned into an argument against facts, 
 which admitted of complete demonstration, adopted, 
 out of respect to the memory of Mesmer, and to 
 avoid the appearance of the adoption of any theory of 
 their own, the name of Mesmerism; just as the term 
 magnetism is applied to the properties of the load- 
 stone, from Magnes, the ancient reputed discoverer of 
 its powers ; or the term galvanism, to the discoveries 
 of Galvani. We now proceed to notice the facts and 
 phenomena associated with the names of mesmerism, 
 or animal magnetism, and shall endeavour to ascertain 
 the laws and causes to which these phenomena are to 
 be referred. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY OF VITAL MAGNETISM OR 
 MESMERISM. 
 
 A VERY slight practical acquaintance with the pheno- 
 mena associated with the name of mesmerism, will 
 be sufficient to manifest, that although one common 
 character of somnolency is always more or less ap- 
 parent, still there are a variety of states, and widely 
 differing manifestations^ included in one generic term. 
 One person who is truly mesmerized as it is called, 
 may evince only symptoms of slight drowsiness or in- 
 ability to open the eyes; while another^ with the 
 same amount of manipulation^ will display the higher 
 faculties of lucidity or clairvoyance. It is necessary, 
 therefore, for a clear apprehension of the phenomena, 
 to have some classification of the different states. 
 Judging from my own experience, these states may 
 be classified as follows. First, simple mesmeric 
 DROWSINESS or SLEEP; sccondly, COMA, or more pro- 
 found sleep j thirdly, anaesthesia, or insensibility to 
 pain, occasioned by general want of feeling. This 
 last mentioned characteristic is a result of the full 
 establishment of the mesmeric coma^ and by this 
 means, the entire closure of the external conscious- 
 ness ; for a person may appear to be insensible to, or 
 unconscious of outward objects, and yet upon receiv- 
 ing a sudden prick or pinch, startle, or draw back the 
 limb ; plainly shewing that sensibility is not entirely 
 deadened. These three stages comprise all that are 
 required to manifest the various phenomena, arising 
 from the partial and entire closure of the outward 
 consciousness. The next stages display the opening 
 of an inner consciousness, which has given rise to the 
 phrase of double -consciousness, employed by some 
 physiological writers. A subject may not progress 
 further than the state of coma, but it will^ I believe, 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 21 
 
 mostly happen^ that when coma is really established, 
 the other states will follow. On the other hand, some 
 subjects appear to possess the state of inner-con- 
 sciousness, without passing properly into the state of 
 coma. Perhaps the first or lowest state of inner-con- 
 sciousness^ may be classified as phreno-mesmerism, 
 or the manifestation of the phrenological sentiments 
 and feelings, which is but a form of simple imagina- 
 tive action. Next in order, is phantasy, or that state 
 in which the mesmerized person takes the mere sug- 
 gestions of the operator to be realities. Transfer 
 of STATE and peeling^ or that imaginative and sym- 
 pathetic action, which causes the subject to feel what 
 is done to the operator, as if it were done to himself, 
 which is in reality but another phrase of phantasy, 
 but having a real base. Mental or vital magnetic 
 ATTRACTION, by which the subject is irresistibly di'awn, 
 even contrary to his inclination, towards the operator. 
 And, lastly, the still higher faculties of cerebral lu- 
 cidity, or apparent illumination of the brain, by 
 which objects are seen without the use of the eye; 
 together with those other forms of distant perception, 
 commonly known by the name of clairvoyance, or 
 clear-seeing; all which would perhaps, be better 
 classed as inner vision, or internal, or spiritual 
 SIGHT. These various phenomena exhibit a series of 
 great and interesting facts, which cannot be set aside, 
 neither by argument nor ridicule, whatever medical 
 or literary critics may affect to say to the contrary ; 
 and we now proceed to enquire, — How we are to un- 
 derstand them ? In what way to account for these 
 curious and interesting manifestations ? 
 
 As all the voluntary actions of a man are the results 
 of a mental operation called volition, and all conscious- 
 ness, which is strictly human, requires the mind as 
 its subject, it is necessary, at the outset of our in- 
 quiry, that we examine the medium by which the mind 
 acts on the material bodily organization, that is, the 
 BRAIN and nervous system. For it is only in the 
 degree that the forms and uses of the nervous system 
 
22 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 are understood^ and its correlation with the laws of 
 mind^ and the laws regulating the elements of our 
 mundane system, that we can understand or compre- 
 hend the phenomena of vital magnetism. It is com- 
 mon to speak of the nervous system as consisting of 
 tlie brain, the spinal marrow, and the nerves springing 
 from them. This arrangement is true enough as far 
 as it goes ; but it is not sufficiently particular or 
 definite for our purpose. For upon examining the 
 interior of a human head, it will be found, that every 
 individual has two distinct brains, called, in anato- 
 mical language, the cerebrum and cerebellum; 
 which, although in popular language forming the en- 
 tire nervous mass, called the brain, are really as dis- 
 tinct, and yet as united, as the heart and lungs, and 
 having somewhat analogous offices to perform. But 
 to trace that analogy would be foreign to our present 
 purpose, which is not to present an entire sketch of 
 the physiology of the brain, however brief; but only 
 so much as is indispensably necessary to be known, 
 in order to comprehend the particular subject of this 
 enquiry. The cerebrum forms the upper, and very 
 much larger mass of the entire brain. Its surface is 
 everywhere disposed in wavy furrows, not unlike the 
 folds of the intestines ; and it is laterally divided into 
 two halves, called hemispheres, and into smaller divi- 
 sions called lobes. The interior is made up of various 
 cavities, called ventricles; portions of grey matter, 
 sometimes called vesicular substance, from the little 
 vesicles, or bladders, discoverable by the microscope 
 in these substances ; various closely arranged fibres, 
 called commisures, or joinings, from their office of 
 uniting the hemispheres, and probably enabling the 
 symmetrical sides to conspire in united action ; and 
 of an immense number of delicately arranged 7ninute 
 fibres, forming together what is called the medullary 
 substance of the brain. These fibres are arranged 
 into two classes; those carrying forth the behests 
 of the will, or mind, to the body ; and those bringing 
 to the general sensorium or mind, the sensations of 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 23 
 
 the body. On the surface of the brain is a layer of 
 grey substance^ formed of innumerable delicate vesi- 
 cles^ imbedded in an appropriate medium^ and called 
 by the older anatomists the cortical glands. However^ 
 physiologists may differ^ as to the exact microscopical 
 forms^ or the uses of the individual vesicles, the 
 highest authorities concur with the older philosophical 
 physiologists, in considering the cortical substance of 
 the cerebrum, as forming the general sensorium, or 
 material base of the perceptions and operations of the 
 mind. From this general sensorium one order of 
 fibres may be considered as departing ; and to it, the 
 other, or sensory order, as arriving. The general ar- 
 rangement of these fibres, and the cortical glands, may 
 be seen in the engraving. No. 1, at the end. This 
 is not intended for an exact representation of a section 
 of the brain, inasmuch as several things have been 
 omitted for the sake of clearness and simplicity. The 
 dotted and incurvated margin, 1, will give a general 
 idea of the form and arrangement of the minute 
 glands forming the sensorium; and the radiating lines 
 shew the general course of the departing and arriving 
 fibres, forming the efferent and afferent fibres of mo- 
 dern physiology. The reader is requested, carefully 
 to study these illustrative engravings, as it will render 
 our remarks, and the whole subject, much easier of 
 comprehension. 
 
 But the cerebellum, or little brain, as the word sig- 
 nifies, not only differs in size and situation, but also 
 in exterior and interior form : for the exterior surface, 
 instead of the wavy folds of the cerebrum, is arranged 
 in what are called laminae, or plates, which give it the 
 appearance of a series of curved lines, as may be seen in 
 the engraving. No. 2, at c, c, and the interior has an ar- 
 borescent, or tree-like appearance, so much so, that it has 
 received the name of arbor-vit?e, or, the tree of life. 
 This tree, or plant-like appearance, is very distinctly 
 shewn in the first engraving, at 4. This api)carancc 
 is entireh^ owing to the ditterent arrangement of tlic 
 fibres and grey substance. Now, viewing man as form- 
 
24 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 ed according to the infinite wisdom and perfect order 
 of a Divine Creator, we must expect to find consum- 
 mate order and design witliin him; and that every 
 organ of his body should be formed for some specific 
 and determinate use, for use is the great end of all 
 the Creator^s operations. Hence we may conclude, 
 that each of these brains has its own specific use ; and 
 such^ the more intimately the subject is examined, the 
 more will it be found the case. Such of those uses 
 and distinctions as are necessary to be known to un- 
 derstand the subject under consideration, will be 
 briefly pointed out. 
 
 The engraving. No. 2, represents the general form 
 of the base, or under part, of the human brain, as it 
 would appear if the upper part of the spinal cord had 
 been cut through, and the brain taken out of the cra- 
 nium or skull, and laid down with its under-surface 
 uppermost. For the sake of distinctness, the invest- 
 ing membrane is removed, and the blood-vessels 
 omitted. Various nerves are there shewn, issuing 
 from the base of the brain, the commissure, or joining 
 of the cerebellum, and the upper part of the medulla 
 oblongata, or beginning of the spinal marrow. Thus, 
 in front, are seen the bulbs of the olfactory nerves, or 
 nerves of smell, issuing from the posterior part of the 
 anterior lobes ; from these bulbs a multitude of nerv- 
 ous filaments descend, which are spread out on the 
 delicate membrane lining the labrynthine cavities con- 
 nected with the nose, and thus forming the organ of 
 smell. The optic nerves, or nerves of sight, also issue 
 from the under part of the cerebrum, near the inner 
 borders of the middle lobes, then approach each 
 other, and form a union, shewn in the engraving, and 
 called the optic commissure ; just beyond the com- 
 missure they are represented as cut across, for the sake 
 of shewing the olfactory bulbs ; but they actually pro- 
 ceed forwards in the form of two white cords, through 
 two orifices in the base of the skull at the back of the 
 orbits, and enter the orbits and proceed to each eye- 
 ball, where they spread out to form the delicate nerv- 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 25 
 
 ous expansion called the retina. Behind the optic 
 nerves are seen the nerves which move the eyes. Then 
 the fourth, fifth, and sixth pairs. These nerves, al- 
 though of interest to the physiologist^ present no fea- 
 tures of peculiar interest for our inquiry^ excepting, 
 perhaps^ the fifth pair, which partakes of the nature of 
 both the cerebral and cerebellar systems. The seventh 
 and eighth pair are particularly involved in mesmeric 
 phenomena ; but these will be noticed with the cere- 
 bellum. It is also worthy of notice, that all the nerves 
 of the cerebrum issue from its hase^ thus leaving the 
 fibrous and cortical portions free ; so that by this 
 means, the general sensorium is placed in a region 
 above the ministering nerves_, and thus, as it were, 
 midivay between the mind and outward nature. 
 
 Now it is essentially necessary to be known, in 
 order to form any correct idea of the phenomena of 
 mesmerism, that all the nerves of the body, innu- 
 merable as they may appear to be, are connected, 
 either directly or indirectly, by means of the spinal 
 cord, with the cerebrum, or cerebellum. Some, in 
 fact, arise directly from the brain ; but in speaking of 
 their origin, no reference is intended to theiv develojj- 
 merit in the embryo, but to their situation and use in 
 the perfect organism. Also, it is necessary to know, 
 that whatever may be the parental character, so to 
 speak, of any nerve, that character it preserves to its 
 termination, however circuitous its course may be, 
 and however its filaments may be mixed up with nerves 
 of another order, so as to form a compound nerve. 
 This is one of those traits of Divine simplicity, which 
 are so manifest in the animal economy. The blood 
 vessels freely anastamose, as it is styled ; that is, they 
 run into, or unite with, each other in all directions ; 
 but a nervous filament forms no union with its fellow, 
 but runs on uninterruptedly, and apparently inde- 
 pendently, from its origin to its termination. Now 
 all the nerves by which we feel or act, — that is, all 
 the nerves of voluntary motion and sensation, arc con- 
 nected with the cortical glands of the cerebrum, either 
 
 o 
 
26 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 directly_, or indirectly^ through the spinal marrow^ the 
 fibrous portion of which may be considered as a con- 
 timiation of the cerebrum in the body. The Spinal 
 Marrow^ or spinal cord^ which is contained in the 
 canal channelled through the vertebrae, or bones of 
 the back, commences within the cranium^ at the base 
 of the brain; its commencement is called, the medulla 
 oblongata^ and is shewn in the engravings 2 and 5,where 
 the different portions are delineated : it is also shewn 
 in engraving 1. (^) in its course downwards. It extends 
 in the adult^ to about the second lumbar vertebra/where 
 it terminates in a rounded point. The fibrous portion 
 of the spinal cord^ consists of two distinct columns, to 
 which a third may be added in its upper course. The 
 anterior, or front column^ is formed of what are styled 
 motor nerves, that is, nerves which are concerned in 
 voluntary motion, and it receives^, or gives origin to^ 
 the motor roots of the spinal nerves. In the anterior 
 column^ the fibres may be considered as descending. 
 The posterior, or hinder column^, of the spinal cord^ 
 consists of sensory fibres^ which may be considered as 
 ascending to the brain^ and into this column^ the 
 sensory roots of the spinal nerves are inserted. It is^ 
 therefore^ an assemblage of nerves of sensation. The 
 upper part of the spinal cord_, is sometimes divided 
 into a middle column^, which contains the roots of the 
 nerves of respiration. Engraving 3, is a representation 
 of a portion of the spinal cord viewed in front. The 
 investing membrane is turned back^ to shew the dis- 
 tinct roots of the pair of spinal nerves exhibited. The 
 fibres issuing from the anterior and posterior columns^ 
 are seen to be quite distinct. The anterior motor 
 fibres^ appear to go directly to the nerve, but the 
 posterior, sensory fibres, first enter the swelling, or 
 ganglion, shewn on the back part of the nerve. After- 
 ward the fibres proceed side by side^ but preserve their 
 distinctive character. 
 
 If the brain is attentively examined, the same se- 
 paration of fibresy and a similar systematic arrange- 
 ment, is observable. Engraving 4^ represents a por- 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 27 
 
 tion of the brain dissected^ and on a larger scale than 
 engra^dngs 1 and 2. Here portions of nervous fibres 
 may be seen passing by and through other nervous 
 portions^ and yet having no connection with them. 
 Thus^ a portion of motor fibres are seen passing under 
 the arch of the optic nerves^ and in nowise interfering 
 with the nerves of sight. Lower down they pass 
 through the appendage and commissure of the cere- 
 bellum^ called the pons Varolii^ or bridge of Varolius, 
 and yet they are uninfluenced by the cerebellum^ but 
 preserve their cerebral character^ and pass intact^ and 
 directly, into the forepart of the spinal cord. At (6) 
 a column of sensory nerves may be seen ascending 
 from the posterior portion of the cord, and passing by 
 or in close connection with other nervous portions, 
 without losing its ovm specific character. Thus the 
 arrangement of the spinal cord is seen to pervade the 
 more complicated structure of the brain. Now it is 
 by this mode of arrangement, that the true character 
 of the nerves at their origin is preserved to their ex- 
 tremities. If the arm is lifted, it is so, by muscular 
 power, communicated by nerves having their true ori- 
 gin in the cerebrum. The same may be said of walk- 
 ing, running, or any other action under the control of 
 the will. All these voluntary and external actions, are 
 done by and through the medium of the cerebrum. 
 Hence the physiological use of the cerebrum is, to 
 originate and control voluntary motion, and to receive 
 the impressions brought by the sensory nerves. It is 
 thus the souFs medium of voluntary action, and com- 
 munication with the external world : — the great organ 
 of what is called animal life. Hence pressure on the 
 cerebrum, by paralyzing its action, instantly suspends 
 all sensation and capability of motion. 
 
 But the office of the cerebellum, the smaller and 
 curiously organized portion of the entire brain, is of 
 another kind. This is not the place to discuss the 
 various opinions which have been propounded as to 
 the use of this part of the nervous centre, nor of the 
 exact function of the vesicular interior portion of the 
 
28 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 spinal marrow^ sometimes called the true spinal cord. 
 What is called the reflex action of the spinal cord^ and 
 its connection and harmony with the general functions 
 of the cerebellum^ can be more appropriately discussed 
 in a work expressly devoted to the physiology of this 
 part of the nervous system. Suffice it here to say^ 
 that from the general investigation of these parts, 
 combined with the peculiar opportunities I have had 
 for investigating the action of the brain by the faculty 
 of lucidity^ the cerebellum may be considered as the 
 great central organ or fountain of the functions of 
 organic life : that is, of the life of the internal organs 
 of the body, and of the involuntary motions. In this 
 respect, the true spinal cord is a continuation of the 
 cerebellum ; and reflex action, together with the abi- 
 lity to move the limbs, so as to execute the behests of 
 the will transmitted by the cerebral voluntary nerves, 
 may be classified with cerebellar functions. The 
 pulsations of the heart ; the circulation of the blood ; 
 the digestive action of the stomach and bowels ; the 
 actions of the reproductive organs; in a word, the 
 thousand functions incessantly going on within us, 
 and over which, fortunately for our safety, our wills 
 have no control ; — all these internal functions are un- 
 der the control and direction of nerves proceeding 
 either directly or indirectly from the cerebellum, or 
 its appendages. This is chiefly effected by the instru- 
 mentality of the Great Sympathetic nerves, and the 
 eighth pair already alluded to. 
 
 The eighth pair of cranial nerves, called also the 
 par vagum, or wandering nerve, also the pneumo- 
 gastric, or nerve of the lungs and stomach, — arises by 
 a number of filaments from between the olivary and 
 restiform or rope-like bodies of the medulla oblongata, 
 and its fibres may be traced backwards into the grey 
 substance of the floor of the fourth ventricle; a cavity 
 situated between the upper part of the back of the 
 medulla oblongata, and the cerebellum. From the 
 medulla oblongata a column of fibres is continued 
 into the cerebellum, as may be seen in engraving 1 {^), 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 29 
 
 The pneumo-gastric thus has its origin in the direct 
 stream of the influence of the cerebellum^ and is thus 
 chiefly a cerebellar nerve^ although by some of its 
 filaments it is connected with the system of the cere- 
 brum^ and thus possesses a mixed character, the efl'ect 
 of which is principally seen in the function of respira- 
 tion^ which is^ partially^ a voluntary^ but, principally, 
 an involuntary action. The Great Sympathetic 
 Nerves differ from all the other nerves in the body, 
 both in their arrangement and their form. For they 
 descend on each side of the spinal column^ and in 
 their descent are studded with small kernels or knots, 
 called ganglia, each of which seems like a species of 
 independent nervous centre. The sympathetic nerve 
 is associated with the pneumo-gastric in supplying 
 the nervous system of the stomach and lungs, and of 
 the heart; and, by its intimate union wdth this im- 
 portant nerve, it is brought into connection with the 
 cerebellum. Numerous twigs enter and leave the 
 various ganglia, and by these ramifications the sympa- 
 thetic is united with all the nerves of the body. 
 Engraving 5, is a diagram intended to illustrate 
 the coui'se and arrangement of the pneumo-gastric 
 and sympathetic nerves. At 1 is the bridge of Varo- 
 lius, forming the commissure of the cerebellum; from 
 this descends the medulla oblongata and spinal mar- 
 row, and from the latter, various spinal nerves are 
 given off on each side. The eighth pair, or pneumo- 
 gastric, is shewn, as arising from between the olivary 
 and restiform bodies, and after the junction of the 
 filamentary roots, and the formation of a ganglion on 
 each nerve, descending towards the chest, on each 
 side, but at some distance from the spinal marrow. 
 Between these nerves and the spinal cord, the sympa- 
 thetic is seen descending, and the ganglions, or knots, 
 in its course^ together with the ascending, descending, 
 and uniting filaments, are roughly pourtraycd. The 
 diagram is to be considered rather as an illustration 
 than a representation ; for these nervous systems are 
 so complicated, that they could only be shewn on a 
 
30 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 very large scale. Those who wish to see the various 
 ramifications of the sympathetic^ may do so in 
 Manec^s grand plate^ and in some of the reduced 
 copies. 
 
 The great sympathetic and pneumo-gastric nerves^ 
 viewed as to their origin^ connection, and uses^ may 
 be considered as the trunk of the system of the cere- 
 bellum, just as the fibrous portion of the spinal mar- 
 row forms the trunk of the system of the cerebrum; 
 and by these trunks^ together with the vesicular por- 
 tion of the spinal cord^ and the various spinal nerves, 
 the entire brain is, as it were, omnipresent in the 
 body. Now the existence, and distinct functions, of 
 these two brains, and the systems of nerves dependent 
 on them, must be carefully remembered, if we would 
 understand the phenomena of somnolism, or ordinary 
 mesmerism. It is also necessary that we possess some 
 idea of the mode by which the nerves become the in- 
 struments of volition and sensation. Microscopic 
 investigations have demonstrated, that each nervous 
 fibril is a hollow tube, containing a substance called 
 neurine; and the cellular, or areolar tissue by which 
 the fibrils are combined into nervous cords, is also 
 permeable by a delicate fluid, or rather, a delicate 
 moisture intervenes between each nervous fibril, and 
 the various small bundles of fibrils, of which the en- 
 tire nerve consists. It is also known, that by mus- 
 cular exertion, electricity is developed : and the vesi- 
 cular substances of the brain have been supposed to 
 possess powers similar to an electric battery, and that 
 the nervous fibres are the carriers of the energy there 
 elaborated. As an analogy, the idea is a good one ; 
 but when we conceive the two as identical, there is 
 little doubt but that we are in error. From the re- 
 sults of many experiments, to which reference is made 
 farther on, it is evident that certain imponderable 
 elements arc continually flowing through the animal 
 organism; and in peculiar states of that organism, 
 these currents are reversed. These currents have, 
 therefore, a directive property, and so far, ^polarity; 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 31 
 
 but they have not the exact properties of either mag- 
 netism or electricity: although they may have the 
 greatest affinity with the latter element. My own 
 researches lead to the conclusion, that a vital aura is 
 generated in the spherules of the brain and spinal 
 cord, and, in fact, wherever nervous vesicular matter 
 is found. This aura has a spiral motion along the 
 surfaces of the nervous fibrils, and, perhaps, of the 
 entire nerve, and it is the primary agent or effect of 
 the Living Force, and the medium of connection also, 
 with the elements of the macrocosm. The contained 
 neurine, or nervous fluid, as it exists in li\dng bodies, 
 is necessary to preserve the nerve in working order ; 
 and when, from any cause, there is a deficiency in 
 this highly elaborated fluid, the nerve is, in proportion 
 to that deficiency, unfitted to transmit the aura. This 
 subject is still undergoing investigation, and will be 
 further explained and illustrated in another work. It 
 is briefly alluded to here, as it will be seen to throw 
 light on some well-known, but curious mesmeric phe- 
 nomena. 
 
 It will further elucidate our subject to know the 
 condition of the brain in wakefulness and sleep ; for 
 it will be evident to every enquirer, that there is an 
 analogy, and indeed similarity, between the observed 
 effects of the mesmeric somnolency and the phe- 
 nomena of ordinary sleep, especially as regards 
 dreaming. The differing activity of the cerebrum in 
 a state of wakefulness and sleep, has occasionally been 
 seen in cases where the skull has been injured : it 
 might also be inferred from an attentive consideration 
 of the structure and functions of the different parts of 
 the cerebral mass ; but it is plainly discernable by the 
 faculty of lucidity. Perfect wakefulness consists in 
 the activity of the entire brain, especially of the cere- 
 brum. This larger portion of the brain has already 
 been stated to consist of a mass of minute fibres, con- 
 nected with the little cortical glands, as shewn in 
 engraving, 1. In the active state of tltis portion of 
 the brain, or, in other words, in the wakeful state, these 
 
32 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 fibres are comparatively erect and distinct from one 
 another^ and the corresponding lobules are also suf- 
 ficiently separated so as to be able to move freely. 
 The general arrangement of these fibres^, with their 
 parent glands^ permits them to move either singly, or 
 in greater or lesser groups ; and hence arises the power 
 of the will to exercise such an immense variety of 
 muscular actions^ and the rapidity and delicacy with 
 which the behests of the will are transmitted by the 
 nerves. When the cerebrum is in the fullest state of 
 activity, these cortical spherules are elevated and pro- 
 jected to the extreme boundaries permitted by the 
 skull and its lining membrane, the dura mater ; and 
 indeed, in the activity of dreaming, they have been 
 seen, in cases where portions of the skull have been 
 removed, actually projecting beyond the circum- 
 ference of their normal boundary. Every one must 
 have experienced at times, an inability to sink into a 
 state of sleep, notwithstanding the absence of any 
 discoverable disease, and the greatest endeavours to 
 court repose. This species of unwished for wakeful- 
 ness, is entirely owing to the erect, distinct, and active 
 condition of the cortical spherules of the cerebrum, 
 and an inability in the brain to collapse. For, in a 
 state of inactivity or sleep, the fibres of the cerebrum 
 collapse, or fall together, the cortical spherules or 
 glands press on each other, and hence the capability 
 of individual action ceases, and general insensibility 
 and sleep follows. This is the natural and healthy 
 action; in diseased states of collapse, lethargy and 
 apoplectic stupor are the results. 
 
 It has already been stated, that the organic and 
 merely natural functions of the body, are under the 
 control and direction of the cerebellum and its ap- 
 pendages. Of this action we are unconscious, but of 
 the activity of the cerebrum we are conscious; and 
 during its rule, — that is, while our ivills actuate the 
 animal economy, and the sensory nerves convey to the 
 sensorium within the cerebrum, the various im- 
 pressions made by outward objects, the cerebrum 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. o3 
 
 appears to dominate and rule the system. But when 
 sleep seals up the eyelids^ and the activity of the 
 cerebrum ceases^ then nature^ or the involuntary 
 portion of our nervous centre^ — that is the cerebellum, 
 with its derivatives, has the entire control and direc- 
 tion of the animal kingdom. It is well known that 
 ^^ balmy sleep^Ms '^^ tired nature^ s kind restorer :^^ but 
 it is not so generally known^ that one great reason 
 for the refreshing and restorative nature of sleep^ 
 consists in the complete suspension of the faculties of 
 the cerebrum, and the operations of nature being 
 carried on by the cerebellar system, without any of 
 those manifold disturbing causes, which arise from 
 our voluntary and conscious activities. The form, 
 structure, and functions of the cerebellum, neither 
 permits nor requires the complicated and infinitely 
 varied motions of the cerebrum. It possesses a 
 general poiver oiex^din^ion and contraction ; and this 
 power is also possessed by the cerebrum, whose hemi- 
 spheres admit of a like contraction and expansion, in 
 addition to the individual activity of specific fibres 
 and spherules, or groups of spherules. In profound 
 sleep, therefore, the whole brain is reduced to the 
 simple primary organic action of the cerebellum. 
 
 This expansive and contractile motion of the brain, 
 must not be confounded with the pulsatile movements 
 observable in the heads of young childi^en, and which 
 is chiefly confined to the arteries of the dura mater ; 
 but it is an independent, and, as it may be styled, 
 automatic movement, synchronous, or keeping time, not 
 with the pulsations of the heart, but with the respira- 
 tion of the lungs. In fact, it might be shewn that 
 the automatic movement of the brain, is the internal 
 cause of the respiratory movement of the lungs, and 
 that thus it conspires with the external cause, — that 
 is, the admission of the atmospheric air, to communi- 
 cate a regular and combined series of motions to all 
 the viscera of the body. The motion of the brain is 
 just beginning to be admitted as a fact in physiology ; 
 but the discoverv is not recent, for it has lain dormant 
 
34 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 for a century^ in the latinity of the profoundest phy- 
 siologist of the last age. I have satisfied myself of 
 the fact by repeated experiments, and also, that the 
 spinal cord possesses a similar movement. 
 
 One important result of the brain^s automatic 
 movement is, that it has the control of the blood cir- 
 culating within it, and is not, in this respect, governed 
 by the heart, though dependant on that organ for the 
 supply of the living fluid. This has been generally 
 overlooked, although the form and course of the blood 
 vessels supplying the brain, and the general economy 
 of the system, point distinctly to such a conclusion. 
 If the arteries in their course to the bodily viscera, are 
 everywhere attended by nerves from the great sym- 
 pathetic system, so that the course of the blood within 
 them, propelled by the heart, may be regulated and 
 directed by nervous energy, acting in unison with 
 the organic nerves of the diflerent viscera, and thus, 
 in a state of health, the blood may be rather invited 
 into, than forced upon the visceral organs ; how much 
 more, may we expect to find the great nervous centre 
 itself, provided with a power of regulating its supply. 
 The heart may be compared to the weights of a clock, 
 or the mainspring of a watch, and the nerves accom- 
 panying the arteries, to the pendulum or balance wheel; 
 and every one acquainted with the mechanism of 
 clocks and watches, knows, that their correctness as 
 time-keepers depends on the proper adjustment and 
 mutual action of these two forces. So does the 
 general health of the body depend upon a proper 
 adjustment of these living forces; and the derange- 
 ment of one force, will lead to the disorder of the 
 other. 
 
 The primary physical cause of sleep, consists in the 
 collapse, or falling together, of the cortical spherules, 
 and medullary fibres of the cerebrum; the secondary 
 cause, Avhich acts as a one with the primary, is, that 
 by this collapse the blood is sltut ojf] as it were, and 
 prevented from entering the finer channels of the brain, 
 especially those individually supplying the minute 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 35 
 
 spherules. The blood is thus confined to its general 
 office of supplying nutrition and living force. To 
 enable the brain the better to control the force of the 
 hearty and to form a distinct boundary between the 
 province of the heart and the province of the brain^ 
 the main arteries supplying the brain, just before 
 entering it, are bent into a tortuous course, which has 
 no direct parallel in any other part of the body ; so 
 that on the mechanical principles of hydraulics, the 
 crimson torrent is impeded, and partially arrested in 
 its course. The engraving, No. 6, represents the ar- 
 teries supplying the brain, and the principal branches, 
 removed from their situation, and placed on a flat sur- 
 face, or plane, so as to shew something of their curva- 
 tures, and general arrangement. The vertebral arte- 
 ries, 1, 1, pass through a canal channelled in the cervical 
 vertebrae, or bones of the neck, and then wind back- 
 wards around the articulating process of the atlas, or 
 first bone of the neck, before entering the skull, through 
 the large opening. The two vertebrals then unite to 
 form the basilar artery, that is, the strait artery ly- 
 ing along the base of the brain, and from this the 
 branches proceed at right angles^ as shewn in the en- 
 graving. The vertebrals are the arteries of the cere- 
 bellum, and it will be obvious to the reader, that the 
 blood will be rather invited than forced into that 
 organ. For the course of the blood is forwards to- 
 wards the communicating arteries ; but there the 
 stream is arrested by the flexure of the posterior 
 cerebral arteries, 7, 7, and the fluxion in the com- 
 municating branches : the blood has, therefore, to pass 
 from the basilar artery in lateral currents, as shewn in 
 the figure; and is thus, by all these contrivances, 
 mechanically impeded from rushing of its own accord 
 into the recesses of the cerebellum ; while at the same 
 time, these same contrivances, serve to keep the 
 basilar artery filled, as a perpetual reservoir for the 
 supply of the great nervous fountain of life. The two 
 great ends oi perpetual supply, and regulated quantity , 
 are thus provided for. 
 
36 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 In the cerebrum^ the regulating principle, is still 
 further provided for. For the flexure of the internal 
 carotids_, which are the arteries of the cerebrum^ is 
 greater than that of the vertebrals^ as may be seen in 
 the engraving. Mr. Erasmus Wilson observes^ ^^ The 
 course of this artery is remarkable for the number of 
 angular curves it forms ; one or two of these flexures 
 are sometimes seen in the cervical portion of the 
 vessel^ near the base of the skull ; and by the side of 
 the sella turcica, it resembles the italic letter s, placed 
 horizontally.^' It will be evident also^ from the re- 
 presentation given, that although the carotids are 
 larger than the vertebrals^ yet from the peculiar ar- 
 rangementj and comparative smallness of the branches 
 proceeding directly from them^ there will be less 
 power to force the blood into the cerebrum than into 
 the cerebellum. It will be seen also^ that notwith- 
 standing the many hindrances to the circulation of 
 the bloody so as to favour the regulating principle, still 
 a supply of blood to the brain is insured. For if the 
 supply by the vertebrals was cut ofi*^ by ligature, or 
 otherwise^ the carotids would furnish a stream by the 
 communicating branches^ though in deficient quan- 
 tity ; and vice versa, if the course in the carotids were 
 stopped^ the vertebrals would furnish some supply by 
 the same channels. So guarded are the avenues of 
 life ! From these communicating branches_, this 
 group of arteries is called the circle of Willis. Ana- 
 tomists and physiologists^ have noticed the communi- 
 cating contrivance; but have strangely overlooked^ 
 the equally obvious reasons for the flexures and gene- 
 ral arrangement just pointed out. 
 
 The venous system of the brain^ corresponds with 
 the arterial. In the body the veins are furnished 
 with valves, by which the return^ or regurgitation of 
 the blood is prevented, and the whole arrangement is 
 such, as to assist, and force on the blood to the heart. 
 In the brain this is not so ; but, the exit, as well as 
 the entrance of the blood, is, as it were, self-governed, 
 For^ as also observed by Mr. Wilson, in his Anatomist^s 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 37 
 
 Vade Mecum, *^The cerebral veins are remarkable 
 for the absence of valves, and for the extreme tenuity 
 of their coats /^ and^ " the superior cerebral veins^ 
 seven or eight in number, on each side, pass obliquely 
 forwards, and terminate in the superior longitudinal 
 sinus, in the opposite direction to the course of the 
 stream of the blood in the smusP This arrangement 
 is shewn in the engraving 7. The fold of the 
 superior and densest membrane of the skull, called 
 the dura mater, and which dips down between the 
 hemispheres of the cerebrum, and from its general 
 form, is called /ate cerebri, or the sickle of the brain, 
 is represented at 1, 1. Above is seen the venous 
 canal, channelled in the substance of the dura mater, 
 and called the superior, or upper longitudinal sinus, 
 2, 2, and below the inferior, or lower sinus, with their 
 connections, and receiving veins. The oblique po- 
 sition of the superior cerebral veins is shewn, and the 
 course of the stream of the blood, is indicated by the 
 direction of the arrows. Here, then, the absence of 
 valves, the tenuity of the coats, by which the reactive 
 power of the vein is diminished; and the oblique 
 position of the cerebral veins, contrary to the course 
 of the blood, all conspire to impede what may be 
 called the attractive, or suction-power of the heart, 
 and to retain the blood under the government of the 
 brain, until fairly within the sinus of the dura mater. 
 So that the invitation of the arterial blood, and the 
 discharge of the venous blood, are, by a series of me- 
 chanical contrivances, placed in harmony with the 
 automatic movement, and presiding control of the 
 brain. Whatever, therefore, induces a change in the 
 internal state of the cortical spherules, and the de- 
 pendant fibres of the cerebrum, changes the state of 
 its automatic action, modifies the influx and current 
 of the blood, and thence produces, either somnolency, 
 or watchfulness. 
 
 Having thus briefly pointed out what there is good 
 reason to believe, is the true physiology of the brain, 
 it is now proposed to present a sketch of the various 
 
38 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 phases, under which vital magnetic, or mesmeric phe- 
 nomena present themselves, and then proceed to shew^ 
 that a true physiology of the nervous system, combined 
 with just psychological ideas, famishes the true keij to 
 unlock these generally considered mysteries. 
 
 The simplest visible state, has been classified as 
 that of mesmeric drowsiness or sleep, which may vary 
 in intensity, from the mere feeling of heaviness or 
 drowsiness, to a state of light and placid sleep. This 
 state, and even the more advanced ones, may be in- 
 duced by a variety of methods, provided the subject 
 possesses what may be styled, the mesmeric condition 
 of the brain: it does not depend so much on the 
 operator, or the mode of manipulation, as upon the 
 receptive state of the subject. This is the reason 
 why such apparently discordant results have been ob- 
 tained, and such difi^ering views entertained of the 
 causative influence. The earlier magnetizers prac- 
 tised a variety of complicated passes, pressing of the 
 thumbs, and fixed gaze on the eyes; and they taught, 
 that by these means a fluid, which they called Animal 
 Magnetism, passed from the operator to the subject. 
 A similar influence has been considered as the active 
 agent, by many who have adopted the name of Mes- 
 merism. There is, undoubtedly, some elementary 
 connection, between the operator and his subject in 
 all really mesmeric states, as we shall see in the sequel ; 
 and mind is, no doubt, the primary agent, in the 
 production of what I prefer calling psychical phe- 
 nomena. But all these states have their peculiar 
 physiological basis; and for the more common results, 
 a physiological change is sufficient. This may be in- 
 duced in those possessing the mesmeric condition, 
 without the aid of an operator, merely by the subject 
 steadfastly gazing for a longer or shorter period at 
 some small fixed object held near the eye, and upon 
 which the whole attention is concentrated. Here, both 
 the mental and bodily acts, are just such as conduce 
 to the somnolent condition of the brain in susceptible 
 persons, and these only are aff^ected by it, just as 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 39 
 
 happens under tlie ordinary mesmeric mode of pro- 
 ceeding. Dr. Braid introduced this mode^ and^ pro- 
 bably,, to avoid the prejudice against the name of 
 mesmerism^ called it Hypnotizing the patients ; that 
 is^ according to the meaning of the Greek root of the 
 term, sleepizing them. But in reality, all hypnotized 
 patients are mesmerised, and mesmerised patients are 
 hypnotized. Where the party is sufficiently suscepti- 
 ble, the merely hypnotic, or somnolent condition 
 prepares the way for all the subsequent developments; 
 and hence Dr. Braid found in some of his subjects 
 most interesting displays of phreno-mesmerism. I 
 have induced the state by all the methods, but prefer 
 the ordinary mesmeric mode, as the safest and best. 
 When parties gaze too long, without experiencing 
 the mesmeric somnolence, an undue determination of 
 blood to the fore part of the head, is very likely to be 
 the result. There is another mode of operating, re- 
 cently introduced from America, called Electrical 
 Psychology, or Biology; but the state induced, is 
 essentially that which is understood by the mes- 
 meric. 
 
 My usual mode of proceeding, is, simply to place the 
 patient in a sitting posture before me, and to take both 
 his hands in my left, and then place my right hand 
 on his head, at the same time, desiring the subject 
 to yield himself willingly to the expected influence, 
 and to concentrate his attention en me by looking at 
 my eyes. If the patient does not speedily yield, I 
 then try the effect of a few passes, made from the fore- 
 head doivnwards, or from the back of the head, down- 
 wards along the course of the spine. If the party can 
 be mesmerised, hypnotized, or whatever else it may be 
 called, it will generally take place within half an hour, 
 or at furthest an hour. But if at the expiration of 
 the former period, no effect is produced, I should 
 have little hope of succeeding at that sitting. Some 
 will speedily yield on the first trial. I have frequently 
 seen this take place after five or ten minutes^ trial, 
 and, sometimes, after a mere Avave or two of the hand 
 
40 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 over tte boPiiiet of a susceptible female. In the first 
 stages of mesmeric sleep^ the patient generally feels a 
 marked degree of tranquility, and evinces considerable 
 disinclination to be withdrawn from it. Some^ how- 
 ever^ are morose and heavy. This simple state, I 
 consider the most useful, and all that is required, in 
 cases of disease, or as a curative agent; indeed, in 
 some of the most marked cases of benefit on record, 
 the patients have never experienced anything beyond 
 a gentle soothing influence. But it is sufficiently ob- 
 vious, how valuable such a direct soothing influence 
 must be in allaying irritability, and restoring the 
 diseased to health; unattended, as such influence 
 is, with any of the inconveniences of ordinary nar- 
 cotics. 
 
 Coma, is merely a deeper state of the mesmeric 
 somnolency. When this state is established, all the 
 rest may foUovr ; some of the interesting phases are 
 sure to do so. In this condition the vital aura, flowing 
 along the nerves, is strikingly susceptible of directive 
 influence, and hence arises the very common phe- 
 nomenon of catalepsy, or constrained rigidity of the 
 muscles. By a few strokes of the hand, the patient^s 
 arm will become rigid, as in death, and he will have 
 no power of bending it, or of lowering it, if extended. 
 If the hand of a person of about the same physical 
 strength as the mesmerised subject, is placed in the 
 hand of the subject, and the fingers made to clasp it, 
 it will be found almost impossible to withdraw it, so 
 tight will be the grasp. But, what appears the 
 strangest thing is, that, notwithstanding this great 
 apparent exertion of muscular power, the mesmerised 
 subjects will continue to converse on various topics, 
 and pay not the slightest attention to the state of 
 their limbs, or the use to which that muscular power 
 is being applied. They appear to be wholly uncon- 
 scious of their peculiar state, or of the muscular power 
 they are displaying. The amount of that power may 
 be convincingly proved, by any one holding out an 
 arm extended in one position only for a few minutes. 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 41 
 
 especially if some weighty such as a poker, is held at the 
 same time by the extended hand. Yet a mesmerised 
 cataleptic subject will hold out the arm for an indefi- 
 nite period, without any apparent langour; and sus- 
 tain the additional strain of a moderate weight, as if 
 the laws of muscular action and gravity were sus- 
 pended ! Of course, there are bounds to these expe- 
 riments ; a strong man will have sufficient power to 
 bend down the arm of most mesmerised females; but 
 the arm will yield to the pressure, like an inanimate 
 lever, and as soon as the pressure is removed, will 
 rebound^ as if elastic^, to the position in which it had 
 been placed by the operator. 
 
 But the phenomena above alluded to, are among 
 the simplest of these displays. Where the patient is 
 sufficiently susceptible, the mouth may be closed, by 
 a single pressing of the lips together, and this may 
 be done so instantaneously, as to leave a word half- 
 pronounced; and then, by a single pass, as speedily 
 set at liberty. Even the nostrils may be partially 
 closed, by a single pinch, so as instantly to produce 
 the nasal twang ^ common upon stoppage of the nasal 
 passages by cold, or by malformation ; and, then, as 
 quickly, by a mere wave of the hand, be restored to 
 perfect freedom, and the accustomed tone of voice. 
 Some subjects, while putting themselves in various 
 postures, may instantly be rendered immoveable, and 
 statue-like in any posture. I saw this beautifully ex- 
 emplified in two subjects gperated on by Mr. Spencer 
 Hall; one a young man, the other a youth. Under 
 the influence of phreno-mesmerism and music, they 
 assumed the most beautiful attitudes, balancing them- 
 selves, sometimes, on the fore part of one foot. By 
 stopping the music, and a single pass, Mr. Hall ar- 
 rested their motions so suddenly, that they remained 
 immoveably balanced in the position in which their 
 motions were arrested. Mr. Hall lifted one oft* the 
 floor, while thus rigidly cataleptic, and the legs and 
 arms still retained the same relative position to oacli 
 other j and when set on the floor again, on one foot 
 
43 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 as before^, the body stood firm, so exactly was the 
 centre of gravity preserved. I have not been able to 
 find a subject equal to these^ in this respect. An- 
 other singular result of cataleptic action^ is the ap- 
 parent attraction vrhich subsists between the subject 
 and inanimate objects. By a single pass, or pressure, 
 an individual may be rooted, as it were, by his feet 
 to the floor, as if held, by an irresistible attraction ; 
 or seated immoveably in a chair; or his hands fixed 
 so firmly to a wall, bench, or any other object, that he 
 finds it impossible to withdraw them, although violent 
 efi'orts are made to do so. If a rod, or any other suit- 
 able article be put in the hand, and the hand closed 
 by the operator, by no eff*ort can the subject let it go; 
 although he may be so far demesmerised, as to be 
 conscious of his state. On the contrary, by a mere 
 pass of the hand of the operator, and sometimes, even 
 by an effort of his will, without any outward visible 
 action, tjie mesmerised party finds it equally impossi- 
 ble to retain his hold. We shall notice these states 
 again, under the head of Phantasy. 
 
 From a series of experiments with my clairvoyant 
 subject, both while in the full mesmeric state, and 
 when recalled to wakeful consciousness, but with the 
 lucid faculty in activity, it appears, that the physiolo- 
 gical cause of mesmeric rigidity, consists in the altered 
 condition of the vital electric current, and the state 
 of the blood. The blood is resolvable into many in- 
 gredients; but, as the living fluid, it may be con- 
 sidered as possessing only two distinct substances, 
 which consist of an infinitude of very small corpuscles, 
 or globules, as they have been called, floating in a 
 straw-coloured fluid, called the serum ; the redness 
 of the blood being due to the presence of these cor- 
 puscles. There is a general life in the blood, and an 
 individual life in every globule ; for the globules are 
 receptive of, and under the influence of, the vital 
 aura, or electricity. There is a current of this vital 
 aura proceeding spirally along the motor nerves ; and 
 currents also accompany the arteries and veins; in 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 43 
 
 fact^ from tlie multiplicity of arteries^ veins^ and 
 nerves, the entire mass of the body is pervaded by 
 this subtile fluid. When, by pressure, or downward 
 passes, the directive force of this elementary fluid is 
 changed, there ensues a mutual attraction between 
 the current accompanying the artery, and the con- 
 tained globules ; the effect of which is to separate the 
 globules from the serum in which they float, and to 
 withdraw them to the periphery, or inner surfaces of 
 the artery, and to allow the serum to pass along the 
 centre. By this means the globules become appa- 
 rently clotted together, but move on in hollow spires. 
 Nearly the same thing is observable in the returning 
 veins, and the same condition appears to pervade the 
 limb, but is more obvious in the larger vessels. From 
 this altered directive force, mutual attraction, and 
 agglomeration of the globules, arises the general rigi- 
 dity. Mesmeric rigidity has been most beneficially 
 employed as a curative agent, in the restoration to 
 strength of palsied, or weakened limbs. In the suc- 
 cessful cases, the patients have been sufficiently sus- 
 ceptible, to become the subjects of mesmeric rigidity; 
 and by keeping the weak limb under its influence, the 
 muscular energy has become developed. The best 
 and most amusing displays of catalepsy, are generally 
 found in fresh subjects. 
 
 Another striking result of the full development of 
 the mesmeric coma, is anesthesia, or insensibility to 
 LIGHT and PAIN, or in other words, the absence of ex- 
 ternal sensation. If the eye of a patient in the full 
 somnolent state, is examined, it will generally be 
 found drawn vpivards and inivards, and this, perhaps, 
 in proportion to the complete development of the 
 state j but it will exhibit little, if any, susceptibihty 
 to the influence of light. I have satisfied myself by 
 repeated and careful observation, that all external 
 vision is withdrawn. There arc, however, stages of 
 coma, in which the eye remains open, but the pu])il 
 fixed, or nearly so, and without the power of sight. 
 In slight coma, and in the simple mesmeric sleep, the 
 
44 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 sight is not withdrawn ; for although the patients are 
 frequently unable to open the eyes_, yet^ on the lids 
 being raised^ they can see as usual. The state now 
 under notice^ is most striking^ most certain, and at- 
 tested by the most competent professional authorities; 
 but it is comparatively rare. I have only seen one 
 perfect instance of it, but, with very limited observa- 
 tion, several, in whom it partially existed. In a com- 
 plete case^ there is the healthy skin, with its infini- 
 tude of nervous papillae, but it exhibits no sign of 
 feeling. The most sensitive parts may be pinched, or 
 pricked with needles or pins, and the patient exhibit 
 no consciousness of suffering, or in fact of any kind 
 of feeling, but will continue to converse with the mes- 
 meriser^ or by-standers^ without noticing in the least 
 degree, the apparently painful experiments. Nay 
 more,, it is an undoubted fact, that the most painful 
 surgical operations have been performed, both in this 
 country and in others, without the patient evincing 
 any susceptibility. One case was briefly narrated in 
 the first edition of this work, and that I again repeat, 
 because the professional persons engaged were of the 
 highest eminence in Paris ; the case is fully recorded 
 in the French Medical Journals, and is also contained 
 in the Fenny Cyclop(Rdia^ under the article of Som- 
 nambulism, so that the reader may easily assure him- 
 self of its genuineness. But since this work first went 
 to press, I have seen as many accounts of surgical 
 operations performed in India, without pain^ while 
 the patients were under the influence of the mesmeric 
 coma, as would occupy all our pages. Some of these 
 operations were of the most formidable kind ; the re- 
 moval of immense tumours, weighing 30 and 40 
 pounds, and some even much larger. Some years 
 ago a similar operation was performed on a Chinese 
 in London; but the patient died on the operation 
 talkie ; the shock was more than nature could endure. 
 But in these more formidable Indian cases, the pa- 
 tients made good recoveries, and were spared the 
 shock; as well as the pain. It would seem that the 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 45 
 
 HiDcloo races^ are peculiarly susceptible of tlie mes- 
 meric influences^ and are thus easily put into the 
 state of coma. 
 
 An elderly French lady^ Madame Plantin, was the 
 subject of cancer in the breast. Her physician^ Dr. 
 Chapelain, was a practiser of mesmerism^ or^ as the 
 French call it^ magnetism^ and he had frequently 
 employed that agency^ in conjunction with other 
 means^ to abate^ and^ if possible^ cure^ that dreadful 
 malady. But he found; that although he could al- 
 ways allay pain^, and put the lady into a state of com- 
 plete ease by mesmerising her^ yet the disease con- 
 tinued its ravages^ and the only hope was considered 
 to be in an operation ; — that is_, by amputating the 
 breast. When this only alternative was proposed to 
 her in the wakeful or normal state^ it produced the 
 most intense anguish and apprehension ; but in the 
 abnormal mesmeric state^ she would discuss the matter 
 calmly with her physician and friends. At last the 
 operation was determined on^ and M. Jules Cloquet^ 
 the eminent Parisian surgeon^ was chosen for the 
 operator. It took place on the 14th of Aprils 1829 j 
 and the surgeon^ in his narrative of the case, says, 
 that he found the lady seated in a chair, her eyes 
 closed as if in sleep, yet conversing with her physician, 
 who had put her into the mesmeric, or somnolent, state 
 some short time before. She spoke calmly of the in- 
 tended operation; removed her own dress to expose 
 her bosom to the sui'geon^s knife; and during the 
 operation, which lasted about a quarter of an hour, she 
 conversed freely with the surgeon, and with the physi- 
 cian, who was seated by her, supporting the arm on 
 the diseased side, without exhibiting the slightest pain 
 or consciousness of what was going on. The lady was 
 then put to bed, and carefully attended to, without 
 beinrj awaked from the mesmeric state. On the next 
 day but one, the first dressings were removed, usually 
 a most painful trial to the patient; the wound dressed 
 again, and then, after the lapse of some time, shew as 
 aroused; having been kept for more than two days in the 
 
46 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 mesmeric or somnolent state. When awakened, she was 
 unconscious of all that had transpired since she was 
 put into the sleep, more than two days before ! When 
 she discoveredthatherbreasthadbeenremoved, that the 
 wound had been dressed, and found herself surrounded 
 by anxious and sympathising relatives, her feelings 
 may be better imagined than described ! After the 
 publication of the First Edition, of this work, I was 
 kindly presented by a gentleman, personally unknown 
 to me, with a French work, containing other interest- 
 ing particulars respecting this case, especially the 
 clairvoyance of a married daughter of the lady. It 
 appears that Madame Plantin died fourteen days after- 
 wards, from bodily disease, and it is a question, how 
 far it was worth trying the experiment of removing 
 the breast. But it certainly got rid of one source of 
 irritation, and after death, the wound was found three 
 parts healed over. This case is referred to again, 
 further on, under the head of clairvoyance. 
 
 A few cautionary remarks may not be misplaced here. 
 It must not be supposed, because persons in a state of 
 somnolency feel no pain, that therefore, they will be un- 
 conscious of any injury inflicted on them, when they 
 return to the normal state : on the contrary, when 
 they are aroused, they will feel the eff^ect of any injury, 
 just in proportion to its severity. Common humanity, 
 therefore, requires, that experiments made to ascertain 
 the state of the sensibility, should be such as only to 
 occasion transient pain. But I have heard of the 
 most unwarrantable proceedings on the part of some 
 medical gentlemen, and I have seen the arms of my 
 patient discoloured over no small extent from the 
 pinches of a sceptical party. Of course, I took care to 
 prevent such occurrences for the future. It is to be 
 regretted that the endeavour is not more generally 
 made, to ascertain, whether parties on whom an ope- 
 ration is likely to be performed, could be brought into 
 a state of coma. As I have said, it seems a rare state, 
 and that comparatively few English people become 
 the subject of it. But if real, and ever so slight, it 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 47 
 
 would blunt the shock of an operation^ and in its 
 deepest state is free from danger^, whicli cannot be 
 said of ether or chloroform. But the latter is never- 
 theless a valuable agent^ and the more so, because 
 more generally applicable. 
 
 The states already described, result from the more 
 or less perfect closure of the external perceptions, and 
 the physiological conditions necessary to such closure. 
 But it is found, that, in most subjects, after sufficient 
 practice, a nev^^ or abnormal consciousness is awaken- 
 ed ; first of all, of a mere imaginative character, and 
 by degrees of a more rational description. The most 
 common, and generally the earliest manifestation of 
 an abnormal consciousness, is seen in what is called 
 Phreno-Mesmerism. This is the name usually ap- 
 plied to the manifestation of the phrenological senti- 
 ments and feelings, in a mesmeric subject. Some of 
 these are very striking ; by pressing with the finger 
 on the portion of the skull, marked on phrenological 
 busts as the organ of veneration, the subject will 
 manifest religious feelings, sometimes of the pro- 
 foundest kind, especially if the sentiment is called 
 more strongly forth, by the sounds of appropriate 
 music. Even the naturally irreligious will now dis- 
 play high religious feeling, and sometimes the pro- 
 foundest veneration. I have seen the whole counte- 
 nance lighted up as with a seraphic glow, while under 
 the combined influence of sacred music and pressure 
 on the organ : in general, the result will correspond 
 with the development of the organ. By pressure on 
 Firmness, especially if accompanied by martial or in- 
 spiring music, the highest degree of courage and de- 
 termination may be called forth ; and, by proper ma- 
 nipulation, the other sentiments and feelings, such as 
 Benevolence, Sympathy, Acquisitiveness, Philo-pro- 
 genitiveness, Destructiveness, and so forth. 
 
 Phreno-mesmerism has been considered as afibrd- 
 ing a triumph to the materializing class of phreno- 
 logists, and hence it has been decried, and attempted 
 to be set aside, by the metaphysical spiritualists ; and 
 
48 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 it has also been objected to by those who would set 
 forth mesmeric phenomena under a disguised name, 
 because, in some instances, the state may be induced 
 without contact with the cranium. Possibly each of 
 these classes of reasoners has been wrong, and their 
 error has arisen from narrowing the premises. Cer- 
 tainly, the mere placing of the finger of the operator 
 on any part of the head, and its being followed by the 
 manifestation of the sentiment, or feeling, proper to 
 the organ said to be situated in the part touched, is 
 no positive proof that such organ is really there ; l3e- 
 cause the idea of the sentiment is in the operator's 
 mind, and the fact may be accounted for, by mesmeric 
 imaginative action, and the transfer of feeling. Again, 
 anatomy reveals nothing within the cranium, analo- 
 gous to the arbitrary division marked on phrenological 
 busts. Besides, when we ' touch the head, the skull 
 prevents us acting directly on the brain; we only 
 excite the extremities of those cranial nerves that 
 ramify in the scalp. I understand. Dr. Braid has ex- 
 cited Veneration by touching the subject's knee, and 
 by this means induced him to kneel down, as if in 
 prayer. 
 
 The opportunities I have had for acquiring experi- 
 ence, enables me positively to assert, that contact with 
 at least certain parts of the head of a sufficiently sus- 
 ceptible mesmeric subject, will excite those feelings 
 phrenologically ascribed to those particular portions. 
 Thus I have seen alimentiveness most powerfully ex- 
 cited, in such a subject, who, when left alone a little 
 while, and reclining with the head on the table, acci- 
 dentally rubbed that part of the head where alimentive- 
 ness is said to be situated, against the edge of the 
 table. Fortunately it was discovered before any seri- 
 ous mischief occurred ; but under the excitement of 
 the organ, the subject had gnawed the sleeve of her 
 dress, so as to destroy the end of it, and had imprinted 
 her tooth marks deep in her own arm ! Had the ex- 
 citement been continued, I have no doubt, but that, 
 from the abeyance of external feeling, she would have 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 49 
 
 luflicted a serious injury on herself. Again^ I have 
 seen philo-progenitiveness excited^ by accidentally rub- 
 bing the occipital portion of the head against a high- 
 backed chair^ in which the subject was sitting; besides 
 other instances^ some of which were of the highest in- 
 terest in ^ physiological ^oint of view, but not suitable 
 for narration in the pages of this work. But this ap- 
 parent proof of the materialist view of the question, is 
 merely one side of the subject. For I have seen some 
 of the phrenological sentiments excited ivithout touch- 
 ing the head. Thus, upon simply taking my subject 
 by the hand, and silently thinking reverently of the 
 Deity, she has fallen down on her knees^ and mani- 
 fested the most profound veneration ! On other occa- 
 sions^ when I have had several subjects mesmerised at 
 the same time^ on touching and exciting the ^^ organs'^ 
 in the head of one, the others, without any touch, or 
 connection, or any knowledge of my action, have 
 manifested the same sentiment, and each^ according 
 to their peculiar genius and temperament. This does 
 not prove the fallacy of phreno-mesmerism, or that the 
 brain is not organized in harmony with distinct senti- 
 ments and feelings. It only shews that the primary 
 impulse, in such experiments, is of a psychological 
 character, and that the action of the mind induces 
 the physiological condition. The accidental circum- 
 stances above stated, prove that mind has a material 
 basis while connected with the bodily organism, and 
 that from their intimate connection_, and the peculiar 
 condition in which the mesmerised subject is placed, 
 an excitement of the basis, produces a corresponding 
 excitement in the animating principle. Upon the 
 whole, I think the real evidence afforded by vital mag- 
 netism, or mesmerism, is favourable to phrenology; 
 but I am far from thinking, that the evidence, pro- 
 perly interpreted, necessarily leads to that sort of ma- 
 terialism which is by many persons associated with 
 phrenological doctrines. The brain is undoubtedly 
 the mind^s organ : this position remains, whether we 
 
 3 
 
50 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 suppose tlie mind uses the whole brain in every 
 mental action^ or only an appropriate part. 
 
 It has been said^ that phreno-mesmerism is the re- 
 sult of electrical action ; and that^ in fact, all mes- 
 meric action is but an electrical phenomenon : the 
 operator being positively electrified, — the patient nega- 
 tively so. For this, I beheve, there is no evidence 
 whatever. The facts of magnetism and electricity 
 may very well serve to illustrate mesmeric phenomena 
 before a popular audience, and electricity may be made 
 to simulate certain vital actions ; but it is admitted by 
 the best physiologists, that there is no identity be- 
 tween electricity or magnetism, and the nervous influ- 
 ence. I have not perceived any difference in the 
 electrical state of the mesmerised subject and the 
 operator ; whereas, according to the theory, electrical 
 attraction and repulsion ought to be manifested. 
 Whatever name or cause, may be assigned to mes- 
 meric agency, it is undoubtedly a vital one. It is 
 true, as observed in the outset, that within the living 
 organism are collected all the powers of the universe ; 
 but they are in the organism, in its own peculiar 
 manner. It has a magnetism and a chemistry of its 
 own; which are living actions, analogous to ou.tward 
 cosmical and terrestrial activities, but perfectly dis- 
 tinct from them ; and, it is presumed, existing in a 
 degree above them. They may be considered as the 
 antetypes of the types found in outward nature. 
 
 Phantasy and transfer of state and feeling, 
 which I have classified after phreno-mesmerism, may, 
 I think, be considered, but as more advanced stages 
 of the same imaginative action. By phantasy, is 
 meant such an action on the mind of the mesmerised 
 party, that the mere suggestions of the mesmeriser, or, 
 it may be, of some other person, sometimes even, not 
 audibly expressed, but merely silently willed, are taken 
 for realities. Thus, a handkerchief being thrown into 
 the lap of a susceptible subject, and at the same time the 
 operator thinking of any harmless or pleasing living ob- 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 51 
 
 ject^ such as a rabbity a guinea-pig^ or a child^ or even of 
 disagreeable objects^ as a snake^ or other reptile^ and 
 at the same time willing that the mesmerised party 
 shall fancy the handkerchief to be the animal which 
 is the subject of the operator's thoughts^ and directing 
 the patient^s attention to it^ it will be taken for the 
 animal or reptile, and the language and action will 
 soon evince that it is really considered to be such; 
 and; in some cases, the subjects of such experiments, 
 cannot, by any means in their own power, divest 
 themselves of the phantasy. These are surprising in- 
 stances of the effect of merely excited imagination^ 
 scarcely conceivable, and yet not uncommon ; and 
 they are interesting, as plainly indicating the great 
 difference between imagination and judgment, or true 
 reason ; they also throw light on the state of the 
 mind in certain forms of insanity. I have repeatedly 
 witnessed such experiments as the following : An 
 empty glass has been offered to the subject, and it 
 has been stated to contain hot brandy and water, 
 with a caution not to burn the mouth. The endea- 
 vour to swallow the imaginary liquor, has been followed 
 by the same catching of the breath, violent coughing, 
 and difficulty, as would ensue, on a child, or person 
 unaccustomed to such a drink, hastily trying to swal- 
 low it. Then, by taking the glass away and immedi- 
 ately presenting it, as if containing cold loater, at the 
 same time cautioning the subject in drinking it, lest 
 it produce toothache, or saying something else that 
 will call up a vivid idea of the contrast between the 
 two liquids, — immediately upon endeavouring to diink 
 it, all the effects of intense cold have been manifested! 
 Once, before a large auditory, upon being asked for a 
 particular drink, I presented an empty glass, and 
 silently willed it to be considered as castor oil. No 
 sooner had the subject placed the glass to the lips, 
 than it was dashed away and broken to atoms, to the 
 no small danger of the parties around; at the same 
 time, the exclamation Avas made, ^^Ah! it's so nasty !^' 
 In these cases the physiological action on the nervous 
 
 3* 
 
52 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 system was real, although, the cause was merely ima^ 
 ginary. Sometimes these phantastic states are ex- 
 hibited under other names^ and as the result of cer- 
 tain manipulations with metals; but^ however pro- 
 duced^ they all belong to the same class,, and depend 
 upon the same principle. 
 
 By TRANSFER of STATE or FEELING^ is meant, that 
 curious effect of reflected action, which is exhibited by 
 good mesmeric subjects, in feeling whatever is done to 
 the mesmeriser as done to themselves. This I have 
 witnessed so often, and under such a variety of cir- 
 cumstances, as to admit of no doubt of its correctness. 
 Thus, on one occasion, while lecturing, one of the 
 audience, to test my assertions, came unawares and 
 pricked my leg. I looked round for a moment with 
 surprise, and some little indignation ; but by the time 
 I comprehended the motive of the seeming offender^ 
 the mesmerised subject felt it, and screamed out 
 loudly, saying, ^^ that some one had pricked her leg,^^ 
 and pointing at the same time to the part of her own 
 leg, corresponding to that which had been pricked in 
 mine. I have got individuals to tread on my toes, 
 pull my hair, or pinch different parts of the body ; 
 and I invariably found that, with this subject, not 
 many seconds w^ould elapse before she would com- 
 plain of exactly similar treatment, and refer the pain 
 to the exact corresponding part ; and sometimes I 
 have experienced considerable difficulty in dispelling 
 the illusion. While she was thus loudly complaining 
 of ideal pain, she was insensible to the reality. She 
 has frequently complained of the pain inflicted, when 
 it has been pretended to her that her finger was 
 pricked, greatly exaggerating the amount of pain 
 which such a trifling wound could inflict ; and, at the 
 same time, she has evinced a perfect unconsciousness 
 to the real pricking of a finger on the other hand, 
 to which her attention was not directed ! 
 
 Cerebral lucidity and clairvoyance complete 
 our classification. These states are so purely psycho- 
 logical, that they belong rather to the subject of the 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 53 
 
 next chapter; but as they also have a physiological 
 character^ I will briefly notice them here. By cere- 
 bral LUCIDITY^ I mean^ that peculiar condition of the 
 mind and brain, by which the lucid subjects see ob- 
 jects that are around or near them, by light, or an 
 element analogous to light, which they perceive as is- 
 suing from the brain, and quite independent of the 
 usual visual organ — the eye. In my own case, I have 
 seen objects correctly pointed out when the eyes have 
 been blindfolded, and also when placed behind the 
 head, and out of the ordinary range of vision. I have 
 seen others, who appeared to possess the faculty, place 
 objects in the direct line of vision, when they wished 
 to examine them ; and thence I have been led to 
 doubt, in such cases, the reality, or, at all events, the 
 completeness of the faculty. This is by far the most 
 generally useful faculty, as it may be turned to such 
 good account in investigating the seat and causes of 
 disease. The human body seems as if transparent to 
 the truly lucid subject ; and I have frequently availed 
 myself of this faculty of lucidity, to discover the nature 
 of obscure disease, using my subject as a living stethe- 
 scope, to assist my own judgment, just as the astro- 
 nomer uses his telescope. Clairvoyance I would re- 
 strict to the perception of distant objects or to spiritual 
 matters. Some subjects possess one of these faculties, 
 and not another, or one in greater perfection than the 
 other ; while others appear to possess both equally. 
 But I should always be more inclined to believe in the 
 faculty of clairvoyance, where I could ^ee the faculty of 
 lucidity in operation. 
 
 Many most interesting facts, in relation to clair- 
 voyance, have been published : of some, there can be 
 no doubt ; others appear only to have been imagina- 
 tive action, like phreno-mesmerism, or the result of 
 mental sympathy. By no means would I have the 
 public believe, that all which has been published as 
 clairvoyance is really so : or that dependence should 
 always be placed on the statements of persons really 
 mesmerised^ or their advice followed. Previous cduca- 
 
54 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 tion and association have considerable influence on the 
 mesmerised subjects ; and if all their vagaries were 
 implicity followed^ great mischief would often ensue. 
 In Paris^ the most absurd and disgusting quackeries 
 have been recommended^ by real or pretended clair- 
 voyants. Besides^ there is reason to fear, that credu- 
 lous persons, are often made the dupes of artful and 
 designing pretenders. 
 
 As a specimen of true clairvoyance, and also of the 
 uses to which it may be applied, I extract the following 
 case from the French work before alluded to.* Madame 
 Lagandre, a married daughter of Madame Plantin, 
 possessed the faculty of clairvoyance, or, as styled by 
 M. Chardel, somnambulism. She resided in the 
 country, and was not in Paris when the operation was 
 performed. She afterwards arrived in that city, and 
 was mesmerised by Dr. Chapelain, on Sunday, the 26th 
 of April, and consulted as to the state of her mother. 
 She said that her mother was verv ill, — ^^ that all the 
 humours were vitiated; that there was an effusion in 
 the right side of the chest ; a little water in the enve- 
 lope of the heart (the pericardium) ; that the liver 
 was discoloured on its surface. In two days,^^ she 
 added, ^^ my mother will be dead, in spite of all that 
 can be done for her. You will have scarcely any 
 power over her to-morrow : she will not have life 
 enough to feel you.^^ On the Monday, the physician 
 visited his patient and found her worse ; and the sur- 
 geon, M. Cloquet, was desirous that Madame Lagan- 
 dre should be mesmerised in his presence, that he 
 might hear her statement of her mother's case. This 
 is remarkable, especially as shewing the power of vital 
 magnetism. ^^ My mother has been very weak for 
 some days ; she has only lived by the magnetism, which 
 has artificially sustained her ; life is failing.'^ Do you 
 think that we can sustain the life of your mother ? 
 ^^ No : she will sink early to-morrow morning, without 
 
 * Essai de Psychologie Physiolog-ique, par C. Chardel, Conseiller d la 
 cour de Cassation, Ancien Depute de la Seine, &c. Trosieme Edition. 
 Paris, 1844. 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 55 
 
 agony, without suffering^' What are the diseased 
 parts ? ^^ The right lung is shrunken and compressed; 
 it is surrounded by a pasty or gluey membrane j it 
 floats in the midst of much water. But it is chiefly 
 here,^^ said the somnambule, pointing to the inferior 
 angle of the shoulder-blade^ " that my mother sufi*ers. 
 The right lung respires no longer^ it is dead. The left 
 lung is sound ; it is by that my mother lives. There 
 is a little water in the envelope of the heart.^^ How 
 are the abdominal organs ? ^^ The stomach and the 
 intestines are sound, the liver is white and discoloured 
 at the surface.^^ The physician tried all his powers 
 to magnetise his patient on the Monday, but could 
 hardly induce sleep. When he again called about seven 
 o^clock on Tuesday morning, she had just expired. 
 
 The two doctors were desirous of verifying or dis- 
 proving the statements of the somnambule^ by a post- 
 mortem examination^ and obtained the family^s con- 
 sent for that purpose. They took for witnesses^ M. 
 Moreau, secretary to thesui^gical section of the French 
 Royal Academy of Medicine^ and Dr. Dronsart. The 
 following is abridged from the ofl&cial report of the 
 autopsy. ^^ Exterior — a yellowish paleness of all the 
 body. The wound is three-quarters cicatrized ; its sur- 
 face presents healthy fleshy granulations. Interior — on 
 opening the chest, we found the cavity of the right 
 pleura filled Avith a thick serosity, about two pints in 
 quantity. The pulmonary and costal portions of this 
 membrane were covered with exudations of a fibrous 
 nature, most abundant at the posterior part. The lung 
 is greatly pressed inwards, &c. The pericardium con- 
 tains about three or four ounces of limpid serosity. 
 The posterior face of the heart is lightly reddened, 
 and presents many shreds of fibrous exudation, &:c. 
 The liver is of ordinary volume. The upper face is 
 covered with whitish specks, which do not extend be- 
 yond the surface of the organ. The gall bladder is 
 atrophied, of a whitish colour, filled with biliary cal- 
 culi, and contains no bile. The other organs not 
 examined.^^ 
 
56 SOMNOLISM AOE PSYCHEISM, 
 
 From this report^ it is seen, that Madame Lagandre 
 was quite correct in her diagnosis of her mother^s case, 
 and could even foresee the time of death. The medical 
 witnesses desired also to hear her statements, and, by 
 previous arrangement, she was mesmerised a little 
 while before the time fixed for the examination, and 
 repeated her statements clearly over again : she was 
 then led into an apartment adjoining that where the 
 corpse lay, and the door perfectly closed. Here she 
 followed, with her mental sight, the bistoury in the 
 hands of the operator, and said to those in the room 
 with her, ^^ Why do they make the incision down the 
 middle of the chest, when the eflPusion is on the 
 right ?^^ 
 
 Application of the anatomy and physiology of 
 the BRAIN. Having briefly described the most striking 
 features in each class of mesmeric or magnetic pheno- 
 mena, we now proceed to seek the solution of the 
 physiology of these states, or, in other words, to seek 
 the natural cause of these apparently preternatural 
 states. We have seen, that within the skull, there 
 are, in reality, two distinct brains, although popularly 
 called the brain ; that by the larger brain, or cerebrum, 
 we think, feel, and act, and that it is thus the souFs 
 medium of conscious intercourse with the external 
 world. That by the cerebellum, or little brain, with 
 its appendages and nerves, are directed and controlled 
 all the involuntary and vegetative functions of our 
 bodies. That the brain has an automatic, or inde- 
 pendent action of its own, by which it has the control 
 of the blood circulating within it, and that in the state 
 of sleep, the cortical spherules of the cerebrum collapse, 
 or fall together, and the fibres become proportionally 
 compressed; by which means the blood is prevented 
 entering the finer channels, and thus stimulating the 
 brain to activity ; and that from this state of collapse, 
 and altered circulation of the blood, arises the uncon- 
 sciousness and insensibility of profound sleep. 
 
 The direct eff'ect of the passes, or whatever means 
 are employed to induce the mesmeric state, produces 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 57 
 
 a state of somnolency^ in some respects very similar to 
 common sleep, especially to sleep in which dreaminy 
 prevails ; and the higher stages of mesmeric activity^ 
 which are sometimes called sleep -waking, are akin to 
 natural somnambulism. One of the first visible effects, 
 is an inability to open the eyelids, attended by a feeling 
 of drow^siness. This is entirely owing to the partial 
 cessation of the activity of the cerebrum^ and the in- 
 cipient state of collapse. It is contended, that mind 
 is the primary agent in real mesmeric action ; but mind 
 and matter are intimately connected by the medium of 
 subtle elementary influences, and the modes used in 
 mesmerising, act upon these subtle fluids, and thence 
 upon the condition of the brain; and by this means 
 the brain assumes the somnolent condition. As the 
 brain collapses, there is a gradual indrawing of the 
 external senses ; an apparent weight presses down the 
 eyelids ; the optic nerves are gradually contracted and 
 drawn up, so that the retina becomes insensible to 
 light, and ceases to present an image of outward ob- 
 jects to the sensorium. The other nerves of the eye 
 act in unison with the nerves of sight, and the general 
 indrawdng causes the eyeball to roll upwards and in- 
 wards, and when this is effected, all power to perceive 
 external things is withdrawn. By referring to the 
 engravings and explanations, it w^ill be seen, that all the 
 nerves concerned in these changes belong to the cere- 
 brum ; consequently, their state Avill change, just as 
 the state of the cerebrum is changed. The first efl'ect 
 of the change of the state of the cerebrum, is to pro- 
 duce torpor, and that just in proportion to the col- 
 lapse. The first observed general eftect in mesmerism, 
 is a degree of torpidity, which increases with the col- 
 lapse, until the sensorium is no longer susceptible of 
 impressions from without. Hence arises amestJiesla, 
 insensibility to pain, or absence of feeling; which, in- 
 stead of being that unlikely, impossible thing, which 
 even some medical men have supposed, is really the 
 result of ^physical necessity, and cannot be otherwise, 
 without altering the conditions that the Creator has 
 
 3** 
 
58 SOMNOLISM ANa PSYCHEISM. 
 
 impressed upon the brain. When chloroform is ad- 
 ministered the result is similar; the vapour of the 
 liquid^ acting in union with the subtle elementary- 
 fluids connected with the nervous system of the brain_, 
 produces collapse^ and thence insensibility. But this 
 vapour may permeate the delicate spherules^ and it is 
 not confined in its action to any part of the encepha- 
 lon ; for^ although it usually first afi'ects the cerebrum^ 
 it may^ and does sometimes^ aifect the cerebellum and 
 its appendages^ and hence sudden death has ensued. 
 Deaths in these cases^ has been referred to spasm : the 
 spasm^ as it has been called, was the necessary and un- 
 avoidable result of collapse in the cerebellum and its 
 appendages. But the mesmeric influence extends to 
 the cerebral system only, as far as regards collapse, 
 and hence its freedom from danger. 
 
 The mesmeric sleep, torpor, or coma, with its accom- 
 panying insensibility, is therefore the natural physical 
 eflect of the changes induced on the state of the cen- 
 tres of motion and sensation. The physiological cause 
 of the state of rigidity, or catalepsy, as it is called, has 
 been shewn to depend on the change in the direction 
 and attraction of the vital aura, or vital electric cur- 
 rent, and thence in the arrangement of the corpuscles 
 of the circulating blood. It is highly probable that, 
 in addition to that general change in the state of the 
 cortical substance of the brain, which has been de- 
 scribed, that there are many other minute changes, 
 depending on the currents and attractions of the vital 
 electric aura, by which a species of inverted action, or 
 confused condition of the cerebrum, is produced, that 
 admits of an inner and imaginative action of the sen- 
 sorium, and a sort of intuitive activity of the motor 
 nerves, and thence of the muscles. It has been stated, 
 that in sleep the cerebrum is collapsed ; or, in other 
 words, that the cerebrum sleeps, but not the cerebellum. 
 In certain mesmeric states, and in natural somnam- 
 bulism, the cerebellum seems more than usually wake- 
 ful. Modern physiology attributes to the cerebellum, 
 the balancing and control of the locomotive systein of 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 59 
 
 muscles ; this^ undoubtedly, is one of its functions ; 
 and hence, in artificial and natural somnambulism, we 
 find these subjects fearlessly, and, as it were, instinc- 
 tively, balancing their bodies in conditions that a per- 
 son in the normal state could hardly imitate. It has 
 been very truly said, that nearly, if not quite all the 
 phenomena of vital magnetism, or mesmerism, have 
 been observed as the effect of disease. In natural 
 somnambulism, we see a picture of the inner conscious- 
 ness, and imaginative action, which characterises the 
 mesmeric states in the second series of our classifica- 
 tion ; and many of the undoubted results of somnam- 
 bulism, are as extraordinary as anything recorded of 
 mesmerism. 
 
 That natural somnambulism essentially depends on 
 the condition of the nervous system, every physiologist 
 will allow. The great question is, — How is the con- 
 dition of the nervous system changed, and ivhat is 
 the physiological effect produced on the brain ? That 
 by mesmeric and natural somnambulic action, an effect 
 is produced on the brain, something analogous to what 
 produces rigidity on the muscles, appears highly pro- 
 bable. Whether the action is mental or mesmeric, a 
 new directive force is first given to the subtle impon- 
 derable fluids, by which mind and matter are brought 
 into relation with each other, and thence a change is 
 produced in the condition and fluxion of the blood, in 
 the minute divisions of the sensorium. This may 
 cause a comparative rigidity in these delicate sub- 
 stances ; which, while it admits of a kind of external 
 general action, prevents the proper internal activity of 
 the sensorial glands. Hence, although in the second 
 stages of mesmerism, and in somnambulism, an inner, 
 or dreaming wakefulness is produced, still it is only 
 such as to admit of an imaginative, and often incon- 
 gruous action ; for true reason or judgment can only 
 manifest themselves when the cortical substances of 
 the sensorium are free to move individually, and ])oth 
 internally and externally, and the fluxion of the blood 
 can adopt itself to all theu' varying states. Seldom, if 
 
60 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM* 
 
 ever^ can true reason be predicated of the sayings and 
 doings of a mesmeric subject ; even in the higher 
 stages of clairvoyance^ judgment is partially in abey- 
 ance : but this belongs rather to psychology than phy- 
 siology. 
 
 The physiology of those mesmeric states which dis- 
 play the effects of sympathy, are clearly referrible to 
 the directive force of the vital electric currents ; the 
 psychology will be considered in the next chapter. 
 Here there is a striking analogy to the instruments at 
 the opposite ends of the telegraphic wires. But there 
 is this difference^ that reason or judgment is only at 
 one end of the communication. The active wakeful 
 cerebrum of the operator^ dominates^ or rules, the cere- 
 brum of the subject^ and this because they form part^ 
 as it were^ of the same electric circle ; and thus^ al- 
 though two persons^ in feeling and sympathy, yet, as 
 to the action of the cerebrum, they are one. Hence^ 
 however many may be the subjects^ if they have all 
 been mesmerised by the same operator, and are all 
 fully susceptible of the somnolent influence, they are 
 all so intimately blended with him, that the absence 
 of their own proper cerebral consciousness^ causes them 
 to feel his cerebral consciousness as their own. If pain 
 is inflicted on the operator, they feel it ; if he intently 
 thinks on a subject, they reflect the idea, which is real 
 to them, and hence we behold all the curious and 
 amusing effects of phantasy. The manifestation of 
 phreno-mesmerism may also be traced to the same 
 influence. When there is no touching of the head, 
 the psychological action in the operator causes the 
 physiological result, and the connecting sympathetic 
 medium accounts for all the rest. All that is required 
 is, sufficient susceptibility in the subject. By this mode 
 vremay also account for the attraction often displayed. 
 When the operator, either by the silent operation of 
 his will, or by drawing passes, gives a directive force 
 to the current, the impression on the cerebrum of the 
 subject is such, that he is irresistibly compelled to 
 follow. All these states, therefore, however varied, 
 
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY. 61 
 
 depend solely on the differing condition of the cere- 
 brum in the operator and his subjects^ and the directive 
 force of the connecting imponderable medium. That 
 there is no real attraction is evident ; for although the 
 subject cannot remove his open palm from a wall 
 against which the operator has fixed it ; stilly by no 
 means can a substance^ not adhesive^ be made to ad- 
 here to the hand, when it is extended, and the sub- 
 stance placed underneath: to make the hand retain it, 
 the fingers must be bent. It is a mere trick to ex- 
 hibit such things as a real attraction ; they are the 
 result of phantasy and directive force combined. 
 
 We shall generally find, that although sight and 
 feeling are withdrawn, the subject retains a perfect 
 capability of hearing. He may be so indrawn, as to 
 evince no perception of sound, — similar, in this re- 
 spect, to a person engaged in deep thought. But by 
 patiently persevering until the attention is excited, 
 or the desire of the operator is felt, we shall rarely 
 fail in demonstrating that the sense of hearing re- 
 mains. I have heard of subjects that could only hear 
 their magnetizer; but I have not seen any such. By 
 a second inversion of the directive current, which I 
 have observed when a clairvoyant has been sent away 
 to seek a distant object, the power of hearing bij the 
 ear is for the time absent ; but even then, sounds may 
 be conveyed by speaking, to the hand, in the direction 
 of the current. These facts may be thought to mili- 
 tate against the theory of cerebral action I have en- 
 deavoured to demonstrate, but in reality, they tend to 
 confirm it. For the nerve of hearing, which is a branch 
 of the seventh pair of cranial nerves, has its roots in 
 the corpora restiformia, which is directly connected 
 with the cerebellum ; and hence it is, that affections of 
 the cerebellum so frequently affect the organ of hear- 
 ing. Sight is solely under the direction of the cere- 
 brum, and we can exert that faculty, or not, at our 
 pleasure : but we cannot help hearing, if we are within 
 the influence of sound : that is, by no organism con- 
 nected with our ears can we shut out sound. The 
 
62 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 ears of a person in deep sleep, are still open to the 
 modulations of the air, on which sound depends ; but 
 the dormant state of the cerebrum prevents the con- 
 scious perception of sound, unless it is so loud as to 
 rouse the entire system, or produce that state of par- 
 tial wakefulness on which dreaming depends.^ And 
 we have already shewn that the inner consciousness 
 and wakefulness of a mesmerised subject, is analogous 
 to the state of dreaming. But hearing is not so en- 
 tirely dependent on the cerebellar system as the inter- 
 nal involuntary functions ; but is of a mixed nature, 
 like the function of respiration, and is so far connected 
 with the cerebrum. 
 
 We have thus glanced at the whole physiology of 
 the mesmeric or somnolent state, and given a reason 
 for the seeming mystery, and contrariety to our usual 
 feelings and common experience. In proportion as 
 the physiology of the brain is better known, and the 
 laws and conditions of the various imponderable ele- 
 ments are understood, will these phenomena become 
 more explicable, and the theory here propounded, be 
 either disproved, or received as an exposition of esta- 
 blished truth. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 PHILOSOPHY AXD PSYCHOLOGY OF VITAL MAGNETISM, OR MESMERISM 
 CLAIRVOYANCE, OR INNER VISION AND TRANCE. 
 
 None of the extraordinary effects of vital magnetism, 
 or mesmerism, appear to stagger the general belief so 
 much as the different manifestations of clairvoyance 
 or magnetic vision, or, to speak more truly, the in- 
 ternal sight, or sight of the soul. To say that a per- 
 son can see without the aid of the eye, or by any other 
 means than the rays of light reflected from visual ob- 
 jects, entering into the pupil of the eye in the usual 
 manner, seems like uttering an absurdity, or declar- 
 ing the possibility of an impossibility. Yet, strange 
 as it may sound to those who have had no experience 
 in this matter, there is no one mesmeric phenomenon 
 more capable of positive proof, provided the subject 
 be really clairvoyant, and the necessary care is taken 
 in making the experiment. Of this I have had re- 
 peated ocular proof, and have almost daily for some 
 months, exhibited proofs of lucidity and sometimes of 
 clairvoyance, to patients and others who have profes- 
 sionally applied to me. If the term seeing is objected 
 to, in a case where the eye is not used, perhaps per- 
 ception will be admitted as a more suitable word. 
 Yet, as far as can be judged, the same, or similar 
 sensations, as to form, colour, magnitude, hardness, or 
 softness, which we commonly perceive by the eye, are, 
 by the clairvoyante with whose powers I am best 
 acquainted, perceived directly within the sensorium, 
 without any discoverable use of the eye. 
 
 But, before proceeding further, let us carefully ex- 
 amine the eye and its functions, and when we have 
 done so, we shall feel constrained to acknowledge, 
 that an internal function of sight, although remark- 
 able and unexpected, and generally unknown, is not 
 
64 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 more difficult to explain,, than ordinary vision when 
 thoroughly examined. On referring to the human 
 eye^ or any correct representation of it^ we shall find 
 that it is a hollow ball, filled with three diff*erent 
 kinds of fluids^ arranged in a determinate order. 
 This arrangement is shewn in the engraving No. 8. 
 In front is a horny transparent lens, the cornea, 
 something like a small watch-glass^ to admit the 
 rays of light ; behind the cornea is the small cham- 
 ber containing the aqueous humour; then a hole 
 through the iris, called the pupil, to allow the rays of 
 light from diffferent objects to pass into the interior 
 parts of the eye, which they do, after passing through 
 the small crystalline lens, and the vitreous, or glassy- 
 looking humour, which occupies the greater part of 
 the interior of the globe, and then form an image of 
 the objects on the delicate membrane called the re- 
 tina, which is spread out on the back of the eye. 
 Now up to this point, ordinary vision may be ex- 
 plained on optical principles, and the eye shewn to 
 be the most perfect optical instrument. But the 
 moment we attempt to pass beyond the retina, science 
 is at fault. No natural philosopher has been able to 
 explain, how the optic nerve conveys the image to the 
 brain. VV^e know that the mind is conscious of the 
 images formed on the retina, — or, in more familiar 
 language, of the things seen by the eyes; — but in 
 what manner an opaque nervous cord, difl'ering ap- 
 parently in no essential particulars from other nerv- 
 ous cords, conveys that impression to the mind, — how 
 the sensations of the eye, become transformed into the 
 perceptions of the sensorium, — we are entirely igno- 
 rant. One thing, however, is sufficiently evident, and 
 is admitted by the best physiologists, namely, that or- 
 dinary sight has a psychological basis. 
 
 In speaking, therefore, of clairvoyance, or internal 
 sight, we assume no other basis than is necessary for 
 perfect ordinary vision. The diff'erence is not in the 
 inward sensorium, but simply in the means or instru- 
 ment by which the same sensorium acquires its per- 
 
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 65 
 
 ceptions. It is the difference of instrument that en- 
 ables the sensorium to rise superior to the common 
 laws of space. The eye^ is^ as we have already stated^ 
 an optical instrument, adapted^ like other optical in- 
 struments^ to the natural laws of Hght^ and chiefly dif- 
 fering from them^ in possessing a livings self-adapting 
 power. It^ therefore^ sees by light from without, — 
 emanating from some luminous body, revealing thus 
 its own form and appearance, and the forms and ap- 
 pearances of such other bodies as are sufficiently deuse 
 to reflect its rays. Our physical sight can thus see 
 the remote starry orbs, placed at the distance of per- 
 haps thousands of millions of miles^ because the un- 
 dulations of light proceeding from them in straight 
 lines, can impinge, or strike upon the retina of our 
 eyes. Yet, the intervention of any opaque body im- 
 mediately shuts out the vision of the object, even if 
 placed in close connection with us; so that if our 
 penetrating powers of sight were immensely increased, 
 whether naturally or artificially, still the rotundity 
 and opacity of the earth, would prevent us seeing be- 
 yond a certain distance. 
 
 But opacity is no barrier to the perceptions of the 
 internal sight ; — -that is, when this internal faculty is 
 fully developed^ and its subject in a proper state. 
 Objects to which the mind may bo directed, either 
 designedly or spontaneously, will be equally visible 
 through doors and walls, as if placed directly before 
 the face. Nay more^ speaking from experience, to 
 the higher stages of clairvoyance there seems, com- 
 paratively speaking, no bounds; for whether the ob- 
 ject sought be in the same house, or town, or countiy, 
 or across the broad atlantic or pacific oceans, it ap- 
 pears to be found and seen with equal facihty, and to 
 be equally near to the internal perception of the tru- 
 ly clairvoyant individual. The human body is seen 
 as clearly, and its living actions described as phiinly, 
 as if the external and internal parts w^re alike as 
 transparent as glass, and this at times, without any 
 bodily connection, such as by bringing the clairvoy- 
 
66 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 ant and the person to be examined together^ but when 
 many miles have intervened between them. 
 
 But here a marked difference between external and 
 internal sight may be pointed out : external sight is 
 essentially of a passive character ; internal sight as 
 essentially active. It is true^ a certain degree of aU 
 tention is necessary in order to our distinctly seeing 
 objects^ inasmuch as an object may be directly before 
 us^ and yet not observed. But the image of the ob- 
 ject is imprinted on the retina, although, from the 
 concentration of the mind on some other subject, the 
 sensation is not perceived. When, however, the mind 
 is unoccupied, we cannot help seeing such objects as 
 are within the range of vision, the impression is made, 
 and the sensation is experienced. Both the light and 
 the impression come from without, wholly independ- 
 ant of our volition, and the object may be said to 
 come to the eye. But in internal vision, the sight, as 
 it were, goes to the object. The light, or that which 
 to the clairvoyant is analogous to light, is projected 
 from within; an active exercise of volition takes place; 
 as the spark flies from the excited electric machine, 
 so the perception seems, as it were, to seek the cor- 
 responding sensation. This active character of in- 
 ternal vision I have repeatedly noticed, and the clair- 
 voyante in whom I perceived it, has also said, that to 
 her perception, light issued from the brain ; at other 
 times, that all things seemed light, but that the light 
 did not appear like either day light, or artificial light, 
 but something brighter and more intense. This, of 
 course, when the faculty was at its fullest state of de- 
 velopment. 
 
 But we have now arrived at a stage in our enquiry, 
 where physiology, as at present known, ceases to af- 
 ford us any information ; for physiology as such, that 
 is, as the science of our outward living organism, 
 knows nothing of an internal or supersensual light, 
 or of sight that can penetrate alike through opaque 
 and transparent substances. To psychology and phi- 
 losophy we must, therefore, look for aid, in our en- 
 
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 67 
 
 deavour to investigate the apparent mystery of this 
 interesting subject. 
 
 There is a sort of philosophy which rejects as fabul- 
 ous and conjectural^ all that cannot be demonstrated 
 to the senses of the observer -, that would reduce man 
 to an automatic chemical machine^ beginning and 
 ending in nature ; and would represent the doctrine 
 of a human soul or spirit^ as a mere relic of an igno- 
 rant and superstitious age^ and unworthy of scientific 
 enquiry. Reason and observation, especially of the 
 higher phenomena of mesmerism, have led the writer 
 to conclude, that the ancient doctrine, both of philo- 
 sophy and Scripture, which represents man as a com- 
 pound of soul and body, or mind and matter, is the 
 true one, and necessary to explain all the facts con- 
 nected with human existence. But the soul ought 
 not to be considered as a mere phantom, or indivisi- 
 ble point. Common observation, to say nothing of 
 anatomical research, has taught us that the body is 
 not a mere, simple, uncompounded substance, but a 
 collection of innumerable parts and organs ; reason, 
 founded on another kind of observation, may lead us 
 to conclude, that the mind, or spiritual body, as the 
 parent and director of the natural body, cannot be 
 that simple entity, that abstract nothingness so gener- 
 ally represented by metaphysical wa^iters ; but rather, 
 that the controller of the animal organism, must be 
 itself organized according to the laws of its own pe- 
 culiar nature, and capable of manifesting those law^s, 
 under certain circumstances, through those organs of 
 the natural body, that is, the brain and nervous sys- 
 tem, which are united with it by the law of corres- 
 pondent activity and connection. 
 
 The observation of Locke, that ^^ the Scriptures 
 were not given to teach men philosophy,^^ is con- 
 sidered by the writer, of great practical importance, 
 inasmuch as it is the converse of this proposition 
 which has often led to a conflict betw^een science and 
 revelation. But if on any subject revelation and phi- 
 losophy may be expected to harmonize, it is presumed 
 
68 SOMNOLTSM AND PSYCHEISM, 
 
 that it would be_, in the a priori declarations of the 
 former, relative to the constitution of man. It is, 
 therefore, reverently conceived, that St. Paul spoke 
 the language of the profoundest philosophy, when he 
 declared, that there were "spiritual bodies, and na- 
 tural bodies,^^ and that the natural body was the first 
 m its development, and afterwards, the spiritual body; 
 and when on another occasion, he defined the human 
 organism, as existing here, to be a compound of 
 " spirit, soul, and body,^^ in this respect giving his 
 apostolic sanction to the doctrine of the ancient sages 
 of Greece. The language of the apostle is peculiarly 
 applicable to our enquiry, because it proposes just 
 such a division of the human organism, as is displayed 
 to our physical senses, in the higher stages of mes- 
 merism. The two first terms used by the apostle to 
 describe the spiritual part of man, are, in the original 
 Greek, pneuma and psyche^ and the latter term, which, 
 in our version of the Scriptures, is, in the passage al- 
 luded to, translated soul, is, by the Latin writers, called 
 the " animus,^^ and this term is always used to signify 
 the animal soul, as distinguished from the pneuma, or 
 more interior human spirit. 
 
 This declaration of St. PauFs is also suggestive of a 
 fundamental principle, which by sound rational in- 
 quiry, may be found to pervade every department of 
 the Creator's " handy- work -/' namely, that from the 
 Creator, to the lowest mass of inert matter, there 
 exists a chain of degrees, — a distinct line of demarca- - 
 tion between one order of substances and another, 
 and one class of organisms and another, — although, at 
 the extreme boundaries of each order, it may be diffi- 
 cult to distinguish exactly where one series ends and 
 another begins ; and hence, any object of creation 
 can only be well and thoroughly studied, by viewing 
 it in its own degree, and comparing it with objects in 
 another degree. But if we confound this distinction of 
 degrees, our method of investigation will be faulty, 
 and we shall never arrive at a clear and satisfactory 
 solution of many important facts ; nor understand the 
 
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 69 
 
 nexus, or connection^ between different orders of sub- 
 stances. For each degree will be found to possess 
 laws or properties peculiar to itself : and if we tran- 
 scend the degree of the object of our inquiry^ by ap- 
 plying to it qualities, or properties, belonging to ano- 
 ther distinct degree, we may expect nothing but con- 
 fusion and mystery. The connection of the various 
 degrees of creation, by which they are formed into an 
 harmonious whole, is not by continuity, or fusion of 
 substance, but by distinct, yet correspondent adapta- 
 tion. This may be illustrated by the Ley den jar 
 charged with electricity, or the telegraphic wires 
 charged with the galvanic fluid. Here there is the 
 closest connection between a mineral and metallic 
 substance, and certain invisible and imponderable 
 elements; and yet there is no continuity or inter- 
 mingling of substance, but the line of demarcation is 
 everywhere most distinct, even while the union is 
 most perfect. The ponderable matters are suitable 
 and correspondent bases for the imponderable, but 
 their substances are wholly distinct. 
 
 If, in our investigations of material substances, it is 
 necessary not to overlook these distinctions, how much 
 more so, when investigating the psychical nature of 
 man ! By no process can matter be sublimed into 
 spirit ; between it and the more inert species of mat- 
 ter there may be, and it is highly probable there are, 
 several orders, or degrees, of imponderable elements, 
 which serve as the nexus, or medium of connection; but 
 each, while acting together, so as to form one harmo- 
 nious, living, rational, organism, still preserve their 
 individual character. The general law of analogy ob- 
 servable in all things, as well as apostolic authority, 
 leads also to the conclusion, that spiritual substance 
 may have its degrees as well as material substance ; 
 and that the laws and properties of a higher degree 
 may not be applicable to a lower one. But a true 
 philosophy also teaches us, that if spirit is in no degree 
 material, in the common acceptation of that term, it 
 is still no less on that account a trulv real and sub- 
 
70 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 stantial existence : — in fact^ more ttulj substantial 
 than tlie granite rock, because m(M:'e upclianging, more 
 enduring, and more like the primal^eternal, and infi- 
 nite substantiality of the Creator. 
 
 Now, viewing the spiritual organism of man as con- 
 sisting of two distinct degrees^ which, after the, Apostle 
 we call the pneuma and psyche ; or, as possessing both a 
 spiritual internal and a spiritual external, forming to- 
 gether, while in this mortal life, the common internal 
 of the natural organism; the psyche, or animus, will be 
 the connecting medium between the pure interior hu- 
 man spirit, and the nervous system of the natural body. 
 By its connection with the nervous system of the body, 
 it is placed in relation, and correspondent affinity with 
 the ethereal, magnetic, and other elements, and with 
 all the kingdoms of outward nature ; while, as a spiri- 
 tual entity, and by its indissoluble union with the 
 higher spiritual principle, it has, at the same time, 
 immediate connection with the spirit-world, and is 
 subject to the laws, and possesses the properties of that 
 world, which have nothing in common with time, 
 space, or fixed and inert matter. Hence it is, that we 
 can occasionally witness displays of power, which can 
 be explained by no merely natural or physiological 
 knowledge, but which receive an easy, rational, and 
 satisfactory solution, when man is really seen to be 
 that which revelation, philosophy, and the statements 
 of true clairvoyants declare that he is ; — namely, a 
 compound of spiritual and natural organisms, inti- 
 mately united by the exactest correspondence or ana- 
 logy. And that, although the lower, or natural or- 
 ganism, cannot act without the continued influence of 
 the higher, or spiritual organism, nor can the spiritual 
 organism be developed without the medium of the 
 natural one ; yet, when developed, the higher organism 
 can act, not only by and through the lower organism, 
 but even independently, and when disconnected from 
 it, as is the case in actual death. 
 
 It is this PSYCHE, or animus, — this external of the 
 spirit, — that, from all I have yet learned on the sub- 
 
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 71 
 
 ject^ I take to be the true seat of the higher mesmeric 
 influence : the psyche^ or animal soul of the operator^ 
 influences the same external spiritual organic principle 
 in the subject; and from the animus^ the influence 
 flows doivnwardSy to use analogous natural terms^ and 
 thence aff'ects the brain and nervous system. Hence, 
 it is proposed to call that part of mesmerism, which 
 evinces mental and supersensual phenomena, by the 
 name of psycheism, or the science of the soul as mani- 
 fested in nature; while to the lower and physical 
 stages, the name of somnolism may be applied, as 
 indicative of their sleep-like and dream-like character. 
 Now let us notice the psychological change, induced 
 in sensitive subjects by the operations of the mesmer- 
 izer, — or occurring, as it sometimes does, spontane- 
 ously. Here it will be well to have some clear and de- 
 finite idea, of what may be called, the laiv of idtimation ; 
 for it is a common law of our being, that conscious per- 
 ception should have its apparent seat in the idtimate or 
 extreme of every development. Thus, although it is a 
 well established physiological fact, that the true seat of 
 all sensation, or the common sensorium, is in the brain, 
 and that if a sensory nerve be di\ided, no sensation 
 will be experienced in the part in which that nerve 
 ramifies, yet it is well known that if we prick a finger, 
 the pain will be felt where the wound is inflicted. And 
 this is so, because the extremities of the nervous fibrils, 
 are the ultimates of that system of which the brain is 
 the centre ; and by means of these ramifications, the 
 influence of the brain, like life, is omnipresent in the 
 body. So, notwithstanding the body feels and acts by 
 and through the spirit, yet, our conscious perception, 
 in the usual normal condition, is confined to the bodily 
 organization ; because, while in the present state, the 
 body is the ultimate development of the spirit. When 
 death severs the connection between mind and body, 
 the ultimate of the immortal man is the psyche or ani- 
 mus, and to it are transferred the conscious percep- 
 tions and sensations ; and it is so, because, from the 
 removal or separation of the natural body, the psyche, 
 
72 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 or animus^ has become the ultimate^ or body of the 
 spirit. It is solely from this differing seat of the con- 
 scious perceptions, that in our ordinary state, we have 
 no sensational knowledge of the spirit-world, or of its 
 laws. The psychic, or higher mesmeric state, may 
 aptly be compared to partial death, or a partial sepa- 
 ration of soul and body. For it is produced by a 
 closing of the common external of our being ; a transfer 
 of the sensational perceptions from the ultimate of the 
 body to the ultimate of the spirit ; and thence, and 
 simply from this transfer of ultimates, arises an awa- 
 kening of the conscious sensational perception of the 
 inner man, or spirit. All those apparently miraculous 
 powers, which we sometimes see, or hear of being dis- 
 played by good mesmeric subjects, are, in fact, but the 
 result of the psyche, or animus, being so far set free 
 from the bodily ultimate, as to enable the spiritual body 
 to act nearly, if not quite, independently of the sensual 
 organs, and by perception, and in light from an inner 
 world ; but the connection of the mind and body is 
 yet sufficient, to enable the souFs sight and feeling to 
 be manifested to our physical senses, by and through 
 the natural organization of a clairvoyant subject. 
 
 From this transfer of consciousness and sensational 
 perception, we may also account for the anomalous, 
 and often incongruous, statements and descriptions of 
 clairvoyants. Judging from my own experience, it 
 would seem that they forget much of that mode of 
 speaking of things, which is common to our external 
 condition, but which, in itself, is often purely arbitrary 
 and conventional ; and they speak according to their 
 newly-awakened and uninformed consciousness. As 
 we have to learn to talk, and even to see, or rather, 
 rightly to interpret what the eye reveals, so, it would 
 appear, do clairvoyants require a continued exercise 
 of their peculiar powers to familiarize them with its 
 use. 
 
 We now proceed to explain the manner in which 
 the influence of the operator is brought to bear upon 
 his subject, and that sometimes, unconsciously to the 
 
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 73 
 
 mesmerizer^ and when some distance has intervened. It 
 is a law of nature^ that all things should be surrounded 
 by an eflfluvium, or atmosphere^ which emanates from 
 them^ and is always of the peculiar nature or quality 
 of the body from which it emanates^ and these effluvia 
 are regulated by certain definite laws. Thus the fra- 
 grance which surrounds the rose^ is the effluvium, or 
 atmosphere, emanating from it; this effluvium, by 
 being dissolved in the surrounding serial atmosphere, 
 becomes sensible to our organs of smell, and an idea 
 of its existence and quality is then transmitted to our 
 general sensorium. But there are effluvia of which we 
 should for ever remain ignorant, did we not rationally 
 perceive them by their effects. Thus, around mag- 
 netized and unmagnetized iron, an effluvium, or at- 
 mosphere, prevails, of which, in their separated state, 
 our senses give us no evidence. But we have only to 
 bring them into such proximity, as to be within the 
 influence of the law regulating the activity of theii^ re- 
 spective atmospheres, and their existence may be in- 
 stantly perceived in their mutual attraction and co- 
 herence. And it has been shewn by one of the pro- 
 foundest philosophers of the last century, some of 
 whose scientific statements are yet in advance of the 
 present time, that these single spheres have the pro- 
 perty of blending into one larger sphere, and that 
 hence arises, what is called magnetic attraction. 
 
 One of the revealments of the higher stages of 
 clairvoyance, or independent internal sight, is the 
 knowledge, that an effluvium, or atmosphere, analogous 
 to what has been alluded to, surrounds the mental 
 organism, or spiritual body of every individual. Fol- 
 lowing the general law of natui'e, this sphere possesses 
 the peculiar mental qualities of the organism from 
 which it emanates. And hence arises the repugnance 
 which is felt to the society of some persons, and the 
 pleasure which is experienced in the company of 
 others, and to it are referable all the remarkable in- 
 stances of SYMPATHY and ANTIPATHY, SO frequently 
 observed. In these ordinai'v cases, the active cause 
 
 4 
 
74 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 is latent or hidden ; but in the higher mesmeric, or 
 rather psychic state, it often becomes sufficiently ob- 
 vious, even to our physical senses : for we may here 
 see, that similar to what we have said of terrestrial 
 magnetism, there is an actual blending of spheres. 
 The magnet induces its quality or state on the iron, 
 so that it becomes magnetical ; and the operator in- 
 duces his sphere on his patient or subject, so that the 
 subject becomes, as it were, one body with himself, — 
 the egoism or self-consciousness of the one, being 
 blended with the egoism or self-consciousness of the 
 other. 
 
 Here, then, is t}\e psychological cause for the physio- 
 logical state already mentioned. The change of state 
 induced on the animus of the subject, whether by the 
 manipulations of an operator, or spontaneously, is the 
 primary cause of the change in the condition of the 
 cerebrum ; the collapse of the cerebrum closes the ex- 
 ternal consciousness, while the union of the spheres 
 emanating from the animus of both operator and sub- 
 ject, causes the latter to perceive, as in himself, what 
 really is felt in the active cerebrum of the former. 
 And this change of state affords, I believe, the true 
 psychological solution of the whole apparent mystery 
 of Phantasy, and many other curious mesmeric phe- 
 nomena. As regards phreno-mesmerism, the arousing 
 into activity one particular organ of the brain, as it 
 would be called by one class of phrenologists, or 
 faculty of the mind, as perhaps it would be called by 
 another class, without the guidance, control, or ba- 
 lancing powers of the other organs or faculties, is a 
 sufficient reason for the effects we see displayed. 
 
 But although the transfer of consciousness, and the 
 blending of the issuing spheres of the operator and 
 subject, will account for many curious and otherwise 
 inexplicable phenomena, it does not account for inde- 
 pendent clairvoyance. Nor do I think it can be rea- 
 sonably accounted for, but on the grounds already 
 intimated ^ that is, from the awakening of the sensa- 
 tional consciousness of the external of the immortal 
 
PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 75 
 
 body ; or, in other words,, from the activity of the 
 psyche or animus. Attempts certainly have been 
 made to explain these phenomena^ without any refer- 
 ence to the soul or spiritual part of man. One writer 
 would account for them by a series of hypotheses 
 which would overturn the Newtonian theory of philo- 
 sophy altogether, and substitute, for well-ascertained 
 facts, certain baseless assumptions; another would 
 solve it by an imaginary change of poles in the circuit 
 of the nervous currents, and the transfer of the func- 
 tions of life from the animal to the organic system. 
 That there is a real change in the currents of the 
 body, of which these writers were unaware, will be 
 shewn in the sequel ; also, that something analogous, 
 perhaps identical, with polarity is displayed by these 
 vital currents. But while these facts are useful in 
 elucidating the physiology of these abnormal states, 
 they shed no real light on the psychology. Besides, 
 according to the latter theory, the lower orders of 
 animal life, such as the mollusca, and other tribes, 
 which possess only a ganglionic system of nerves, and 
 are wholly deficient of brain, and the animal and 
 sensitive system of nerves, are virtually considered as 
 superior to man, and endowed with more extended 
 psychological powers; inasmuch as it is supposed, that 
 the abeyance of the functions of the brain and sensi- 
 tive system of nerves, and the transfer of similar, but 
 more extended powers, to the ganglionic system, is 
 the reason for the super-sensual powers we see exhi- 
 bited. Thus, according to this theory, man is to be 
 spiritually elevated, by being degraded to the lowest 
 forms of organic life. 
 
 The great difficulty hitherto experienced in arriving 
 at a knowledge of the real cause of clairvoyance, has 
 arisen, principally, from three causes. Firstly, the 
 very little true idea of the nature of the human soul, 
 which generally obtains, arising from the darkness and 
 mystification of materialism and metaphysics : second- 
 ly, from the different states of the clairvoyant subject 
 and the observer, and hence, the impossibility of their 
 
 4* 
 
76 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 having the same sensational perceptions; so that the 
 observer cannot sensationally perceive how the clair- 
 voyant sees^ nor can the clairvoyant adequately de- 
 scribe his perceptions ; and upon the return to the 
 normal state^ the ordinary mesmeric extatic has no 
 recollection of anything that has transpired in his 
 abnormal state. And thirdly^ the necessity for the 
 opening of a higher degree of consciousness, in order 
 fully to comprehend the lower. For instance^ an 
 animal has not^ nor can it have any proper idea of its 
 own nature : but man is enabled,, by the possession of 
 an internal spiritual principle^ rationally and sensa- 
 tionally to investigate his natural body. And the 
 mere induction of the faculty of clairvoyance, does not 
 enable the possessor of that faculty sensationally to 
 perceive the cause of that phenomenon ; this requires 
 the awakening of a higher, or more interior conscious- 
 ness, than that of ordinary clairvoyance, though still 
 probably belonging to the psyche^ or animal part of 
 the spiritual organism. But in this respect I have 
 had an advantage over most other enquirers, in pos- 
 sessing a subject, who, in addition to the ordinary 
 induced mesmeric extasis or trance, has repeatedly 
 been in states of spontaneous extasis, of a far higher, 
 and more interior character, and the reality of these 
 states has been proved to me by the most convincing 
 evidence. 
 
 There is a striking and characteristic difference 
 between the ordinary mesmeric trance, and the state 
 of spontaneous extasis, as regards the memory. That 
 every man possesses two memories, an internal and an 
 external, is sufficiently obvious from the general re- 
 sults of mesmeric investigation, and the same psycho- 
 logical fact, is sometimes witnessed as the occasional 
 result of disease, or morbid cerebral affections. By 
 some observers, the phenomenon has been called 
 double consciousness. In the normal wakeful state, 
 these two memories act as one, so that the impressions 
 made on the common sensorium, are also impressed 
 on the inner memory. Hence, what is known in the 
 
PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 77 
 
 wakeful state^ can be remembered in the internal 
 psychic state. But the impressions made on the 
 inner sensorium of a subject in the psychic state^ or 
 state of mesmeric trance^ are^ as observed above^ not 
 remembered^ and are in fact totally unknown^ when 
 the subject returns to the normal state. The reason 
 is^ because from the collapse of the cerebrum^ and 
 consequent closing of the perceptions of the common 
 external sensorium^ there is no capability in the ex- 
 ternal sensorium^ or what amounts to the same^ in 
 its ultimate organization, the brain, to receive and 
 retain the impressions. But if the subject is again 
 thrown into the inner, or psychic state, the impres- 
 sions of a former psychic state are remembered; 
 shewing, that they are impressed and remain on the 
 inner sensorium — or inner consciousness. 
 
 In the SUPERIOR state, as Davis, the American 
 clairvoyant, calls it, or true spiritual extasis, both the 
 internal and external memories are active: but, from 
 my own observation, the operations of both memories 
 appear to be of a very interior kind, and the impres- 
 sion on the external memory is made/rom ivithin, and 
 seems less permanent than the usual external impres- 
 sions from without. Owing to this opening, as it were, 
 of both memories, the extatic subject can recollect in 
 the normal state, the impressions and sensations of 
 the abnormal state ; and, at the same time, possesses 
 a sufficient consciousness of the great difference be- 
 tween these states, so as not to confound the percep- 
 tions and knowledges of the one, with those of the 
 other ; especially, if assisted in this discrimination by 
 those in the normal state, who may have been wit- 
 nesses of the trance. It does not, however, appear to 
 rae, that the external memory of the extatic, has any 
 of the ordinary connections with external things. 
 The opening of this more interior degree, enables the 
 extatic subject to perceive many things unknown to 
 ordinary clairvoyants, and hence to learn the causes 
 of some of the more common phenomena ; and during 
 these states, I have endeavoured to obtain some know- 
 
78 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 ledge respecting the law and mode of mental associa- 
 tion and connection. 
 
 One remarkable revealment of this superior state, or 
 spontaneous extasis, is^ that every man while in this 
 mortal life^ is_, by the very laws of his beings and 
 hence^ of course^ by the design of the Creator^ in- 
 timately^ though unconsciously, associated with the 
 spirit-world; so much so indeed, that his spiritual 
 organism, may be said to be in that world, although, 
 by its connection with the natural organism, it ap- 
 pears to be, and is to our sensual perceptions, wholly 
 located in the world of nature. There is a general 
 connection with the spirit-world, and a particular 
 association by such individual spiritual beings as are 
 more directly in harmony with the state of the man. 
 Every man has, what may be styled his associate spirit, 
 something probably like the good Daimon of Socrates, 
 or it may be, what the Scriptures represent as man^s 
 attendant angel.* The spiritual world is thus, not to 
 be sought in the distant fields of space, but it and its 
 Creator is as near to us here, as it would be, could we 
 transport ourselves to the Milky Way, or to the far- 
 thest space yet explored by Lord Rosse's gigantic 
 telescope. In forming an idea of the spirit- world, its 
 laws and appearances, we are to consider state, or 
 mode of existence, rather than space or time ; and by 
 cultivating this way of thinking, we may form more 
 just conceptions of the nature and omnipresence of 
 the Deity. 
 
 Another singular revealment is, that in the spirit- 
 world, there is, as it were, a reflection, of the scenes 
 and transactions of this world; or, to speak more speci- 
 fically, in the memory and ideas of the associated 
 spirit may be seen, by spiritual or mental sight, the 
 counterpart of the associated man. Wliile the laws 
 and state of the spirit-world, having no reference to 
 the fixed properties of matter, permit the subjective 
 ideas and active thoughts of spiritual beings to become 
 objective, and thus, the sensible exponents of their 
 
 * See Matt, xviii. 10, 
 
PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 79 
 
 affections and perceptions. Hence such things as 
 could only be known in the natural world, by oral or 
 written communication, confession, or description^ 
 are objects of open vision in the spirit- world. 
 
 A true clairvoyant may be defined to be one, who, 
 by the opening of the internal consciousness, or spiri- 
 tual sight, whether induced by any operation, or oc- 
 curring spontaneously, has, while in that state of in- 
 ner consciousness, and according to the degree of its 
 development, a sensational perception of the objects of 
 the inner, or spirit-world. Where this development 
 does not exist, the state is simply that of natural 
 clairvoyance, or cerebral lucidity. Some subjects ap- 
 pear to possess the faculty of spiritual clairvoyance ; 
 others, that of lucidity ; while some few individuals 
 have exhibited both faculties. If the attention of a 
 true clairvoyant, is directed to any distant individual, 
 and the rapport, or connection between them, made 
 stronger, by using the hair or writing of the individual 
 sought, or something else identified in some measure 
 with his mind or body, as the connecting medium, there 
 are two ways in which the parties may become men- 
 tally present with each other. Firstly, the clairvoyant 
 comes by the rapport with the man, into connection 
 with the associated spirit ; and then, from the reflection 
 of memory, and from what may be called the living 
 phantasmagoria of the spirit-world, the man and his 
 affairs, and perceptions, and recollections, are laid open 
 to the clairvoyant^s inner vision. And as, from the 
 proximity of the spirit-world to the mind, the associ- 
 ated spirit will be equally near, whether the man may 
 be in the next street, or in another hemisphere, the 
 distance of the object sought will make no difference 
 to clairvoyant inquiry. Secondly; as man, even in 
 this mortal life, is internally a true spiritual organism, 
 and as such, is, as we have observed, a subject of the 
 laws of the spirit-world, the spirits of all men, as deni- 
 zens of the spirit-world, may be equally near to each 
 other, according to their respective states, no matter 
 how far apart their natural bodies may bo ; and the 
 
80 PSYCHEISM AND SOMNOLISM. 
 
 clairvoyant^ in whom the proper state is induced^ may 
 come into sensational correspondence with, the spirit 
 of the man^ and thence with his natural organism and 
 memory^ wherever he may bodily be present : yet^ 
 stilly it is probable, that the direct connection, is medi- 
 ately effected by the associated spirit. 
 
 Which of these two modes of connection is the 
 more common one^ appears to the writer^ after much 
 experience, difficult to determine. So complete a 
 counterpart of the man^ and the scenery by which he 
 is surrounded, appears to be afforded by the asso- 
 ciated spirit, and the surrounding objective appear- 
 ances, that the clairvoyant, having no means of com- 
 parison, owing to the closure of the external sensorium, 
 may mistake the associated spirit for, and take it to 
 be^ the real man. But the general vividness of the 
 perception, and the constant, and frequently unex- 
 pected description of natural objects, rather inclines 
 the writer to conclude^ that the connection is direct, 
 and that the whole man, both as to spirit and body, is 
 thus brought before the inner vision. But the admis- 
 sion of these psychological causes, does not preclude 
 the possibility of there being some subtile, material, 
 elementary connection, between the nervous system of 
 the clairvoyant and that of the distant individual ; — 
 something analogous, probably, to the odylic force of 
 Reichenbach : and this connection may be induced by 
 the action of the mind of the clairvoyant on the mind 
 of the distant party, by which, as from an electric 
 battery, a current may be set in motion, analogous to 
 the currents passing along the telegraphic wires ; but 
 having this essential difference, that there is only a 
 sensational perception at one end of the communica- 
 tion. This, then, appears to be the simple, rational, 
 yet deeply interesting solution of the psychological 
 cause of the certain facts of distant clairvoyance. 
 
 There remains to be considered, the psychology of 
 what is above called, cerebral lucidity ; that is, the 
 power of distinguishing natural objects by an interior 
 perception, independent of the usual visual organs. 
 
PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 81 
 
 and even where opaque substances intervene. How 
 the impression of outward objects is conveyed to the 
 sensorium^ is one of the most difficult problems con- 
 nected with our inquiry : the fact^ that such is the 
 case^ cannot be doubted by any one who has had suf- 
 ficient opportunity carefully to examine the subject. 
 The difficulty arises^ from the clairvoyant being unable 
 to analyse the mode of vision^ and point out its modus 
 operandi ; and the impossibility of an individual in the 
 normal state^ sensationally realizing the feelings or 
 perceptions of a clairvoyant. We may, perhaps, ob- 
 tain a more correct idea, by attending to the process 
 by which the mind becomes cognizant of external 
 things by means of common sight. 
 
 In ordinary vision, the mind does not directly be- 
 hold the outward visible object, but it has ?i perception of 
 that object as existing in the imagination. By imagi- 
 nation is not here meant mere fancy , as is sometimes 
 done when that term is used, but the image-forming 
 faculty y or the general power of the sensorium to form 
 images within itself of objects that are without itself 
 Imagination is, therefore, considered as a true and 
 proper faculty of the psyche^ or animal mind, and 
 thence, as a distinct mode of sensation above the ordi- 
 nary senses of the body, and to which they are sub- 
 servient. For it is by the outward senses, which de- 
 pend on nervous influence, and their connection with 
 this image-forming faculty, that mind and matter are 
 brought into mutual relationship and connection. 
 Whether, therefore, it is by ordinary sight, by cere- 
 bral lucidity, or by the suggestions of another's mind, 
 that the ideas of the objects are transmitted to the 
 sensorium, they are alike subjects of the image-forming 
 faculty when there, and, as subjective perceptions, they 
 are equally real. I have partially demesmerised my 
 principal subject, when in a state of lucidity, so as to 
 restore the normal conscious state, without demesme- 
 rizing the eyes, which remained up-turned and closed, 
 and incapable of ordinary vision. By this means a 
 consciousness of a super-sensual state was produced, 
 
 4** 
 
82 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 and every object was then said to be seen in a most 
 brilliant lights altogether different to common light, 
 whether solar or artificial ; and, at the same time, all 
 the surrounding objects were seen, at once, as if united 
 by this flowing light, and yet, a sense of their separate 
 identity remained. Generally, the objects appeared 
 greatly magnified, and brilliant ; all which seems 
 to indicate, that the independent action of the sen- 
 sorium produces more vivid images of the objects im- 
 pressed upon it ; and this might be expected, from the 
 exaltation of the sense, arising from the opening of 
 the perceptions of a higher ultimate. This kind of 
 experiment has not been very frequently repeated, 
 owing to the clairvoyante experiencing some alarm at 
 the novelty of her situation, and a fear on my part 
 lest any injury should be done to ordinary vision. 
 From this, and other experience, it appears that the 
 light, or that sensation which to the clairvoyant is 
 light, issuing from within, awakens the perceptions of 
 the image-forming faculty, and thence transmits to 
 the mind a picture of the objects beheld. At the 
 same time, it is highly probable, from the results of 
 many inquiries, that the light issuing from within, 
 uses some ethereal element as a basis, and that by 
 this means the natural object becomes perceptible to 
 the mental sight. 
 
 It will form no objection to our general statements 
 of the spiritual nature of man, that brutes possess an 
 image-forming faculty^ and hence, it may be con- 
 cluded, something analogous to the human animus. 
 There is Httle doubt, but that all animals possess 
 something of the nature of a soul, and that hence 
 they have their pecuUar psychological developments. 
 But they want the Pneuma — the purely spiritual and 
 rational essence, which gives man his essential cha- 
 racter, and by which he is enabled to contemplate his 
 Maker, and from which he derives his title to immor- 
 tality. This, however, is not a subject for discussion 
 in these pages, and the writer would only further re- 
 mark, that he was not a little surprised to find one of 
 
PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 83 
 
 our most popular and best physiologists, using the 
 terms of the Apostle, and yet in a sense just opposite 
 to that of the inspired writer; for he attributes to 
 animals the possession of a pneuma, and to man the 
 supposed higher faculty of the psyche, — thus exactly 
 reversing the Apostle^s statements. 
 
 In concluding this part of our inquiry, the author 
 would respectfully suggest, that a calm investigation 
 of the psychical phenomena developed by mesmerism, 
 instead of leading to a denial of Christianity, or to such 
 superstitious andchildish notions, as, that the witnessed 
 results are the effects of a presumed satanic influence, 
 would produce an exactly contrary effect; and that the 
 knowledge thus acquired, may become of great use in 
 furthering the interests of religion and morality. By 
 this means we may demonstrate, that there is an in- 
 ternal way to the mind, as well as the usual external 
 way of the outward senses. This, though admitted by 
 believers in the authority of the Holy Scriptures, has 
 been generally denied by an influential class of writers. 
 Thepsychicalphcnomenaof mesmerism andtrance, tend 
 also to confirm and illustrate some of those striking 
 and interesting Scripture narratives, which have been 
 so often assailed by scepticism and infidelity ; they 
 present man to us, both in his relation to the spirit- 
 world and the natural world ; being, even while taber- 
 nacling in mortal flesh, as to his interior, mental, or 
 spiritual organism, in direct communication with a 
 spiritual world, and thus capable, by the very laws of 
 his being, of receiving influences from God, and spiri- 
 tual intelligences ; while, by his material organism, he 
 is constituted in direct relation to all outward things. 
 Man is thus presented to us just in the light we might 
 expect, considering that he is the crowning w^ork of 
 the Great Creator^s skill : for we may see, that he is 
 really and truly, that link in the great chain of crea- 
 tion, which God has made to join heaven to earth, and 
 earth to heaven ! 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 PARTICULAR MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. — ^CASE OF E. L. 
 
 In the foregoing cliapters, while treating of the physi- 
 ology and psychology of mesmerism^ regard has been 
 had to general phenomena, as noticed by different ob- 
 servers, but with more especial reference to the writer^ s 
 own observations. The following chapters will record 
 some portions of the author's experience with his, 
 now tolerably well-known subject, ^^ Emma.^' Since 
 the publication of the first edition of this work, her 
 power, or gift, has been publicly attested, and has 
 proved, in some cases, of eminent use. Still there 
 are matters, or revealments, connected with her 
 statements, that are incapable of ordinary proof: of 
 these, the chief are, those relating to the laws and 
 scenery of another life. With respect to such state- 
 ments, the writer wishes only to assume the character 
 of a faithful reporter, presenting to the reader a true 
 picture of what he has repeatedly observed ; neither 
 withholding such particulars as m«i/ occasion a Saddu- 
 cean smile, nor, on the other hand, garnishing them 
 to suit any particular theory or religious belief. The 
 sensitive reader will find no cause for alarm, as nothing 
 of a dogmatic or doctrinal religious nature is intro- 
 duced ; and the revealments j if they may be so called, 
 are in harmony with the hopes and feelings of the 
 wise and good of all ages, and all creeds, who have 
 pleasingly anticipated a land, — 
 
 '' Where everlasting spring abides, 
 And never-withering flowers." 
 
 E. L., the young woman who is the chief subject of 
 the following notes, is a native of Worcestershire. She 
 is about five feet two inches in height, rather sallow 
 complexion, and of a nervous-bilious temperament. 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 85 
 
 Her health, although now tolerably good, is not ro- 
 bust, nor is she capable of much continued exertion. 
 Towards the end of the summer of 1846, she entered 
 my house in the capacity of a domestic servant. A 
 few years before this, she had been the subject of inflam- 
 matory disease of the chest, and of fever; and not long 
 pre\ious to her arrival in Bolton, she had been an in- 
 mate of the General Hospital, Birmingham, on account 
 of an injury received in the knee. The treatment there 
 had reduced her general health, but improved her 
 knee; and she was in this state when I first saw her. 
 Her head is well formed, and largely developed, in 
 proportion to the size of her face and person. Mons. 
 Bally, the practical phrenologist and anatomical 
 modeller, of Manchester, saw her in July, 1848. He 
 said that her head was well formed, and that her 
 faculties only wanted cultivation. He did not appear 
 to be able to assign any phrenological cause for her 
 peculiar faculty; and the only individual remark he 
 made, had reference to the organ, or region, of firm- 
 ness. I was desirous that he should see her, because 
 in a somewhat similar case, another well-known phre- 
 nologist had ascribed all the recorded phenomena to 
 the workings of an over-grown organ of wonder, or 
 marvellousness. Before the time about to be referred 
 to, she was wholly ignorant that she possessed any pe- 
 cuUar mesmeric susceptibilities. She has since ex- 
 pressed an opinion, that the extraordinary conditio!^ 
 of her brain, is the result of a very large dose of opium 
 which she once took by mistake, and which, for a day 
 or two, occasioned very serious symptoms. But this 
 may be considered as very doubtful. She completed 
 her twenty-fourth year in December, 1850. She will 
 be constantly referred to by the name of Emma. 
 
 Towards the close of the autumn of 1846, my atten- 
 tion, in common with that of medical men generally, 
 was directed to the action of the vapoui' of ether in 
 obliterating the sense of pain, — it having been then 
 recently brought into public notice for that purpose. 
 Before that time I had seen the vapour of ether used 
 
86 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 as a substitute for the nitric oxide, or laughing-gas, and 
 had noticed the intoxicating and exciting eflPects it pro- 
 duced; but, like others, I was ignorant that it blunted, 
 and, in some cases, entirely removed the sense of pain. 
 Hearing me talk of the effects of ether, Emma said, 
 that a cousin of hers had '^ mesmerised^ ^ her and 
 another young woman with ether, which they ^^ sucked'"^ 
 out of a bottle ; indeed she called it '' The Mesmerise,'^ 
 Being anxious to test the truth of the reports then in 
 circulation, I asked her if she had any objection to 
 let me see her inhale some of the vapour ? She re- 
 plied — '^ None at all, for she had no fear of it hurting 
 her/^ I, therefore, fitted-up a common Winchester 
 quart bottle, merely by putting a piece of brass tubing 
 through the cork, which went half-way down the 
 bottle, and two or three inches above it. About half 
 an ounce of sulphuric ether was put into the bottle, 
 and the bottle well shaken to mix the vapour with the 
 contained air ; I then gave it to her, and told her to 
 put the pipe to her mouth, and gently draw in the 
 air in the bottle, without my closing her nose, or 
 using any of the valvular apparatus then in use. In 
 less than five minutes I observed that her hands began 
 to loosen their hold of the bottle, which I then re- 
 moved; the pupils of her eyes became dilated, and 
 presently the eyelids closed. She was now found to 
 be insensible to pain ; or rather, to evince no sense of 
 feeling, which was ascertained in various ways ; such 
 as pinching and pricking various parts of the body, 
 endeavouring to excite tittilation, and even by thrust- 
 ing pins under her finger nails ; but she did not evince 
 the slightest consciousness of these experiments ; on 
 the contrary, she was soon in a merry mood, and fan- 
 cied herself to be among her old companions in her 
 native place, rambling through fields, and performing, 
 as she supposed, many rural and domestic occupations. 
 She would laugh, dance, sing, and do many things 
 which were suggested to her; but, when aroused, she 
 had scarcely, if any, recollection of what had oc- 
 curred. These abnormal states were continued longer 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 87 
 
 than intended^ on account of the difficulty experienced 
 in arousing her ; for on one or two occasions^ nearly 
 two hours were expended in fully restoring her. Pro- 
 bably, had I then been aware that she was really in a 
 mesmeric state, and known how to perform the de- 
 mesmerizing passes, she might have been restored 
 much more easily. 
 
 Other individuals were now tried, but only one was 
 found at that time, at all similar to her in susceptibility 
 to the ethereal influence, and that was a youth who 
 had been mesmerised by Mr. Spencer Hall, when that 
 gentleman was lecturing in Bolton. The same bottle, 
 in like manner, with about half an ounce of ether in 
 it, was given to him, and in five minutes he became 
 insensible, and then exhibited similar phenomena to 
 Emma, but not so striking. He talked and acted, and, 
 like her, imagined himself to be in another place than 
 where he really was, and in about half an hour he spon- 
 taneously awaked. Subsequently, I had many opportu- 
 nities of trying the effect of the ethereal vapour with a 
 proper apparatus, and witnessed various degrees of 
 narcotism ; sometimes strong imaginative feelings ; 
 but never anything so truly mesmeric as in the case 
 of Emma. 
 
 Having noticed Emma-'s susceptibility, I gradually 
 reduced the quantity of ether, until at last there re- 
 mained only sufficient to scent the bottle. Finding 
 that with the bottle in this state I could produce the 
 same results, I began to suspect that the ether had 
 very little to do with the strange things witnessed, 
 but that she was in a manner" mesmerised, or rather 
 hypnotised^ as Dr. Braid would call it, by her steadfast 
 attention in looking at the bottle, while inhaling 
 through the tube. It was therefore resolved to try 
 another experiment. One evening I told her to sit 
 down; and taking a small pocket-comb desired her to 
 look steadfastly at it. She did so ; and in a few mi- 
 nutes, as with the bottle, fell into the simple mesmeric, 
 or hypnotic sleep. Afterwards, a small magnet was 
 used for the same purpose, and with the same results ; 
 
88 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 and a few days further on^ I laid aside all instruments, 
 and simply gazed steadfastly at her, desiring her to 
 fix her eyes on mine, when she quickly passed into 
 the somnolent state. The youth mentioned above, 
 was also submitted to a similar experiment, by causing 
 him to gaze steadfastly on the poles of a small horse- 
 shoe magnet, held a few inches from his eyes. The 
 pupils soon dilated, the eyes mechanically followed 
 the movements of the magnet, and presently the lids 
 closed, and he passed into the somnolent, or mes- 
 meric, state. In both cases, results were obtained 
 similar to those following the use of ether ; namely, 
 insensibility to pain, and a sort of somnambulic wake- 
 ful dreaming. The only difference yet perceptible be- 
 tween the effects of ether and those resulting from 
 hypnotizing, or mesmerising, was, that by the latter 
 mode the limbs could be made rigid, — cataleptic, as it 
 is called, — while no such rigidity could be induced 
 after the inhalation of the ether. Up to this time, 
 dancing, singing, and doing various things which were 
 audibly suggested, as if they were real, together with 
 rigidity of the limbs, after downward passes, were the 
 only phenomena noticed ; and it was thought that the 
 statements made by some writers, of the personal in- 
 fluence of the operator over the subject, were merely 
 fanciful, and not warranted by fact. 
 
 But, by degrees, it was found that such statements 
 were the expressions of truth, inasmuch as Emma gra- 
 dually manifested all the phenomena, or nearly all, 
 which have been recorded of mesmeric subjects by 
 writers of credit. Some time in the summer of 1847, 
 while experimenting with her, I accidentally placed 
 my hand on the part of the head marked on the busts 
 as the organ of veneration ; she immediately began 
 repeating the Apostles^ Creed : when my hand was 
 removed she ceased, and when it was replaced, she 
 commenced repeating where she left off. This was 
 the first manifestation on her part of the phrenological 
 sentiments, and interested me greatly. It should be 
 observed, that endeavours were very early made to 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 89 
 
 excite these faculties^ in order to test the truthfulness 
 of writers on phreno-mesmerism, but unsuccessfully; 
 and hence^ much doubt was entertained of their reality. 
 It was some weeks after this first manifestation^ before 
 any of the other phrenological faculties could be ex- 
 cited^ notwithstanding repeated trials were made : but 
 eventually all the prominent feelings and sentiments 
 were easily aroused ; such as^ benevolence, veneration, 
 firmness, self-esteem, philo-progenitiveness, — most 
 powerfully, — acquisitiveness, combativeness, mirth- 
 falness, &c. Still no proof of any personal influence 
 passing from the operator, was observed, but she be- 
 came more easily and quickly mesmerised, and as easily 
 recalled into the normal, wakeful state. 
 
 It was now found, that Emma would exhibit all the 
 usual mesmeric phenomena, such as catalepsy^ or 
 rigidity of the limbs, for she could be fixed immov- 
 ably in any position by the action of a few passes ; 
 she could be so far demesmerised as to be restored to 
 outward consciousness, and yet be unable to move the 
 mesmerised arm or leg. She would also manifest the 
 remarkable feature of magnetic attraction, even in the 
 same conscious state, as I often had the opportunity 
 of shewing to friends and neighbours, who were as 
 much surprised as amused. For example, a piece of 
 money would be placed on a table in a distant part of 
 the room, and it was told her, she might have it for 
 fetching it. She frequently essayed to do so, and 
 would sometimes nearly reach the money; but in- 
 variably, my will, and the drawing passes I made to- 
 wards myself, overcame her power, and, notwithstand- 
 ing her determined efforts to the contrary, would draw 
 her to myself, and render all her endeavours to secure 
 the money ineffectual. On these occasions, she de- 
 scribed the sensations she experienced, as being like 
 cords wound round her, and drawing her in spite of 
 her endeavours to resist. Considerable experience, to 
 which reference will be made further on, has pretty 
 well shewn, that there are currents passing through, 
 or around the nerves, by which the limbs are moved ; 
 
90 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 and tliat these currents^ are^ in sensitive subjects^ under 
 the control of the operator^ and maybe stayed, or ren- 
 dered active, irrespective of the volition of the subject. 
 In the first case, the subject is unable to move the 
 limb, in which the currents are arrested, and the sen- 
 sation is that of being fi^ed to the spot where the 
 operator has placed it ; but there is no real fiouity, or 
 adhesive attraction, as seen between iron and the mag- 
 net. In the second instance, the currents in the in- 
 voluntary, or reflex nerves, are rendered active, and 
 propel the subject, contrary to his inclination. But 
 in both cases, it is doubtful if the cerebrum is com- 
 pletely demesmerised. 
 
 At this time Emma could easily be made to believe, 
 that articles put into her hand, or on her lap, were 
 widely difl*erent from their true nature. Sometimes 
 by the silent operation of the mesmeriser^s will, or 
 thoughts, she could be led to imagine that a pocket 
 handkerchief thrown into her lap, was a snake, or some 
 other noxious animal, and she would throw it from 
 her, and exhibit evident signs of fear and disgust. 
 If she was told the snake, or whatever she had ima- 
 gined it to be, should be removed, and the handker- 
 chief was withdrawn, and then almost immediately 
 replaced, the operator, at the same time, thinking of 
 some harmless pleasing animal, such as a rabbit or 
 the like, she would imagine the handkerchief to be 
 the animal thought of by the operator ; and by her 
 language and actions, plainly evince that she fancied 
 she had the animal on her lap. This is that peculiar 
 state, I have called phantasy, because the objects 
 which were apparently real to her, were, in fact, merely 
 imaginary phantoms, having no existence, but in 
 something widely diS*erent. The phenomenon is how- 
 ever of much interest, as throwing light on what may 
 be called the real phantasmagoria of the spirit- world, 
 and the mode by which the subjective ideas of spi- 
 ritual beings, may become objective before the mental 
 sight of clairvoyance. As Emma increased in lucidity, 
 she perceived the fallacy of these imaginative ideas, 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 91 
 
 for if she was desired to look at the object she held^ 
 and she did so^ by putting it to her forhead^ she evi- 
 dently perceived the delusion^, and threw it from her 
 wdth a feehng of indignation. This used to be strik- 
 ingly evinced if the organ of philo-progenitiveness 
 had been excited^ and a handkerchief had been given 
 her as a baby ; if told to look at it^ she would dash it 
 away ; but the craving of the faculty remained^ and 
 she would bitterly complain that her baby had been 
 taken away from her. Since this period Emma^s 
 state has considerably changed. Her increased 
 powers of lucidity, render it more difficult to im- 
 pose on her by phantastic images; and^ perhaps, 
 on the whole^ it may be said, that the awakening of 
 higher powers, has made her a less interesting and 
 more unmanageable subject for the lower and more 
 amusing mesmeric experiments. The investigation 
 of these ordinary mesmeric states was not confined to 
 those exhibited by Emma, but their truthfulness was 
 further confirmed in the case of several youths, who 
 w^ere experimented upon, both privately and publicly, 
 and who exhibited similar phenomena, but modified 
 in each case by the general character of the indi- 
 vidual. 
 
 After Emma''s susceptibilities had become fully 
 developed, opportunities frequently occurred for prov- 
 ing the reality of a personal influence of some kind, 
 either as a current of vital electricity, or some very sub- 
 tile imponderable element, proceeding from the person 
 of the operator when actively engaged in mesmerising ; 
 and also shewing that a highly sensitive mesmeric 
 subject may be acted upon, even when wholly un- 
 aware of the influence, and even at a distance. Many 
 experiments were made to ascertain the truth on this 
 point ; but I will only mention a few cases that oc- 
 curred spontaneously, or rather, which happened 
 without my mind being directed to her, or without 
 any intention on my part that she should receive the 
 influence. 
 
 Once, a gentleman asked me unexpectedly, in a 
 
92 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 neighbour's house^ several doors from mine^ to mes* 
 merise him; I tried^ but did not succeed. On re- 
 turning home^ I found Emma in the mesmeric state^ 
 and^ upon enquiry, discovered that she had gone into 
 that state while engaged with needle-work^ and at the 
 time I was endeavouring to mesmerise the gentleman. 
 - On another occasion, I was wishful to induce the 
 mesmeric sleep on a lady, for the relief of a rheumatic 
 aflPection from which she was suffering. Finding the 
 continual stare very fatiguing to my eyes, and also, 
 expecting to be called away by patients, it occurred to 
 me, that if I directed her to look steadfastly at some- 
 thing, it might answer the same purpose, and allow 
 me to leave her, without interrupting the mesmeric 
 action. I therefore arose, and took a small magnet, 
 and suspended it by a wire from a hook in the ceiling. 
 Emma was in the kitchen, situated under the room 
 where I was operating, and knew nothing of my 
 movements. In a few minutes the smell of burning 
 linen arrested my attention, and I desired my daugh- 
 ter to go down stairs and ascertain the cause. She 
 called me quickly to come down, saying that Emma 
 was on fire ; I ran down, and found her with lier eyes 
 closed, and mesmerised, and on her knees before the 
 kitchen fire, engaged in sweeping the hearth, and her 
 apron on fire from contact with a burning coal that 
 had fallen from the grate; but of the fire she was 
 unconscious, or, at least, she took no notice of it, and 
 her attention was wholly directed to a point in the 
 kitchen ceiling, under where I had been sitting in 
 the room above. Having asked her what she was 
 doing or looking at ? She replied, '^ / want that 
 magnet?^ I pretended not to understand her, and 
 said. What magnet ? The reply was, ^' That magnet 
 hanging up there,'' — pointing accurately to its situa- 
 tion. I extinguished the fire without saying anything 
 to her about it, and led her up stairs, and put her into 
 connection with the lady, by joining their hands. 
 When she was aroused, she expressed great surprise 
 at finding herself in my sitting room, and was quite 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 93 
 
 unconscious how she came there^ or of the fire. Upon 
 enquiry, I found that she was engaged as above stated 
 in the room below me, and that she felt some strange 
 sort of influence come over her, and that she knew 
 nothing after that until I aroused her. The influence 
 from myself, and I have reason to think, from the 
 magnet also, passed through the floor and ceiling, 
 and aff'ected her unconsciously in the room below; 
 and being then lucidly clairvoyant, her attention was 
 immediately attracted to the magnet in the room 
 above. From the locality of the rooms, and the 
 magnet having been used without any previous inti- 
 mation of my intention, — in fact, it did not occur to 
 me to do so, until the patient had been some time 
 seated — Emma could not possibly know of its being 
 in the situation in which I had placed it, by any 
 normal means. Here then, was one, among nume- 
 rous spontaneous instances, of the transmission and 
 reception of an influence flowing from the operator, 
 and also, of the reality of lucid clairvoyance in ena- 
 bling its subject to see a natural object, notwithstand- 
 ing the intervention of an opaque substance, and with 
 the eyes up-turned, and the eyelids closed. 
 
 At another time, when visiting a patient residing 
 more than a mile and a half from my house, who was 
 sufi'ering from delirium tremens, I was desirous of 
 trying the soothing influence of mesmerism, and, in 
 this instance, succeeded in a few minutes. On re- 
 turning home, I found that Emma had gone into the 
 mesmeric state, at the time I was operating on my 
 patient j but fortunately, she was in a situation where 
 no harm happened to her, and she awakened sponta- 
 neously, before my return. At a subsequent time, a 
 poor man, who was subject to epileptic fits, and whom 
 I had relieved and since cui^d, fell down in the mar- 
 ket-place in a fit. Some parties who were with him, 
 and knew the beneficial influence he had before re- 
 ceived from mesmeric passes, brought him to my 
 house, which was not far from where he fell ; he was 
 foaming at the mouth, and followed by a crowd. As 
 
94 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 soon as they liad seated him, I commenced making 
 passes over him, especially over what I knew to be the 
 chief part affected, and within a few minutes subdued 
 the paroxysm and restored him to consciousness. I 
 then thought of Emma, who was in the kitchen, and 
 knew nothing of the man^s being brought to me, or 
 of my mesmerising him, and I found her in the mes- 
 meric state from the operation of my influence when 
 engaged with the epileptic patient. 
 
 By way of experiment, I frequently mesmerised her 
 when in another room, and unknown to her ; but in 
 the above mentioned, and in other cases, I did not 
 think of her, and the circumstance can only be ex- 
 plained from her known susceptibility, and my being 
 actually engaged in exerting a mesmeric influence and 
 intention. This extreme susceptibility to my personal 
 influence, for a considerable period prevented -my 
 using mesmerism as a curative agent, inasmuch as I 
 feared to exercise the power, unless I knew that 
 Emma was in a place of safety, and would be kept 
 from danger, in case she became unawares mesmer- 
 ised. While in the mesmeric state, before one of the 
 trances to be hereafter spoken of, Emma said, that 
 after that particular trance, she should not be thus 
 dangerously susceptible of my influence, but that I 
 might mesmerise other people, without her feeling it, 
 unless I intended her to do so. In this, as in other 
 matters connected with her own states, I found her 
 prognosis correct; and I now can even mesmerise 
 in her presence, without her yielding to the influence. 
 But she is, I think, quite as susceptible to my influ- 
 ence, when intended, and frequently used: and a great 
 drawback to mesmeric usefulness is thus removed. 
 
 In the early part of the year 1847, Emma wished 
 to have the vapour of ether administered, with the 
 view of having an aching tooth removed without pain; 
 but the striking effects I had seen follow upon mes- 
 merising her, induced me to refuse the ether, and, in 
 the evening, to mesmerise her, and thus further test 
 the power of the mesmeric sleep to produce ancesthesia, 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 95 
 
 as it is professionally termed^ — that is^ the power of 
 rendering the sense of feeling dormant. About nine 
 o'clock that evening, I desired her to sit down, in- 
 duced the mesmeric sleep, and then leisurely got the 
 necessary instruments; lanced her gum; extracted 
 her tooth; as soon as the bleeding was arrested, 
 washed her mouth, and then aroused her. The entire 
 time from sitting down until fully aroused, was just 
 fifteen minutes. During the operation she did not 
 evince the slightest sensibility; but as soon as the 
 removal of the instrument gave liberty to her mouth, 
 she began to hum a tune, even while the blood was 
 flowing. On awakening, she knew nothing of what 
 had taken place after going into the sleep, and could 
 hardly be persuaded that the tooth on the table before 
 her, had been extracted from her jaw! Some time 
 afterwards, Mr. Patrick, surgeon-dentist, of Bolton, 
 extracted a large decayed molar tooth from her lower 
 jaw, under similar circumstances. She evinced no 
 sense of feeling; but before being mesmerised, she 
 desired that only one tooth (for she had several de- 
 cayed,) should be removed ; and after the removal of 
 the tooth, and the withdrawal of the instrument, she 
 kept repeating the words ^^ only one,'^ unconscious that 
 the one had been removed. On the latter occasion, 
 several friends were witnesses of the operation. She 
 still exhibits the same absence of feehng; but her 
 lucidity is, in this case, rather hurtful than beneficial 
 to her ; for unless her attention can be drawn quite 
 away from any experiment or needful operation, she 
 sees what is being done, and from her normal recol- 
 lection imagines the pain : just as she has equally 
 imagined it, when she was told that she was pricked 
 or pinched; and when reminded that she could not 
 feel pain, when " warm,^^ as she calls the mesmeric 
 state, she replies, ^^ Ah, but I see it ache, — or smart.'*' 
 Many parties, to whom these experiments were 
 known, have desired me to throw them into tlie un- 
 conscious state, before undergoing some minor opera- 
 tion. It is well to state here, what I have repeatedly 
 
96 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 done orally^ that unless a person is of the peculiar 
 mesmeric temperament or nature, or unless they have 
 been repeatedly subjected to the influence, there is 
 scarcely any probability of gratifying their wishes, and 
 the attempt to do so, would only lead to disappoint- 
 ment. Where, however, persons have become weak- 
 ened by long continued pain, or are of a sensitive 
 nature, it may succeed; and in all cases where any 
 serious operation maybe looked for at a future period, 
 I should recommend mesmerism to be daily practised, 
 in order that the patient might be brought fully un- 
 der its influence. As a general anaesthetic agent, 
 ether, or chloroform, is more available, as all persons 
 are receptive of its influence ; but where mesmerism 
 can be used, it is infinitely preferable, inasmuch as 
 it is free from all the danger attending the use of 
 chloroform or ether, and produces no subsequent de- 
 rangement of the health, which these agents are apt 
 to do. 
 
 I now reply to a question often put to me : ^^ How 
 did you discover Emma^s lucidity- or clairvoyance ? ^^ 
 In the autumn of 1847, it was told me, that there was 
 a young woman in Bolton, w^ho had travelled the 
 country with a mesmeric lecturer, and who had been 
 for a long time clairvoyant. Having heard much of 
 this wonderful faculty, I was desirous to see her, and 
 examine for myself. She was soon after introduced 
 to me for this purpose. I found that she was very 
 easily mesmerised, more quickly in fact, than Emma; 
 but in this state she knew me and others in the room, 
 apparently as if awake, she was also fully susceptible 
 of feeling ; nor did I observe any marked change in 
 the tone of her voice; in all these particulars diff'ering 
 widely from Emma. I could not, on these accounts, 
 satisfy myself as to the reality of the mesmeric state. 
 The young woman said, that she had formerly been 
 in the same state as Emma, but had passed beyond 
 it ; and, from subsequent experience I think this may 
 be correct. She told me that she had been taken by 
 several London physicians to examine the internal 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 97 
 
 organs of patients by the faculty of clairvoyance; but 
 when I saw her^ her powers seemed to be confined to 
 reading books with large prints with the eyes ban- 
 daged. I tried the experiment several times^ but 
 never felt satisfied with the result^ as, from the posi- 
 tion in which she held the book, the time occupied in 
 the endeavour, and the occasional wriggling, I could 
 never be certain that she did not see under the band- 
 ages. At other times, I was certainly much surprised 
 at the readiness she evinced in describing a book I 
 held in my hand. On the whole, I concluded that 
 her possession of the faculty of clairvoyance, was, to 
 say the least, doubtful. Since the first edition of this 
 work was issued, I have several times heard of this 
 young woman, and have been assured by parties on 
 whom I can fully rely, that she has, in their presence, 
 exhibited undoubted clairvoyance, when every pre- 
 caution was taken to prevent deception. The phe- 
 nomena, at the time first named, were quite new to 
 me j and probably I erred like others, in wanting the 
 clairvoyante to exhibit her powers according to my 
 own pre-conceived opinion of what she ought to do, 
 provided she possessed the faculty, rather than let her 
 take her own way. 
 
 But it speedily occurred to me, that if this young 
 woman could see in the manner she stated, perhaps 
 Emma could see in the same manner. At all events, 
 I had the most positive assurance, that in her the 
 mesmeric state was genuine, and that the power of 
 external vision was wholly suspended, while in the 
 " sleep^^j moreover, the up-turned and in-drawn eyes, 
 and closed eyelids, were suflBcient to prevent her see- 
 ing, even if there had been no efifect produced on the 
 optic nerve, and the sense of hearing seemed alone 
 to connect her consciously with the external world. 
 One evening I determined to try her. But at this 
 period she was ignorant even of the letters of the 
 alphabet, and even now, I am sorry to say, her pro- 
 gress in learning to read, is but little. Pictorial 
 representations were therefore chosen for the test, as 
 
 5 
 
98 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 being a universal language^ understood alike both by 
 the learned and unlearned. I took a school book 
 belonging to my daughter^ which contained various 
 wood-cuts^ and opening it at one^ I placed it in her 
 hand, saying, ^^Emma, what is this picture?'^ She 
 took the book, and, as if by instinct, placed it open 
 over her forehead and upper part of the cranium, with- 
 out the least attempt to look at it in the ordinary 
 way, and said almost directly, " Oh yes, it is a 
 naughty boy catching flies at the window, and his 
 mother is looking at him/^ This was the subject of 
 the picture and the story annexed : there was a figure 
 of a boy at a window, and another figure of a female 
 standing in the room observing him. I felt most ex- 
 ceedingly surprised and astonished at the correctness 
 of the description, being assured that she could not 
 see it by any ordinary use of the eye, or, in fact, by the 
 eye at all. This experiment was repeated with many 
 diff'erent pictures, and always with the same result : 
 coloured pictures were also tried, and it was found 
 that she knew the diff'erent colours accurately; but on 
 no occasion did she attempt to use the eye, — she in- 
 variably placed it over her head. 
 
 It was now thought, that as mesmerism evidently 
 rested on a psychological basis, and that a manifest 
 connection was discoverable between the mind of the 
 mesmeriser and the mesmerised subject; she might 
 see these pictures somehow by reflection from my 
 memory, or because I knew the subject, and not from 
 any independent power of vision or perception. To 
 test this, I desired my daughter to select the pictures, 
 and then to put them into my hand, without telling 
 me the subject, or letting me see them. This was 
 repeatedly done, and the pictures as accurately de- 
 scribed as when I knew the subject. Still it was 
 thought that my giving her the pictures might have 
 some effect upon her, as they passed through the 
 hands of the operator; others, therefore, gave her 
 them, or she was allowed to select them herself from 
 a number given to her, or to turn over the pages of a 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 99 
 
 book^ until she found a cut, and to describe the sub- 
 ject before any one else had looked at it. It was 
 found that these arrangements made no difiPerence, 
 and it became evident, that whatever was the power ^ 
 or wherever was the seat of vision, it was her own, and 
 independent of any one else. But there is little 
 doubt, that much of what is called clairvoyance, is in 
 reality, a reflection of the memories, or active ideas of 
 persons in mesmeric connection with the reputed 
 clairvoyant subject. And, even in the best cases, this 
 reflection is possible, and may often interfere with 
 real independent perception, as the clairvoyant, unless 
 in a very interior or lucid state, cannot distinguish 
 between the two classes of ideas. The knowledge of 
 this fact, has led me to be particularly careful to 
 guard against this source of error, and to caution all 
 enquirers against being too sanguine, in their expecta- 
 tions of the truth of clairvoyant revealments. 
 
 Similar experiments to those just related were suc- 
 cessfully performed, in private, before a select com- 
 pany, and also before large public audiences, and this 
 too, with her eyes covered with plaisters, and a band- 
 age tied over them. Not that the plaisters or band- 
 ages made any diO'erence, but they were used for 
 the sake of convincing sceptical people. At this time, 
 in ascertaining the subject of a picture, she first passed 
 the tips of the fingers of the right hand gently over it. 
 (the left hand did not seem to possess the same power,) 
 and then placed it over that part of the head marked 
 on phrenological busts, as the organ of imitation. 
 If a book with prints on the pages was given her, she 
 would pass her right fingers gently over the page, and 
 if it was merely reading, or a blank, she w^ould say, 
 " It is nothing.^^ But when she had thus found out 
 the situation of the print, she would exclaim, ^^ Oh 
 yes! here it is,^^ or, "Fve got it.^^ But whether the 
 print was a wood-cut or a copper-plate, did not seem 
 to make any difference. This diff'ercnce in the powers 
 of the right hand and the left, wdll subsequently be 
 seen to depend on the coui^se of the current of the 
 
 5* 
 
100 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 vital electric aura; but of these currents I was then 
 ignorant. 
 
 A very curious phenomenon was now observed. Pic- 
 tures of things^ did not appear to her as pictures^ but 
 as the things represented. So that the picture of a rose 
 would convey as vivid and real an idea to her sensorium^ 
 as the rose itself would do, to an individual in the ordi- 
 nary state. Hence it was found, that if a picture of 
 thistles, teazels, or other prickly plants, or of bees, was 
 given into her hand, the moment the tips of her right 
 fingers came into contact with the picture, she would 
 exclaim that she was pricked or stung, and throw the 
 picture from her, with much violence and passion ! 
 Evidently proving, that the representations of things 
 were to her real; and also suggesting, that she had a 
 perception of the form of the objects, before placing 
 the picture on her head. These experiments were 
 performed many times, both publicly and privately; 
 and from her invariable use of the tips of the right 
 fingers, it was supposed that there existed some un- 
 known but remarkable affinity between the senses of 
 touch and sight. The subsequent discovery of the 
 vital electrical current, has explained the use of the 
 right fingers in these experiments ; and the develop- 
 ment of a higher degree of lucidity, has enabled her 
 to correct the first impressions of the image-forming 
 faculty. But the narrative of the earlier developments 
 and ideas is preserved, to shew the gradual awaken- 
 ing of the internal perceptions ; and as affbrding pre- 
 sumptive evidence, that the internal, or spiritual, fa- 
 culties of man, are gradually developed, and require 
 cultivation by use, as well as the common external 
 faculties. 
 
 By the commencement of 1848, her power of inter- 
 nal sight had become so far developed, or she had be- 
 come so far familiarized with her new faculty, that it 
 was evident, from many things observed, that she 
 could see such things as her mind was directed to, 
 without any contact. As an experiment, small pic- 
 tures, and various small objects, were placed singly. 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 101 
 
 first in a card box^ and afterwards in a wooden box ; 
 these she^ at times^ told as readily^ as when out of the 
 box and in her hands. At other times^ much difficulty- 
 was experienced in satisfactorily determining that she 
 could see them; indeed, it would seem^ that, notwith- 
 standing her lucidity on other occasions, she could not 
 at all times see objects thus placed. Of course, the 
 only evidence of her seeing things, or having a percep- 
 tion of them, was from her describing them. But, 
 when in the internal state, her manner was to describe 
 things as they appeared to her in that state, and ac- 
 cording to the development of the internal percepjtion, 
 which was then quite infantile, and even now, far 
 from what may be considered as an adult state. Hence, 
 she would seldom call things by their accustomed 
 name, and sometimes refused to do so, when the 
 name was suggested to her. At other times, after 
 giving her curious description, she would end by add- 
 ing the common name of the object. As an instance, 
 the following may be given: — At the second public 
 lecture at the Temperance Hall, Bolton, on the 9th of 
 March, 1848, a gentleman in front of the platform, 
 suggested that a picture, from among others lying on 
 the floor, should be put into a box and given to her ; 
 she had then been bandaged over the eyes for some 
 time. A print of a cat was selected, and put into a 
 card box : she put the box over her head, felt it care- 
 fully with her right fingers, and then, having by a smile 
 and ejaculation evinced that she saw the contents, she 
 began, — ^^ It is a thing; it is a dark thing; it has four 
 legs, a tail, a head, and two eyes; things round its 
 mouth; and it sits by the fire, and says, mew; and it's 
 a cat.^^ At other times, it was almost impossible to 
 understand from her description the object meant; 
 but when seen, the reason of her description could be 
 perceived. 
 
 These experiments with boxes led to much annoy- 
 ance. Too frequently almost every one in a company 
 would be urging her to describe the hidden contents 
 of their packages, in which things were concealed 
 
u 
 
 102 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 under every kind of distortion and mixture, in order 
 to increase the difficulty of the trial ; and supposing 
 it was by common vision the things were to be seen, 
 it was expected that at once she should describe the 
 contents of these packages, and in common language. 
 No wonder that her temper became ruffled by these 
 procedures, and that she refused to look at them. 
 Besides, as since observed, the activity of clairvoyant, 
 or lucid vision, powerfully affects the nervous system, 
 and hence, quickly fatigues; so that after even a 
 moderate sitting, the subject is unfitted for any trial 
 that requires mental efi'ort. On these accounts, I 
 discontinued all such experiments, as of no practical 
 value, being generally required to gratify mere idle 
 curiosity. ^ That she possessed the power of perceiving 
 objects through opaque substances, was sufficiently 
 evident, as she frequently described persons in another 
 room, and said what they were doing, and this would 
 sometimes occur when her attention had not been di- 
 rected to the inquiry. At other times she has, unex- 
 pectedly and unasked, told individuals what they had 
 in their pockets, or what sort of food was contained in 
 their stomachs. This often aflPorded matter for amusing 
 experiments, and has been witnessed by many respect- 
 able persons in the neighbourhood. 
 
 One cause of difficulty in obtaining clear descriptioiis 
 of the things to which her attention was directed, and 
 sometimes, even in getting her to notice them, was 
 very early perceivable. In the exalted condition of 
 mesmerism, her mind was peculiarly susceptible of 
 impressions from the minds of surrounding persons ; 
 hence, when environed by a knot of sceptics, as was 
 sometimes the case, their mental influence, uncon- 
 sciously to themselves, would seriously impede her 
 powers, and then, the feeling that something was pre- 
 venting the usual development of her faculty of per- 
 ception, caused irritation and obstinacy. At the period 
 alluded to, when Emma was asked — ^^ How she saw 
 things ?^^ she would reply, that ^^ glasses' ' suddenly 
 came to her,, and also, that she saw everything in light 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 103 
 
 through these ^^ glasses/^ and the situation of these 
 glasses^ she always referred to the locality of the 
 organs of imitation. When this doubting^ opposing 
 influence was brought to bear upon her^ she would 
 exclaim^ ^^They are darkening my glasses;'^ or, ^^They 
 have taken away my glasses. ^^ At this time, I fre- 
 quently found, that by making passes from the upper 
 part of the head, across the organs of imitation down- 
 wards to the sides of the head, I could produce and 
 increase the clairvoyant power, which she would evince 
 by exclaiming, ^^Oh, it^s so light now;^^ while, by making 
 longitudinal passes, from the vertex, over the forehead, 
 and down to the face, the sight could be immediately 
 closed, and she would be placed in a state of darkness. 
 Sometimes she would say, that there were -kittle 
 glasses^^ at the tips of her right fingers. 
 
 This reference to glasses, as well as other remarks 
 she was in the habit of making, shews that the recol- 
 lections of the normal state influenced her language, 
 and most probably originated the ideas she possessed. 
 In the first instance, she was not conscious of the 
 change that mesmerism had induced upon her, and 
 this often led to amusing and interesting exhibitions. 
 Now she is aware of it, but seems unable to describe 
 the nature of the change. She invariably calls it 
 ^^ being warmed^^ or, ^^I am warm now.^^ When she 
 wishes to be demesmerised, she says, ^^Have me.^^ 
 Repeatedly I have asked, — ^^ What do you mean by 
 having you V^ But I have not yet succeeded in getting 
 any other reply than ^^ Having me/^ ^^Ha^dng me alL^^ 
 She cannot comprehend, or describe her state, but 
 being conscious that a change has passed over her, and 
 that she is to do something in the nature of an experi- 
 ment, or feat, she feels something of the timidity 
 which would be felt by a performer in the normal 
 state. Hence, experiments, which in the earlier stages 
 were easily performed, are now accomplished with 
 greater difficulty. And I have no doubt, but that this 
 feeling has been the cause of the failure of some of 
 the experiments with boxes and closed packages, inas- 
 
104 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 much as the recollection of the impossibility of seeing 
 through opaque substances in the normal state^ has 
 induced a fear, which has, in a great measure, de- 
 stroyed her lucidity. The fact, that it would be 
 equally impossible to see objects with the eyelids 
 closed, and placed over the head, in her manner of 
 looking at them, does not seem to occur to her. 
 
 In another respect, her increased lucidity has ren- 
 dered her less manageable as a subject for experiment, 
 while it has demonstrated powers which before lay 
 dormant. She has observed the upward passes by 
 which she has been demesmerised, and also the passes 
 by which her' limbs have been made cataleptic, or her 
 mouth closed, &c., and has discovered that she can her- 
 self neutralize these passes. If her arm is made rigid, 
 she will blow upon it, and make upward passes with 
 the other hand and arm, and by that means set her 
 arm at liberty. If both hands are fastened, she will 
 release them by continual blowing; but if neither 
 arm is at liberty, and the mouth is closed, she cannot 
 extricate herself. When she has gone spontaneously 
 mesmerised, or becomes impatient at my not demes- 
 merizing her as soon as she requires it, she will de- 
 mesmerise herself with upward passes, with both hands 
 over her face and forehead, and this she calls, ^^ Hav- 
 ing herself J' This is one, among other proofs, that 
 there are vital currents passing along the nerves, and 
 that they possess a sort of polarity, which is changed 
 by mesmerism. She has not yet evinced any idea of 
 increasing her lucidity ; nor do the cross passes, re- 
 ferred to above, appear to have any effect on her 
 powers now. If the organs of individuality, eventu- 
 ality, form, or colour, are touched, she feels the influ- 
 ence, but says it makes no difference to her power of 
 seeing. This leads me to conclude, that the state- 
 ments often made, of imparting clairvoyant powers to 
 subjects by touching various organs, and afterwards 
 giving them the power to recollect what has transpired 
 in the mesmeric sittings, are in some degree deceptive, 
 and that such subjects only display the results of 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 105 
 
 phreno-mesmeric, or imaginative^ action; and^ in 
 some cases, were never in the state of true mesmeric 
 coma. Whether Emma is demesmerised by me or 
 herself, all that has passed is alike a blank to her. 
 
 The faculty by which the various experiments above 
 recited were performed^ I have called lucidity ; re- 
 stricting the term clairvoyance to the perception of 
 distant things or persons. For a long time after 
 Emma had exhibited the most distinct lucidity, with 
 respect to objects placed near to her, no trace could be 
 found of clairvoyance^ in the sense just mentioned. 
 I tried to bring out this faculty by thinking intently 
 of some object well known to me, at a distance, and 
 then desiring her to look at it, but found her unable 
 to do so. Once I asked her about St. PauFs Church, 
 in London ; she told me she could see it : I desired 
 her to describe it, but could see no resemblance, in 
 her description, to that well-known building. Upon 
 inquiry, I found it was St. Paulas, Birmingham, that 
 she meant, and that church she had frequently seen 
 dui'ing the time she lived in that town. The first time 
 I discovered any manifestation of distant clairvoyance, 
 was in the case of some near relatives in London. 
 She described minutely the dress and appearance of 
 these parties, their occupation at a certain time, and 
 other particulars, which were subsequently found to 
 be correct. 
 
 The following experiment was interesting, as afford- 
 ing some clue to the mode by which distant objects 
 were perceived, and clearly shewing the possibility of 
 a clairvoyant^s being able to perceive the active senti- 
 ments or ideas of the mind of a distant individual. I 
 had directed Emma^s attention to a female relative in 
 London ; she speedily found her, and began to de- 
 scribe her residence, etc. ; but suddenly her attention 
 ceased to be directed to my relative, and she became 
 engrossed with the description of a magnificent resi- 
 dence, with its elegant and costly furniture ; a lady 
 lying in a superb bed; a beautifully dressed baby; well 
 dressed ladies in and about the room, and another 
 
 5** 
 
106 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 room in which were older children^ also beautifully 
 dressed, and attended by ladies. From many replies 
 to my inquiries,, I considered that the only place to 
 which her impassioned descriptions could refer, was 
 Buckingham Palace, for the accouchment of the Queen 
 had then recently occurred. I therefore said, with a 
 view of ascertaining the correctness of my conjecture, 
 — *^ Do you see any soldiers there V^ ^^ Yes,^^ she re- 
 plied, ^^ there are soldiers at the door.^^ I then saw 
 that my conjecture might be correct; but why she 
 should have spontaneously gone there, without any re- 
 quest or desire on my part, or the most remote idea of 
 making royalty the subject of experiment, was a mys- 
 tery. But after I had informed my relative of the 
 occurrence, I obtained the clue to this seemingly mys- 
 terious transition from one subject to another ; for I 
 was informed that she had been thinking of the inter- 
 esting circumstances in which the Queen was then 
 placed, and also of the curious faculty of my Bolton 
 clairvoyante, and felt desirous to know whether Emma 
 had the power to visit and describe the interior of the 
 palace at that time. The cause, therefore, of Emma^s 
 unexpected visit to royalty was this : my relative had 
 wished her to go there ; when brought into mesmeric 
 connection with her, the active sentiment of her mind 
 wascommunicated to Emma's mind, and by thismeans, 
 her attention was unconsciously directed to the royal 
 residence. But there was further confirmation that 
 this was the true cause, and also, of the possibility of 
 a mesmerised subject receiving impressions from the 
 mind of the party to whom their attention is directed, 
 notwithstanding they may be personally many miles 
 from each other ; for when I knew from my relative's 
 letter what had been the subject of her thoughts, I 
 put Emma into the mesmeric state, and asked her, — 
 ^^ How and why she went to see the Queen ?'' She 
 
 directly replied, — ^^ L took me.'' ^^ But how did 
 
 you get in, if there were soldiers at the door ?" The 
 answer was curious : ^^ Oh, I jumped over the soldiers, 
 but L could not jump over them, and, therefore, 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. * 107 
 
 she could not get in/^ The reader will here observe 
 an instance of the dream-like incongruity which at- 
 tends most clairvoyant perceptions ; as Emma mistook 
 the communication of an idea, for an actual accompany- 
 ing of the party, by whom the idea had been commu- 
 nicated. And the facility of her entrance, notwith- 
 standing the guards, appeared to her as jumping over 
 them. 
 
 At this time^ whenever sent on these distant excur- 
 sions, she exhibited great fatigue and excitement; 
 panting for breath, and suffering from violent action 
 of the heart. When asked. Why she panted so ? she 
 would say, — " Fve gone so fast f' and^ ^^ It is such a 
 way V^ She would also, sometimes, take my right 
 hand, and place it on her bosom, and that seemed to put 
 her into connection with the persons sought, and ap- 
 peared to help her: and, if the hand was removed, 
 she would say, ^^ They are gone away now.^^ As her 
 state kept changing, the nervous prostration, attend- 
 ing this sort of inquiry, increased. For it appeared, 
 as if her mind partially left her body, to ffo to the 
 place sought; and thus, another , and further, inver- 
 sion of state took place. From these distant places, 
 the mind seemed to come fully back, so as to replace 
 her in the ordinary mesmeric state. But this coming 
 back was attended with so much prostration, and such 
 alarming palpitation of the heart, that, had I not dis- 
 covered a mode to obviate it, I must have altogether 
 discontinued such experiments. I now mention the 
 circumstance, to shew the various states she has 
 passed through, and as a warning and guide for 
 future experimenters. When Emma was asked the 
 reason for this violent action of the heart, she said, 
 that, when the mind was thus drawn away, the ^^ mag- 
 netic fluid,^^ as she called the vital aura, was drawn 
 from the body, and was merely connected with the 
 heart and the brain ; and that, if a person was kept 
 too long in this state, it would leave the heart and 
 brain also, and they would '^ shell/' — her phrase for 
 dying. The great excitement, and palpitation, was 
 
108 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 caused^ she said^ by the " fluid^^ rushing from the 
 heart into its accustomed channels. I had^ at this 
 time^ no means of communicating with her when 
 away ; for hearing, as well as sight and feeling, was 
 now withdrawn; and she evinced not the slightest 
 consciousness if loud, or sudden, noises, were made 
 close to her ears. This want of connection was at- 
 tended with great inconvenience ; inasmuch, as no 
 question could be put to her, or explanation sought, 
 until, by the re-inversion of her state, she came, as it 
 were, back again, to the first clairvoyant, or merely 
 lucid state ; and, every time this re-inversion occur- 
 red, it was attended with the palpitation and excite- 
 ment already mentioned. Frequently, interesting 
 parts of a communication were left in a half-told 
 state, and necessary questions omitted to be put, be- 
 cause of the danger incurred in sending her away, 
 more than once at a sitting. 
 
 About this time, I read of some foreign somnam- 
 buies, as they are generally called, having a perception 
 of hearing, &c., through the great plexus of organic 
 nerves, near the stomach. I, therefore, applied one 
 end of a tube to this region, and spoke through the 
 other end. To my surprise, I found that Emma could 
 hear my voice, but had not the least idea whose voice it 
 was. It must be recollected, that, by frequent expe- 
 riment, on my part, and on the part of others, it had 
 been satisfactorily ascertained, that the ordinary sense 
 of hearing was wanting, or paralysed, when, by this 
 second inversion, Emma was sent away. Here, then, 
 was a most curious physiological circumstance, quite 
 unlooked for. But it was also curious, psychologically: 
 for, when Emma came back to her first state, she 
 spoke of voices coming to her, but could not tell how, or 
 in what manner, they came, or hardly be persuaded 
 that it was my voice. The phenomenon of ancient 
 seers receiving communication by voices heard, at 
 once recurred to my mind, and here appeared an 
 illustration of it. The sound was not conveyed to the 
 ordinary organ ol hearing; indeed, hearing, in the or- 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. 109 
 
 dinary sense^ no longer remained ; but it was conveyed 
 to the sensorium by a more internal way : and it ap- 
 peared^ as if a sufficient impression, upon the internal 
 organism of a seer, in his seer, or trance, state, would 
 convey the impression of audible sound, although 
 perfectly imperceptible to ordinary hearing. 
 
 Many experiments were made, to ascertain the 
 nature, or law, of this mode of hearing; but all Emma 
 could say was, that the voices appeared to her to 
 come from her heart. After a few days^ trial, 1 was 
 obliged to discontinue this method of communication, 
 because the suddenness of it, caused some fright and 
 palpitation of the heart, and seemed, also, to shake 
 the whole spinal column ; so that, when fully awake, 
 she complained for some time of the effects, although 
 ignorant of the cause. Once, when away, she held 
 out her right hand, as if by instinct ; and I tried the 
 experiment, of speaking to the tips of the fingers; and 
 I found she heard me as long as her finger was re- 
 tained in connection with my moist lips ; but, the 
 instant the connection was broken, she ceased to hear. 
 The analogy to galvanic communication was here 
 strikingly perceptible. On some occasions it was 
 found, that she could thus hear the voice of other 
 parties, by forming a chain with each others^ hands, 
 and then a connection with her hand and the lips of 
 one of the party. It is by this means of speaking to 
 her hand, while pressed closely to my lips, that I now 
 communicate with her when away; and she noio knows 
 my voice, or that of other persons, who may speak to 
 her in this way. 
 
 A curious physiological experiment may be here 
 mentioned, as illustrating the cause of Emma^s hear- 
 ing by the hand, when away ; and as also proving, 
 that some influence, or current, proceeds from her 
 when in the mesmeric state, which is not observable 
 in the normal state. One day, while she was in the 
 mesmeric state, the cat jumped on her lap. Emma^s 
 large philoprogenitiveness leads her to be fond of 
 small animals; and, by her lucidity, perceiving the 
 
110 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 animal^ she began to caress it^ by stroking it with 
 her right hand on its head. The cat instantly began 
 to evince signs of fear or pain, and to cry in a peculiar 
 half piteous, half savage, tone. She observed it, and said 
 it was because she was ^^warm^^^ — her term, as I have al- 
 ready observed,for being in the mesmeric state; and that 
 the ^ Varm fluid,^^ or ^^magnetic fluid,^^ from her hands, 
 affected its ^^ pappy-stuff ^'^ or brain, and would make 
 it mad if she continued. I was much struck with this 
 circumstance, and repeatedly tried it with other cats 
 and kittens, but, generally, with some trouble; as, 
 when she saw the effect produced, she could hardly be 
 persuaded to place her right hand on the cat^s head ; 
 and I had some fears of hurting her, as the animals 
 always became savage, and endeavoured to bite. A 
 gentleman who was present on one of these occasions, 
 very justly remarked, that the cat could not deceive 
 us ; and, that there could be no doubt, that some pe- 
 culiar influence emanated from her hand. For some 
 time, it did not occur to me to try the experiment 
 with the cat, when Emma was away, but when I 
 did so, I found that her right hand could be laid on 
 the cat^s head, without producing any observable re- 
 sult ; but that as soon as she was come back into the 
 first state, the cat cried, and struggled, as usual. 
 Here was an evidence of the change, or inversion, of 
 the currents; proving that the direction was/rom her 
 right hand, when in the first lucid state, but reversed 
 when she was, by further inversion, sent away ; and 
 the reason why Emma used her right hand to assist 
 her perceptions, while in the lucid state, was now 
 evident, inasmuch, hsfrom that hand, the lucid stream * 
 issued forth, by^ which she perceived objects, though, 
 generally, it emanated more powerfully, from the upper 
 part of the cranium. This course of the currents was 
 further proved, by more lately observing, that when 
 away, the left hand affected a cat similarly to the right 
 hand in the first state. The experiment has not been 
 tried with dogs; partly from Emma's fear of hurting the 
 animals, and my fear lest she should^ be bitten, or 
 
MESMERIC EXPERIENCE. Ill 
 
 injured : and it is possible, that the well-known elec- 
 trical properties of the cat, may render that animal 
 peculiarly susceptible of her influence. Such ex- 
 periments are of great importance in these enquiries; 
 as they are open to every one's observation, and de- 
 pend in no degree on her feelings, or imagination, 
 and cannot be simulated. I have now tried them so 
 often, and have also seen them occur so frequently, 
 when a kitten has jumped on her lap, and she has, 
 from habit, and forgetting her condition, put her right 
 hand on its head, that there can be no doubt of the 
 physiological fact. 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 SUCCESSFUL CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 Besides the power of seeing objects, the situation of 
 which were known to myself, or others, Emma fre- 
 quently sought out, and told me where missing articles 
 were to be found. This was done chiefly as a test of 
 her powers, and was confined to occurrences within 
 my own dwelling ; and were such as to satisfy me, 
 that, when in her best lucid states, she could perceive, 
 and point out, the situation of articles, when unknown 
 both to herself, myself, and others. But I did not 
 venture to try her powers beyond my own residence. 
 However, an opportunity for doing this, on a wider 
 field, arose quite unexpectedly. 
 
 Mr. Henry Wood, a very respectable tea dealer and 
 grocer, carrying on his business in Cheapside, Bolton, 
 nearly opposite my then residence, had the misfortune, 
 on the evening of December 20th, 1848, to have his 
 cash-box, with its contents, stolen from his counting- 
 house. He applied to the police, and took other pre- 
 cautionary steps, with a view of discovering and ar- 
 resting the thief or thieves. But he had no clue to 
 the thief, although, he told me, he suspected an iiidi- 
 vidual, who was afterwards proved to be completely 
 innocent. It then occurred to him, to apply to me, 
 to assist him to recover his property; or, at least, to 
 know how it was stolen. I had not then permitted 
 any public notice of my experiments, and they were 
 chiefly known to a few persons in Bolton and Man- 
 chester, who felt interested in the inquiry. The 
 reason why Mr. Wood applied to me was as follows : 
 About two or three months previously, a commercial 
 gentleman, from Manchester, who did business with 
 Mr. Wood, had called at my house, and introduced a 
 gentleman, from Newcastle-upon-Tyne, who then had 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 113 
 
 a daughter seriously ill. Emma described the state 
 of this lady^ I understood^ very accurately, and also 
 the house and neighbourhood in which she lived, 
 much to the surprise of both gentlemen. The com- 
 mercial gentleman called on Mr. Wood the same day, 
 in the regular course of his business, and told him 
 how much he had been surprised and interested, in 
 what he had seen in my house. This circumstance 
 recurred to Mr. Wood^s mind, when in a state of 
 anxiety for his loss, and induced him to send for me. 
 I went over directly, it then being nearly eleven 
 o'clock, expecting to find a patient, for he had not 
 said why he wanted to see me. I found him and his 
 shopmen and servants all standing about, in a state of 
 consternation, and wondered what could be the mat- 
 ter ; but on going up stairs with Mr. Wood privately, 
 he told me of his loss, and requested me to assist him. 
 I felt considerable hesitation in employing Emma^s 
 powers for such a purpose ; fearing, that both the 
 motive^ and the agencyy might be grossly misrepre- 
 sented. But the amount at stake, the opportunity 
 for an interesting and novel experiment, and Mr. 
 Wood being also a neighbour, induced me to comply 
 with his request, and make the trial, without, how- 
 ever, giving him any hopes of success. I had that 
 day been to Manchester, mesmerising a patient, and 
 was in an unfit state to mesmerise Emma, as I before 
 had, under similar circumstances, communicated 
 much pain to her; besides, she had retired to bed. 
 I could not, for these reasons, try that night, but ap- 
 pointed nine o^ clock the next morning for the trial. 
 At that hour, Mr. Wood came over to my house. 
 Having no clue to the thief, or anything to form a 
 medium of connection, I thought it best to put Mr. 
 Wood into mesmeric connection with her, and then 
 to direct her attention to the cash-box, and see 
 whether this chain would lead her to the thief or 
 thieves. I did so ; and then told her that Mr. Wood 
 had lost his cash- box, and that I wished her to tell us, 
 if she could, where the box was taken from, ivhat was 
 
114 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 in it, and who took it ? She remained silent for a 
 few minutes : evidently, mentally seeking what she 
 had been requested to discover. Presently she began 
 to talk with an imaginary personage, as if present in 
 the room with us ; but, as it subsequently proved, she 
 was mentally with him, and he was both real and visu 
 hie to her. She had, in fact, discovered the thief, 
 and was conversing with him on the impropriety of 
 his conduct, and the great anxiety he had caused to 
 Mr. Wood and his servants ; whom, she said, had not 
 been able to sleep, on account of the robbery. In 
 the course of this apparent conversation, and after- 
 wards to us, she described where the box was placed, 
 what the general nature of its contents was, particu- 
 larizing some documents it contained, Mr. Wood said, 
 very accurately ; how he took it, and that he did not 
 take it away at once, but hid it up an entry ; and she 
 then pointed out the direction in which this person 
 lived, and, also, where the box then was. Her de- 
 scriptions were so vivid, that Mr. Wood recognized in 
 them a person the last to be suspected. To be as- 
 sured, many questions were now put to her ; among 
 which, — Was there any name-plate on the door she 
 saw ? She replied, yes ; and made the shape of the 
 letters on her hand, but reversed. This was the 
 name of the person to whom her description pointed. 
 Mr. Wood said, that he now felt satisfied that he 
 had discovered the delinquent. I recommended him 
 to put it into the hands of our superintendent of po- 
 lice j but he said, that he thought he could do with- 
 out that, and that, for several reasons, he should prefer 
 trying his ownmethodfirst. He, therefore, went directly 
 to the house Emma had pointed out, by the name on 
 the door-plate; found the suspected party, and brought 
 him to my house, telling him why he wished him to 
 accompany him, and that, if he refused to go, he 
 should at once employ the police. When brought 
 into my presence, I did not recognize him from 
 Emma^s description, on account of his dress being so 
 different. Emma was again put in the mesmeric 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 115 
 
 state, and repeated^ in the man^s presence^ her state- 
 ments to us ; and^ apparently, took no notice of his 
 bodily presence. I, therefore, called him forward, 
 and put his hand into Emma^s hand. She instantly 
 started back convulsively, as if he had been a serpent, 
 — evincing great fear, and clinging to me. She told 
 him, among other things, that he was a bad man, 
 that he did take the box, and that he had not then 
 the same clothes on as when he took the box. This 
 was the fact, for he was then in a working- dress, — 
 but, on the evening previous, had been dressed in 
 his better clothes. 
 
 This was quite a scene : the man looked pale and anxi- 
 ous, and bit his lips, but denied still most strenuously 
 all knowledge of the robbery, and professed a great 
 desire to assist Mr. Wood, in discovering the thief. 
 Mr. Wood was agitated, and seemed much more af- 
 fected than the delinquent, and the clairvoyante kept 
 convulsively clinging to me for protection. Mr. Wood 
 took the young man away, and put him into the safe- 
 keeping of some of his servants, and then fetched the 
 parents and told them the whole particulars, and 
 stated, that for their sakes he would not prosecute if 
 the young man would confess, and the box was re- 
 stored j if not, he should certainly do so. They saw 
 how strongly suspicious the case was, and urged him, 
 if guilty, to confess, and save them from the exposure 
 of a prosecution; but it was not until late in the 
 afternoon that he did so, when he fully acknowledged 
 the truth of all Emma^s statements. 
 
 This young man was well known to Mr. Wood, 
 and was also intimate with a young man then in Mr. 
 Wood^s employ. He was in the habit of coming to 
 Mr. Wood^s of an evening, and had been there on the 
 night in question, and stayed somewhat later than 
 usual. One window of Mr. Wood's house is in 
 Cheapside, the other in Ashburner Street, — being a 
 corner house. While the porter was putting up the 
 shutters, he seized the opportunity to take the box 
 from a shelf on which it stood, and to pass unob- 
 
116 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 served out of the Ashburner street door, and to put 
 the box on some steps in an entry between Mr. 
 Wood^s house and the next house. When he left to 
 go home, he did not turn to the right towards the 
 entry for the box, but, as Emma said, went apparent- 
 ly in the direction of his home ; but in reality made a 
 round through several streets, and came back to Ash- 
 burner street again, and found the box still up the 
 entry, where he had placed it. He took it home un- 
 known to his friends, and the next morning, before it 
 was fully light, he took it to a public building to 
 which he had access, not far from his father^s house, 
 and then forced the box open, and left it, and there 
 it was found in that condition. By 10 o^clock Mr. 
 Wood had him most unexpectedly in custody, so that 
 he had no opportunity for further concealing or des- 
 troying the box and its contents, and this I conclude 
 was the chief reason for his ultimate confession. He 
 must have been fully aware, that if Emma could so 
 accurately trace his doings, she would point out the 
 place of concealment, which was in the exact direc- 
 tion which she stated; and it was intended, when 
 dark, to have put her again in the mesmeric state, 
 and got her to lead us to the spot. This, the confes- 
 sion rendered unnecessary. 
 
 A somewhat fuller narrative of this circumstance is 
 now given, than in the first edition, in order to place 
 the facts in a clearer light ; and because some parties, 
 from a determined spirit of scepticism, have endea- 
 voured to throw doubts on Mr. Wood^s veracity. In 
 this case, the delinquent was brought into my pre- 
 sence ; I both saw and heard Emma directly charge 
 him with the theft ; and sometime afterwards, 1 re- 
 ceived a letter from the young man, acknowledging 
 and regretting his offence, and stating that he trusted 
 it would be a warning to him for his future life, at 
 the same time begging that I would not divulge his 
 name. This I have not done, and my object in this 
 and similar instances, has not been to pabHsh narratives 
 of crime or carelessness, but simply to give undeniable 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 117 
 
 and remarkable cases^ proving the existence of the 
 faculty of clairvoyance. After I had heard of the 
 confession, and restoration of the box, I put Emma 
 into the mesmeric state, and got her again, privately, 
 to tell me the particulars; and I then observed to 
 her, that she did not seem to notice the young man^s 
 being nearer to her, when in the room, than before 
 he came. Her answer was very curious, psychologi- 
 cally ; '^ He was no nearer to me then, than before.^^ 
 On another occasion she told me that had I formed 
 the connection between him and her left-hand, she 
 should not have been so much affected. This hap- 
 pened when a suspected party was, unknowingly to 
 both myself and Emma, brought into her presence. 
 When I put them into connection, the same convul- 
 sive shrinking and fear was evinced. In this latter 
 case, there was no direct legal proof of guilt, and 
 seeing the injury it was doing to Emma, I at once 
 stopped the enquiry, especially as I did not wish to 
 be called upon to give any opinion of the transaction, 
 and all the parties were highly respectable. 
 
 The next case to which I shall refer has obtained 
 a wide-spread notoriety, and on that account, but 
 chiefly on account of the respectability of the parties 
 concerned, and the thorough sifting the evidence has 
 undergone, is of much interest. I give it from the 
 report in the Bolton Chronicle, of September 8th, 
 1849, which, with the exception of the first para- 
 graph, I drew up. This report was partially copied 
 into a Liverpool Paper, and from the Liverpool Paper, 
 into the ^^Times^^ newspaper, and from thence went 
 the round of the press. ^' Interesting case of 
 Clairvoyance. Recovery of £650. Having heard 
 various rumours in the town to the effect that a large 
 sum of monev had been recovered throu^fh the instru- 
 mentality of clairvoyance, we were induced to make 
 some enquiries : and the result is, that according to 
 the testimony of several of the parties concerned, the 
 following is a correct narrative of the circumstances: — 
 
 " On Saturday, July 14th, (1849,) a letter was re- 
 
118 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 ceived by Messrs. P. R. Arrowsmith and Co.; of this 
 town^ from Bradford^ Yorkshire^ containing a Bank 
 of England note for £500^ another for £50, and a bill 
 of exchange for jglOO. These, Mr. Arrowsmith 
 handed over in his regular mode of business, to Mr. 
 WiUiam Lomax, his cashier, who took or sent, as he 
 supposed, the whole to the Bank of Bolton, and made 
 an entry accordingly in his cash-book. The bank- 
 book was then at the bank, so that no memorandum 
 of the payment was received or expected. After the 
 expiration of about five weeks, upon comparing the 
 bank-book with the cash-book, it was found that no 
 entry for these sums was in the bank-book. Enquiry 
 was then made at the bank, but nothing was known 
 of the money, nor was there any entry existing in any 
 book or paper there ; and, after searching, no trace 
 could be found of the missing money. In fact, the 
 parties at the bank denied ever having received the 
 sum, or knowing any thing of the transaction. Be- 
 fore the discovery of the loss the bill had become due; 
 but upon enquiry, after the loss was discovered, it was 
 found that it had not been presented for payment. 
 It was therefore concluded, that as the notes and bill 
 could not be found at the bank, nor any trace or entry 
 connected with them, the probability was, that they 
 were lost or stolen, and that the bill had been de- 
 stroyed to prevent detection. Mr. Lomax had a dis- 
 tinct recollection of having received the notes, &c., 
 from Mr. Arrowsmith ; but from the length of time 
 that had elapsed when the loss was discovered, he 
 could not remember what he had done with them — 
 whether he had taken them to the bank, or sent them 
 by the accustomed messenger: nor could the messen- 
 ger recollect any thing about them. 
 
 ^^ As might be expected, this unaccountable loss, 
 occasioned great anxiety to Mr. Lomax, and in this 
 emergency he applied to a friend, to whom the dis- 
 covery of Mr. Wood^s cash-box was known, to ascer- 
 tain the probability of the notes being found by the 
 aid of clairvoyance. The friend replied, that he saw 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 119 
 
 no greater difficulty in the case than in Wood^s^ and 
 recommended him to make the enquiry: which he 
 said he would do, if only for his own satisfaction. 
 After some further consideration it was determined 
 to ask Mr. Haddock, of Cheapside, to make the en- 
 quiry, but not to inform him of any particulars of 
 what the letter contained. Mr. Haddock was ac- 
 cordingly applied to ; and from his knowledge of the 
 respectability of the parties, he consented to make 
 the experiment. 
 
 " On Friday, Aug. 24th, Mr. Lomax, accompanied 
 by Mr. F. Jones, of Ashburner-street, Bolton, (the 
 friend above alluded to,) called on Mr. Haddock for 
 this purpose. The clairvoyant was put into the 
 psychic state, and then into connection with Mr. 
 Lomax. She directly asked for ^ the papers/ Tae^n- 
 ing the letter in which the notes and bill were en- 
 closed ; but this Mr. Lomax did not happen to have 
 in his possession, and she said she could not tell any 
 thing without it. This sitting was, therefore, so far 
 useless. The next day Mr. Lomax brought the letter, 
 and Mr. Haddock requested that the contents might 
 not be communicated to him, lest it should be sup- 
 posed that he had suggested any thing to her. After 
 considerable thought and examination, the clairvoyante 
 said, that there had been three different papers for 
 money in that letter, not post-office orders, but papers 
 that came out of a place where people kept money in 
 [a bank), and were to be taken to another place of a 
 similar kind. That these papers came in the letter to 
 another gentleman (Mr. Arrowsmith), who gave them 
 to the one present (Mr. Lomax), who put them in a 
 paper, and then put them in a red book that wi^apped 
 round (a pocket-book). Mr. Lomax then, to the siu'- 
 prise of Mr. Haddock, pulled from his coat pocket, a 
 deep red pocket book, made just as she had described 
 it, and said that was the book in which he was in the 
 habit of placing similar papers. 
 
 " Mr. Haddock thought she was wrong as to the 
 number of papers, for he conceived that the letter 
 
120 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 contained a clieque ; but the clairvoyant persisted in 
 saying tliat there were three papers^ two of which 
 were of the same kiud^ and of the same sort of paper^ 
 but one more valuable than the other^ and the third 
 on different paper with a stamp on it. Mr. H. 
 somewhat baffled and irritated her by his enquiries in 
 this respect^ and by his not crediting her statements^ 
 but thinking she was in error^ and this tended to ob- 
 scure her meaning. Mr. Lomax now said that the 
 clairvoyante was right ; that the letter contained two 
 Bank of England notes^ and a bill of exchange^ but 
 he did not say what was the value of the notes. Mr. 
 H. then put a ten pound Bank of England note into 
 the clairvoyante^s hand ; she said that two of the 
 papers were like that^ but more valuable^ and (in 
 answer to a question) that the black and white word 
 at the corner was longer. She further said, that 
 these notes^ &c.^ were taken to a place where money 
 was kept^ (a bankj down there, (pointing towards 
 Deansgate, the site of the Bank of Bolton). Be- 
 yond this, no further enquiry was made at that sit- 
 ting. 
 
 '"^ In the evening, Mr. Arrowsmith called with Mr. 
 Makant, of Gilnow Croft, Mr. Lomax, and Mr. F. 
 Jones, to finish the enquiry. But in the interim, 
 the clairvoyante had unexpectedly become (spontane- 
 ously) mesmerised, and a letter from Scotland ha^dng 
 some reference to cholera, being put into her hands, 
 she went in quest of a cholera patient, whose case she 
 said had proved fatal. She was much interested in 
 this case ; said how it might have been cured ; and 
 spoke of her examination of the corpse. The en- 
 quiries, however, made such an impression on the 
 organic system of nerves, that, notwithstanding pre- 
 cautions were taken, she soon manifested symptoms 
 of cholera after she awaked; which became so urgent, 
 that strong measures were required to subdue them. 
 She was, therefore, too ill for any further enquiry, and 
 the gentlemen retired without witnessing any further 
 experiment. Mr. Arrowsmith left the sealed letter, 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 121 
 
 to be used when she was again fit for the enquiry, but 
 no further use was made of it till Monday. 
 
 ^^ On that day_, Mr. Lomax called again. The clair- 
 voyante was now well, and she went over the case 
 again, entering more minutely into particulars. She 
 persisted in her former statements, that she could see 
 the ^ marks ' of the notes in the red pocket-book, and 
 could see them in the banking-house, that they were 
 in paper, and put, along with many more papers, in a 
 private part of the bank ; that they were taken by a 
 man at the bank, who put them aside, without making 
 any entry or taking any further notice of them. She 
 said, that the people at the bank did not mean to do 
 wrong, but that it arose from the want of due atten- 
 tion. Upon its being stated, that she might be 
 wrong, and requesting her to look elsewhere, she 
 said, that it was of no use ; that she could see they 
 were in the bank, and nowhere else ; that she could 
 not say anything else, without saying what was not 
 true; and that if search was made at the bank, where 
 she said, they would be found. In the evening, Mr. 
 Arrowsmith, Mr. Makant, and Mr. Jones, came 
 again, and she was again mesmerised, and again re- 
 peated these particulars in their presence. 
 
 '^ Mr. Haddock then said to Mr. Arrowsmith, that 
 he w^as tolerably confident the clairvoyante was right; 
 and that he should recommend him, to go next day to 
 the bank, and insist on a further search ; stating, that 
 he felt convinced, from inquiries he had made, that 
 his cashier had brought the money there. Mr. Ma- 
 kant, also, urged the same course on Mr. Arrow- 
 smith. 
 
 ^^ The following morning, Tuesday, August 28th, 
 Mr. Arrowsmith went to the bank, and insisted on a 
 further search. He was told, that after such a search 
 as had been made, it was useless ; but that, to satisfy 
 him, it should be made again. Mr. Arrowsmith left 
 for Manchester ; and, after his departure, a further 
 search was made, and among a lot of papers, in an 
 inner room at the bank, which were not likelv to 
 
 6 
 
122 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 have been meddled with again^ probably^ for years^ or 
 which might never have been noticed again, were 
 found the notes and billy wrapped in a paper ^ just as 
 the clairvoyante had described themP 
 
 The publication of the above, caused considerable 
 sensation in the neighbourhood, where all the parties 
 were so well known, and the main facts so well au- 
 thenticated. An attempt was made, in a Manchester 
 newspaper, evidently under the influence of some par- 
 ties connected with the bank, to throw discredit on 
 the statements, and to prove that clairvoyance had 
 nothing to do with the discovery ; but these remarks 
 were ably refuted by the Bolton correspondent of the 
 ^^ Manchester Guardian,^^ who observed, that whatever 
 might be thought of the theory ^ the facts were unde^ 
 niable. An insinuation was thrown out, that, by its 
 being said, Emma asked for ^^ the paper s,^^ it was evi- 
 dent that something was told about those papers; 
 but not a word was said to her on the subject ; in- 
 deed, I did not myself know that more than one paper 
 was contained in the letter, until Mr. Lomax said that 
 Emma was right in saying there were three. The rea- 
 son of her asking for the papers, the reader will see 
 further on, p. 129, and will there find, that the hand- 
 writing of persons was the usual medium for putting 
 her upon an inquiry. In this newspaper it was stated, 
 that the bank was in the habit of receiving two copies 
 of a Banker^s Circular ; that one had been opened, 
 and that, it was supposed, the envelope, containing 
 Mr. Arrowsmith^s money, must have been taken for 
 the other, and put aside unopened ; and that, on the 
 day in question, it was found, with other unopened 
 papers, on the mantelpiece, in the manager's private- 
 room. How the mistake arose formed no part of the 
 inquiry; the object was, to ascertain where the money 
 was to be found, and, according to their statement, it 
 was found just as Emma had described it the day before. 
 Her own words were, — ^^ I cannot tell you any more 
 than I have ; the notes are in a paper, among other 
 papers, in the little room, (or back room, I cannot 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 123 
 
 exactly recollect wliich^) at the bank, and that if she 
 could read, she would tell us what the other papers 
 were/^ This is what induced me to urge Mr. Arrow- 
 smith to insist on a further search : but, for obvious 
 reasons, I requested him not to mention the clairvoy- 
 ance. There was no intention to injure any one at 
 the bank; and, lest any unpleasant feeling should 
 arise, a great deal that the clairvoyante said, of the 
 person who took the money, &c., was suppressed, al- 
 though strikingly characteristic and amusing. I never 
 was in the bank ; but I was told that Emma^s descrip- 
 tion of the parties there was very correct. A highly 
 respectable gentleman, well known in Bolton, un- 
 known to me, wrote to all the parties concerned, and 
 obtained from them a written attestation of what each 
 knew. These documents he kindly shewed me ; and 
 he observed, that, upon the strictest inquiry, he found 
 that the published report was really understated. 
 This, for the reasons above stated, was the case. The 
 only difference I could find in his papers and my pri- 
 vate notes, was in the date of one of the sittings. 
 But, as he obtained his information from the parties, 
 a few weeks afterwards, and I made notes directly 
 after the transaction, I incline to think my date cor- 
 rect. Mr. Lomax thought Emma must be in error, 
 in saying that he left the money at the bank, as it 
 turned out, they were enclosed in an envelope, as she 
 said ; but, as he had no recollection of what he did 
 with them, nor could the messenger recollect whether 
 he had been sent, it is very likely that Emma was 
 right in every particular. Mr. Lomax told me, that 
 when Emma said, they had taken the money at the 
 bank, but made no entry ^ he thought she must then 
 be wrong ; but here, also, she was right ; and it is not 
 improbable that the mistake may have occiu-rcd in 
 the way stated in the Manchester paper. Mr. Arrow- 
 smith assured me, that he met one of the bank autho- 
 rities before arriving at the bank, on the very day of 
 the discovery, and was again told that further search 
 was useless, and that they could not have taken the 
 
124 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 money in without having some entry of it : and it 
 was solely the clairvoyant revealment which induced 
 him to go and request further search. Mr. Arrow- 
 smith does not enter into the theory y or psychology y 
 of the case^ but he is satisfied of the facts. 
 
 It is sometimes amusing to read the objections of 
 sceptics^ who are^ generally, profoundly ignorant of 
 mesmeric phenomena. Thus, in the ^^ Lancet/^ I 
 saw a quotation from a country newspaper, in which 
 a writer observes, that in all such reports as those 
 just narrated, there is always something that discloses 
 the fraud, &c., and this he fancies he has discovered 
 in the ^^ Chronicle^^ report. The clairvoyante, he 
 says, stated that ^^the people at the bank did not 
 mean to do wrong,^' thus pretending to know the in- 
 tentions, which was an attribute belonging to God 
 only, &c. I am quoting from memory, and am not 
 sure of the exact words, but they were to the above 
 efi'ect. Now, a very limited acquaintance with the 
 higher mesmeric phenomena, would convince any one, 
 that a general perception of character is one of the 
 most common characteristics of really clairvoyant 
 subjects. Parties have repeatedly expressed their 
 surprise, at hearing the general character of persons 
 known to them, but unknown both to myself and 
 Emma, so correctly delineated by her. 
 
 The following singular case is similar to several 
 more that have occurred. About the beginning of 
 October, 1849, Mr. Horrocks, innkeeper, Bradshaw- 
 gate, Bolton, introduced to me two country-looking 
 persons, whom I at first supposed were his personal 
 friends. But it appeared that they were strangers, 
 just arrived in the town, seeking assistance from 
 clairvoyance, and that they had entered the Shake- 
 speare Inn, Mr. Horrocks^ house, quite accidentally, 
 and stated their business, and asked if the discovery 
 of the £650 was true, and where the writer was to be 
 found ? Mr. Horrocks told them it was generally con- 
 sidered true in Bolton, and afterwards brought them 
 up to my house. I found the female was a widow. 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 125 
 
 having a farm in the north-western part of Yorkshire^ 
 about twenty miles from the Low Gill Station, on the 
 Lancaster and Carlisle Railway, from which station 
 they came ; and her companion was a neighbouring 
 farmer, who had accompanied her, to render her any 
 necessary assistance. I was then informed, that the 
 widow had received £40 for wool sold; the money 
 consisted of eight £5 notes of the Settle or Craven 
 Bank, and these she had put into a purse, and placed, 
 for safety, under some clothes, in a drawer, in a spare 
 bedroom. About six weeks before coming to me, the 
 money had been stolen from the drawer, but nothing 
 else was taken, nor were the clothes disturbed. The 
 poor woman felt her loss greatly, but had no clue to the 
 thief. A travelling Scotchman occasionally slept at the 
 farmhouse, when business brought him that way, and 
 he had slept in this room some little time before the 
 loss was discovered ; and it was surmised that he 
 might have taken the money, but there was no e\i- 
 dence that he had, or that he knew of the money 
 being in the drawer. The local newspapers contained 
 an account of the recovery of Mr. ArrowsmitVs money; 
 and the perusal of this, led the farmer to persuade his 
 neighbour to go to Bolton. Had they have written 
 to me, I should have dissuaded them ; as, for reasons 
 presently to be stated, I had ceased trying any ex- 
 periments in cases of loss or robbery; but, as they 
 were very urgent in requesting me to try this case, 
 and had travelled nearly a hundred miles for the pur- 
 pose, I consented. 
 
 In the evening the trial was made. I put the 
 widow into connection with Emma, similar to the 
 proceeding in Mr. Wood^s case, and told her that 
 some money had been lost, and we wanted to know, 
 where it teas taken from, and loho took it ? Slie was 
 soon mentally present at the farm; and, being fond of 
 country scenery, &c., she appeared to enjoy the trip 
 much. She began to speak of the hilly country^ the 
 sheep, the cows, &c., as though she was among them, 
 and some of the cows she actually described, and, I 
 
126 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 was told, very accurately. She then went on to the 
 robbery. She said where the money had been put, 
 stated the kind of clothes in the drawers, and said 
 they were not rumpled ; discovered what the money 
 had been received for, and entered into a curious sort 
 of conversation with the sheep, telling them, that they 
 had better have kept the wool on their backs ; she 
 then described, very correctly, the person who had 
 bought the wool, and from whom the money was re- 
 ceived ] and, at last, came to the thief. She described 
 his personal appearance, and what appeared to be his 
 occupation; and said, that he knew all about the 
 farmhouse, and then described how he got into the 
 room, and took the money. After going on for some 
 time, the farmer began to recognize the robber, from 
 Emma^s descriptions, and said to the widow, it is so- 
 and-so, mentioning a name. She thought not. He 
 desired me to ask Emma, If the man, she saw, had 
 any hair under his chin? "Yes; fuzzy stuff J^ was the 
 reply. He now felt more assured, and many more 
 questions were put, — as to. Whether he was married ? 
 — What his wife did ? — What were his occupations, 
 &c. The answers to which all tended to shew that 
 the farmer was right in his conjecture. The widow 
 then said, that the man who answered to Emma^s de- 
 scription, occasionally worked for her; that she was 
 about employing him the next week, and that his wife 
 was in the habit of charing for her. The farmer said, 
 he perfectly understood Emma^s account of the way 
 the man entered the room ; there was a low lean-to 
 building just under the window, through which any 
 one might enter ; in fact, it had been common to get 
 into the room that way ; and that the room window 
 was not fastened, no one thinking of the houses being 
 robbed in those parts. Emma further said, that 
 the man felt, at times, sorry for what he had 
 done ; that he had been thinking of putting the money 
 back again; but, still, had not done so; that he had 
 sometimes concealed it on his person, and in other 
 places, which she mentioned. The sitting that even- 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 127 
 
 ing occupied about an hour and a half; and, by way 
 of further trial, another inquiry was made the follow- 
 ing morning, but nothing more was elicited. 
 
 The widow now said, that she would go to the man 
 whom Emma had pointed out, upon her return home, 
 and endeavour to recover her money. She said this 
 man lived about a mile from her residence : that she 
 knew him well ; and that she thought she could per- 
 suade or frighten him to restore the notes. I ex- 
 pressed great doubts of this, as, if the real delinquent 
 had been pointed out, it was so easy for him to remove 
 all proof of his guilt, by burning, or otherwise de- 
 stroying the notes and purse. She, however, felt con- 
 fident of succeeding, if it was the right person ; but, 
 she said if she did not, she had been so much surprised 
 and interested in Emma^s clear description of all the 
 circumstances as far as she knew them, that she should 
 not regret the expense and trouble of her journey. 
 I heard nothing further of the transaction, until 
 October 31st, when I received a letter, dated from the 
 village, on October 27th, and bearing the Settle post- 
 mark of October 30th, of which the following is a 
 verbatim copy. I suppress the names, as when the 
 parties were in Bolton, the widow expressed some fear 
 of her enquiry being known in the wild district in 
 which she lived. ^^To Mr. Haddock. Sir, — accord- 
 ing to promise, when Mrs and I were at your 
 
 place, you wished me to let you know the result of 
 the matter ; we arrived at home on the same day we 
 
 left you ; — on the foUomng, Mrs went to where 
 
 the person resided according to the clairvoyante^s re- 
 presentation, who met the matter in the greatest degree 
 of incivility — but, however, ^\\e faced the matter up to 
 that degree of positive assurance, withoid any doubt 
 whatever, that the next morning it was thrown into 
 the same room from whence it was taken, through a 
 small crevice in the window, the whole sum and purse 
 just as it was taken, — which is certainly a most for- 
 tunate return of loss for the poor woman. She wishes 
 to be kindly remembered to the clairvoyantc, and 
 
128 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 shall consider herself greatly indebted to her for the 
 assistance given in the case. Begging both our best 
 respects to you^ as well as for all civility received at 
 your house. And should ever any case of a similar 
 description occur to either of us^ we shall undoubtedly 
 make application to you for her assistance for recovery. 
 I am^ dear sir, yours most respectfully, Henry ^^ 
 
 There is no legal proof, that the man pointed out by 
 the clairvoyante actually took the money; but there 
 can be no reasonable doubt of her correctness, when 
 all the circumstances of the case are considered. Had 
 the money been in gold, it could easily have been paid 
 away, or exchanged, without risk of detection; but 
 local notes, in the possession of such a person espe- 
 cially, were scarcely negotiable without great risk. 
 Hence, probably, the determination to restore them, 
 rather than destroy them. And we may charitably 
 hope, that a repentant feeling acted in unison with 
 the fear of detection. To be qj;iite sure, that I had 
 not been in any way imposed upon, I sent a letter, 
 after the lapse of a twelvemonth, by post to the 
 widow, addressed to the village, and received from her 
 an answer corroborating exactly the above letter. 
 She said the purse was found upon the floor, very 
 near the drawers from which it had been taken. 
 
 As above intimated, I had several similar cases; 
 one where the clairvoyante told the exact sum in 
 pieces of gold in the missing purse, and said the party 
 who took it had become alarmed, and had concealed 
 the purse, but that one piece of money had been ab- 
 stracted : and eventually the purse was discovered in 
 such a place as she had described, and one piece short. 
 Here the collateral evidence was so strong, that the 
 suspected party was accused; and while denying the 
 theft, admitted that every thing else the clairvoyante 
 said was true. In making these sort of inquiries, my 
 principal object was to test Emma^s powers, and not 
 to meddle with matters more properly belonging to 
 the Police. Hence, when I found parties divulging 
 the information they had received, before they had 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 129 
 
 obtained the necessary legal proofs I thought it 
 prudent to decline all such experiments. It appeared 
 to me^ that in robberies by practised thieves, where 
 the stolen articles quickly change hands, there would 
 be little chance of either proving or disproving Emma's 
 statements. Besides, as she does not know the per^ 
 sons or places she mentally sees, (unless previously 
 known to her in the wakeful state), her descriptions 
 would be of no practical use, except where the delin- 
 quent could be fully recognized from her statements, 
 and was not a common, or practised thief. There 
 was also a probability of misunderstanding her de- 
 scriptions, and thence a liability to accuse an innocent 
 party; and this is what I most particularly endea- 
 voured to guard against. Besides, Emma began to 
 feel great alarm, lest thieves or their associates, should 
 waylay her, and do her some serious injury. That 
 the fear of detection by means of clairvoyance, had an 
 influence on some dishonest persons, I had an oppor- 
 tunity of knowing. On one occasion, a person, a few 
 miles from Bolton, had lost some property or money, 
 and from the circumstances of the loss, suspected that 
 some one in his employ was the thief, but had no clue 
 to any particular individual. He stated to all in his 
 employ, his intention of going to Bolton to ascertain 
 the delinquent, and came to me with a note of intro- 
 duction from a respectable inhabitant of Bolton ; but, 
 for the reasons above stated, I did not make the en- 
 quiry. Some time after, the gentleman who intro- 
 duced him, told me, that on going home he found his 
 property restored, 
 
 Emma has frequently been directed to find persons 
 in distant parts of the globe, and, whenever it could 
 be done, the hand-writing, or something else belong- 
 ing to these individuals, was given her to form the 
 medium of connection. The reason of my using the 
 hand-writing for this purpose is as follows. On the 
 4th of August, 1848, a gentleman of Bolton brought 
 a letter written by a lady, the wife of a physician in 
 Gloucestershire. This ladv had heard of other clair- 
 
 6** 
 
130 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 voyants describing the diseases of distant people^ by- 
 using their hand- writing as a medium of connection: 
 and she M^as desirous of ascertaining whether Emma 
 could see and describe her state. Emma put the letter 
 over her head^ as she used to do with the pictures, and 
 carefully felt it with her right fingers, and then said, 
 ^^it was a lady^s up and down strokes^^ — her phrase at 
 that period for writing. She described the lady, as 
 to her personal appearance, accurately; even to a 
 small blemish occasioned by an accident; the internal 
 organs of the body ; an affection of the spine under 
 which she was labouring; the situation and appearance 
 of the place where she resided, and many more par- 
 ticulars. The accuracy of her descriptions was ad- 
 mitted by the doctor, and, subsequently, I had an 
 opportunity personally to verify some of the state- 
 ments. The envelope was directed by the doctor; 
 him she described correctly, both as to his personal 
 character, general pursuits, and literary tendencies. 
 This was an entirely new experiment, and finding the 
 result so unexpected and striking, it led to many 
 more, some of which were more remarkablce Once, 
 some ladies from Manchester, gave her the hand- 
 writing of a clergyman, at Archangel, in Russia. 
 She described the individual correctly, as to his per- 
 sonal appearance, and little peculiarities, and her 
 remarks as to the climate and season were correct. 
 The writing was taken from her, and the writing of 
 another gentleman in Australia was given to her ; she 
 was soon mentally there, described the climate and 
 season, and expressed her surprise at finding the sea- 
 sons reversed, when compared with England, having 
 no knowledge of the effect of latitude and longitude 
 in altering season and time. She appeared to have 
 got to a great sheep farm, and her remarks were very 
 homely, but very graphic. Nothing was said to her 
 of the localities or employments of the writers. At 
 another time, a letter written by a gentleman at Cairo, 
 was put into her hand. She soon said it was written 
 by a gentleman, which she had no means of knowing 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 131 
 
 by her normal knowledge^ and she described him^ as 
 to the condition of his healthy and the place where he 
 was residing, together with the climate, and appearance 
 of the people there, even to the peculiar veil worn by 
 the Egyptian ladies, at which she expressed great sur- 
 prise. The correctness of her statement, as to the 
 gentleman^s health, that is, of a severe illness under 
 which he had been labouring, was ascertained from a 
 subsequent letter, and further particulars on the gen- 
 tleman^s arrival in England. But of this, as well as 
 many more similar cases, no notes were taken, so that 
 much corroborative evidence has been lost ; besides, 
 but few opportunities occur for proving the correct- 
 ness of the details in these distant enquiries. Only 
 one such case had occurred when the first edition of 
 this work went to press. It was as follows. 
 
 A young man sailed from Liverpool for New York. 
 His parents immediately afterwards remitted him a 
 sum of money by the mail-steamer; but they were 
 subsequently informed that he had not applied for it, 
 nor had anything been heard of him, although the 
 ship in which he sailed had long arrived. In a state 
 of anxiety the young man^s mother came twenty miles 
 to Bolton, to see whether, by Emma^s means, she 
 could learn any thing of him. After a little time, 
 Emma found him ; described his appearance correctly, 
 and entered into so many details, as to induce his 
 mother to rely upon her statements, and to request 
 me to make enquiries at intervals of about a fortnight. 
 I did so, and traced him by her means to several 
 places, and the information thus acquired, I trans- 
 mitted to the parents. On the 24th of January, 
 1849, I received a note from the young man's father, 
 informing me that a letter had arrived from his son, 
 and that ^^it was a most striking confirmation of 
 Emma^s testimony from first to last/^ Since then the 
 young man has returned to England ; and when the 
 details were mentioned to him, he said he could dis- 
 tinctly recollect some, while others he did not remem- 
 ber. Atthe first interview, Emma said that the young 
 
132 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 man and two others whom he knew, and, if I recollect 
 aright, went out with him, were amusing themselves 
 by weighing themselves. This little incident, he said, 
 he distinctly remembered. Emma also, by some 
 means, got to know very nearly the name of the place 
 where he was residing. She said it was Vill, or PhiL 
 something. I thought of Philadelphia, not knowing 
 that the family had been to America, and to the older 
 eastern states, and his mother never mentioned it 
 until after her son^s return. But, it appeared, he had 
 made at once for this part, and resided the most of 
 the time at Centreville, in Connecticut, I believe. 
 
 The case now about to be narrated, is one of the 
 best attested cases I have had; and, perhaps, psycho- 
 logically, the most interesting of its kind. In June, 
 1849, Mr. George Toulmin, the conductor of the 
 ^^ Bolton Chronicle,^' expressed to me a wish to be a 
 witness of a clairvoyant experiment; and said, that 
 he had by him, a letter received from an uncle who 
 had gone to California. I at once consented to his 
 wish ; and observed to him, that I thought such a let- 
 ter would form a medium for an interesting sitting. 
 Unknown to me, Mr. Toulmin made notes of this, and 
 of two subsequent sittings, at which he was present, 
 and printed them, at the expense of Mrs. Willey. 
 These printed notes, a few copies of which have been 
 preserved, now remain in evidence of Emma^s clair- 
 voyant powers. I will first literally transcribe them, 
 and afterwards make such remarks as will be neces- 
 sary to enable the reader fully to understand the 
 case. 
 
 " Some notes of three interviews with Emma, the 
 clairvoyantC; at Mr. Haddock^s, Cheapside, Bolton. — 
 Interview 1st. June 26th. — This day I saw Mr. 
 Haddock, and remarked to him, that I should like to 
 put ^ Emma^s^ powers to a trial; and that I had some 
 writing in my possession, particulars about the writer 
 of which I was anxious to obtain. I rather think I 
 said he had gone to California. Mr. Haddock re- 
 marked, that I had better not say anything more to 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMExNTS. 133 
 
 him^ but come up in the evening between six and 
 seven ; he would not make any communication to her 
 on the subject^ but let me present the letter^ and 
 watch the result. When I got there^ Mr. H. said he 
 did not think Emma would be in a very good state that 
 night ; she had not been very well; was about to visit 
 her father in a week or two; was very busy in conse- 
 quence; and; as he wished to send her home well^ and 
 in good humour^ he should not like her to remain long 
 in the mesmeric state. Mr. H. then introduced me 
 to Emma, who expressed a wish that she should not be 
 kept long mesmerised; and seemed^ in fact, somewhat 
 unwilling to submit to it at all. Mr. H. promised she 
 should not be detained more than half an hour, when 
 she reluctantly consented. Mr. H. having produced 
 the requisite state, I gave Emma an envelope, con- 
 taining an address, in the handwriting of Mr. Joseph 
 Willey, of [Mersey Terrace,] Seacombe; who sailed 
 from Southampton, on board the ^ Thames,^ for Cali- 
 fornia, via Panama. Mr. Haddock said, it was wished 
 to be known where the writer of that was ? and what 
 he was then doing? Emma opened the envelope, found 
 the side on which the direction was written, placed it 
 on the upper part of her forehead, and remained in 
 that position, without speaking, for, probably, ten mi- 
 nutes. At length she said, — ^O, I have found you 
 at last. Why, I have been seeking you where the 
 oranges grow ; what a long way you have come.^ (I 
 may here remark, that it is often difficult to gain a 
 proper idea of what the girl meant to convey ; first, 
 because she appeared to be holding an imaginary con- 
 versation with some one, we, of course, only hearing 
 her remarks ; so that what had been said to her, we 
 had to guess by what she said in reply. Then, in addi- 
 tion to many mispronounciations of words, she often 
 lisps, so that you hear only half a word; and her com- 
 mand of language is so limited, that even ^vhen sj 
 appears to be labouring, at the risk of her HfQ ^^ ^ ^ 
 birth to an idea, she fails to satisfy either IjcrseJf ^^ 
 you, whatever she may do to the party with \\\ ^^ 
 
134 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 she is_, or affects to be^ conversing.) [Much of this 
 peculiarity has now passed away. — J. W. H.] She 
 proceeded : ^ What a nice place this is ! What ; you 
 don^t think so ? You must be a queer man not to 
 like it. O, some things you like^ and some you don^t.^ 
 Emma then described the route taken to arrive where 
 they were. I am not sure I caught her meaning 
 exactly. She said^ the writer had to go in a ^ wooden 
 house^ (a ship) a very long way in this direction (wav- 
 ing her hand from right to left, at an angle of about 
 forty or forty-five degrees.) That he then turned a 
 
 little, describing it thus. She occupied some time 
 
 in describing the difficulties of this short distance. 
 The pith of her remarks was^ that she could not under- 
 stand how they managed to get on, as the water was 
 flowing strongly against them, and the vessel, or boat, 
 was only impelled by men ^ putting sticks^ (oars) out 
 of the side. After landing, she complained of its being 
 very warm ; and, I think, gave some vague description 
 of the town, which, however, I have forgotten. She 
 said, the people were very sulky-looking. She re- 
 marked (speaking of Mr. Willey), ^ Really, you are a 
 very pleasant man ; you are one of the best natured 
 men I ever met with. You laugh so pleasantly one 
 would think you were not more than thirty, though I 
 know you are much more. Fll go further with you.* 
 Several times, after sitting a short time, as if listening, 
 Emma broke out into a hearty laugh, and made such 
 remarks as, — ^What a joking man you are — good 
 humoured — pleasant, &c. :^ and she seemed exceed- 
 ingly pleased with his company. From her observa- 
 tions, it appeared, that the writer again embarked in 
 a ^wooden-house,' but of a different kind to that which 
 he had been in before ; for there appeared to be men 
 climbing up masts (she did not speak of them as 
 ^raasts,^ but so described them, as shewed us what 
 she meant). She entered into a lengthy expostulation 
 with the writer, in consequence of his going up the 
 masts; could not comprehend how he could stand 
 without danger of falling; was sure he need not do it: 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 135 
 
 and recommended him to let the others go up instead; 
 she inquired if they had hands in their feet ; and 
 pursued these remarks to a somewhat absurd length. 
 
 ^^ In a while^ Emma became greatly excited^ moved 
 from side to side in her chair^ and seemed to have 
 met with something that fdled her with astonishment, 
 not unmixed with fear or dread. She then said, 
 ' What kind of a place are we at now ? What wicked 
 looking people ? She would not stop among such a 
 set of folks on any account. ^ Why, they will think 
 nothing at all, when you are asleep, of coming and 
 cutting your head off, and killing you !^ (She re- 
 peated that statement several times.) Presently she 
 exclaimed, — ^Eh! whatever are they doing? Scraping 
 sand together, I declare. What ! and have you come 
 all this way to get sand ? Why, you may get plenty 
 at New Brighton and Lytham, without any trouble.'' 
 She could not (at first) see any difference betAveen 
 that sand and the sand at New Brighton. It was 
 heavier. (Emma then affected to take up a handful 
 of sand at New Brighton, and another at the place 
 where she was discoursing; she held her hands for 
 some time, as if there was something hea^y in the 
 one, and light in the other ; allowing them to vibrate 
 in the manner usually done when persons are com- 
 paring the weight of two articles in their hands ; the 
 New Brighton handful moving briskly, the other with 
 apparent effort.) ^ Yes, it was heavier. That hand- 
 fiil was worth fifty dolls. ? What-'s dolls. ? I never 
 heard the word before; say it again, and speak it 
 plainer. Fifty dollies ? (dollars.) What's a dolly; is 
 it one of those things we fling up and play with ? Ill 
 ask Mr. Haddock, when I go back, what a dolly is.-' 
 A good deal more was said ; she described the inha- 
 bitants as being all colours; the worst looking set of 
 folks she ever saw ; the ^ buildings,' wooden boards 
 loosely put together ; and also the manner in which 
 they separated the sparkling particles from other por- 
 tions of the sand. She said, the writer of the direc- 
 tion was well, quite fresh-looking, but the colour in 
 
136 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 his face was not equally divided^ some parts being 
 much redder than others. She had great difficulty in 
 describing the colour of his hair (wishing to be exact), 
 and, at last, took up a piece of cotton print, and 
 picked out a stripe of colour, which, she said, was some- 
 thing like it, but not exactly ; and, I think, she was 
 pretty correct. She inquired of him, ^ Why he kept 
 rubbing his arm in that manner?^ He was making 
 her arm ache, and she began, with her left hand, to rub 
 her right arm, from the shoulder downwards. Mr. 
 Haddock had to make a number of passes to take the 
 pain away. She said, the writer had not yet got any 
 of the sand ; which she never spoke of as containing 
 gold, although she described the colour of the spark- 
 ling particles in such a way as left the inference pro- 
 bable. Ultimately, she warmly shook the writer by 
 the hand (as if present with him), promising to come 
 again and see him in a short time. 
 
 ^^ Whilst Emma was pursuing this journey, she could 
 not hear anything said to her, however loudly spoken. 
 Any questions, therefore, had to be reserved until she 
 had parted with the writer, and come back again So 
 soon as she had come back, but before she was demes- 
 merised, she began to accuse Mr. H. of having 
 kept her longer than he had promised, and she insisted 
 on looking at the clock, to see how much more than 
 half an hour she had been mesmerised; she then 
 looked through the floor at the clock in the cellar^ and 
 declared that she had been kept three quarters of an 
 hour, three and half minutes ; which was exactly the 
 fact. She was very much exhausted, and seemed to 
 wish it over, so I had very little chance of putting 
 any questions to her. I may state, however, that it 
 appeared to me that she had passed through the test 
 with success. I believe she had never heard of Cali- 
 fornia at all ; had little or no knowledge of the recent 
 pother about its gold ; was not aware that the writer 
 had gone there ; and yet she succeeded, much more 
 vividly than I have been able to depict on paper, in 
 impressing us with the belief that she was on its 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 137 
 
 shores^ and describing what was actually taking place 
 there.— G. T. 
 
 '^ Interview 2d. June 29th. — After Mr. Haddock 
 had introduced us (Mrs. Willey and Mr. James Toul- 
 mm^) to Emma, she wished to know what we Avanted 
 her to do? Mr. H. informed her^ that we wished 
 her to go in search of the gentleman that she found 
 for Mr. Toulmin the other evening. She replied, 
 ^Oh, I will go to him.^ Mr. H. placed in her hands 
 Mr. Willey^s last letter ; which she laid on her fore- 
 head, and remained in silence for some minutes. 
 She then uttered a sudden exclamation of, ^ Oh dear, 
 it was a very good job that the steamer was so 
 near you. How did it happen that you fell into 
 the water ? Ah ! I understand you now, — the boat 
 went on one side, and you fell out. Poor thing ! 
 You look very ill. You have been ill. Yes ; I dare 
 ^^Jy yo^ "took cold with the wet : oh, yes : and the 
 fright together. Poor thing ! you have had a fever. 
 No : she did not come to you. No ; it was not her 
 spirit ; she is not dead. O, you thought her spirit 
 came, and wiped your face and neck, and that the 
 tears were running down her white face. No : she is 
 not dead, but you have been thinking about her, and 
 she has been thinking about you. Ah! you were un- 
 happy about your children. It was a great pity that 
 you did not send any letters lately. No ; you could 
 not wi^ite when you were in the fever ; but what was 
 the reason you did not write before ? You did write, 
 but it did not go. Poor thing ! she will be sorry 
 when she hears of your sickness. What is your 
 name ? Mog, — Morg. — No. Morgan. What a queer 
 name, I can hardly speak it.-^ (These observations 
 appeared to refer to a Mr. Morgan, who embarked in 
 the ^ Thames^ at the same time as Mr. Willey ; his 
 name had not, however, been mentioned. ]\Irs. Wil- 
 ley desired that Emma^s mind might be directed to 
 Mr. W., but it was with great difficulty that she 
 coidd be drawn away from Mr. jNIorgan.) She re- 
 mained in silence for about a minute, and then said, 
 
138 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 — ^I have come to see you again. Are you very 
 well ? O^ dear ! you have been suffering from rheu- 
 matism since I saw you/ Emma then very patheti- 
 cally described Mr. W.^s sufferings before he left 
 home ; and^ taking Mrs. W.^s hand in her own^ she 
 said^ — ^this hand has been employed — ^rub— rub — 
 rub.^ She likewise said, That he was a very good 
 gentleman : the other she did not like so well ; but 
 this was a good man ; and the people where he is 
 think he is too good, and too generous ; and they 
 think that he should not be so kind to the people. 
 She then said, — ^ You are very well now. Well, have 
 you got any of that dust yet ? O, you have got some, 
 and you seem very careful about it, and you put it in 
 a box. This is a very nice place. You shake your 
 head. It is very warm; but what queer looking folk!^ 
 She then bid him good-bye; but before Mr. H. de- 
 mesmerised her, he asked her to go back again, and 
 see what he was doing ; which she did ; and described 
 certain goods which, she said, he had taken in trade 
 there, but which he did not take from this country. 
 When asked, how Mr. Willey became possessed of 
 some of these goods; she said, Mr. W. had sold 
 some goods to a man leaving the place, and had taken 
 these instead of money. Several other things were 
 also said. 
 
 " Interview 3rd. July 9th. — The last letter from 
 Mr. Willey was presented to Emma, and she was re- 
 quested to find him, and inform us (Mrs. Willey and 
 Mr. G. and J. Toulmin,) how he was, and whether he 
 was at the same place as previously. In a short time, 
 after placing the letter on her forehead, she exclaimed, 
 — ^ O, I have come to see you again ; you have had 
 more pains in your shoulders since I last saw you. 
 Not in the same place as before. Before I go back, 
 I wish to know if you have seen that gentleman again 
 (referring to Mr. Morgan). He has not seen the other 
 
 gentleman since. (Emma was told, that Mrs. W 
 
 wished her to confine her attention to Mr. W .) 
 
 She resumed : lie seemed to be doing very well in 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 139 
 
 business. Emma then entered into some details of a 
 voyage that Mr. Willey had^ but I failed to compre- 
 hend her meaning. ^ Have you sent any letter to 
 Mrs. Willey, or have you had one from her ? You 
 had one from her. How long since ? Good while 
 since, but you do not recollect how long. When you 
 see her handwriting, you think it is her talking to you. 
 You read it over and over, and think you cannot read 
 it too much. She does so too. You are a very good 
 gentleman, and often reading the Bible, and you feel 
 what you read ; you are not one of those who read, 
 and do not do it. There is a letter coming from Mr. 
 Willey, sent off about five weeks ago. You have a 
 deal to think about : was looking after the gold dust ; 
 had got some.'^^ Emma seemed much displeased at 
 Mr. W. giving his goods for ^*^that stuff /^ and, 
 on Mr. H. remarking, that he dare say Mr. W. 
 was satisfied, she said, his were ^good goods. ^ After 
 other remarks, chiefly like the above, but in a varied 
 form, Emma shook hands with Mr. Willey, promising 
 to meet him again after her return from her native 
 place, to which she was going on the following day. 
 Before she was demesmerised, she was asked, in what 
 sort of a vessel Mr. Willey performed the voyage from 
 Panama to San Francisco ? She replied, ^ In a 
 steamer.^ It was then inquired, how long he stayed 
 at Panama? This question led to a droll exhi- 
 bition of offended dignity on the part of Emma; 
 who, to describe the length of time, counted one, 
 two, three, on the first three fingers of her left 
 hand, and when she came to the foui^th, doubled it 
 down, and then repeated the process, to signify that 
 Mr. Willey had stayed there ' seven.^ She did not 
 say whether seven hours, days, weeks, months, or 
 years ; and when Mr. H. inquired of her what 
 she meant, she became irritated, rating him soundly, 
 and saying he delighted to teazc her! An opportune 
 present of an orange, from Mrs. Willey, somewhat re- 
 stored her to good humour, when she said she meant 
 weeks, affirming that she had said so at the first. — 
 G. T.^^ 
 
140 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 Sucli^ with a few omissions, for the sake of avoiding 
 repetition, are the notes, printed at a time when there 
 was no means of ascertaining their accuracy, beyond 
 what is sometimes called mind-reading ; their subse- 
 quent full verification, gives them an interest which 
 did not then attach to them. The first sitting was 
 not longer than the subsequent ones, but reported 
 fuller. The preservation of the very language used in 
 some cases, and of Emma^s peculiarities at that period, 
 afibrds a good idea of the style, so to speak, of these in- 
 quiries, and, as such, may interest future experimen- 
 ters. In the first sitting, it will be seen, that although 
 Emma was not told where the writer of the paper had 
 gone to, there could be no doubt that her mind had 
 rightly followed him. Mr. Willey did not himself go 
 to ^^ the diggings,^^ but he did trade with the gold 
 dust, and, of course, that article would be the most 
 prominent thing in the minds of parties at San Fran- 
 cisco. Hence, no sooner had Emma entered into con- 
 nection with the mind of a trader there, then she 
 caught the idea, and went to the diggings herself; 
 and most graphically did she describe the people and 
 manners there ; especially the mode of washing the 
 sand to obtain the gold ; a proceeding of which she 
 knew nothing in the wakeful state. Her valuation of 
 the handful in dollars, a money unknown to her, 
 proves that she got the idea from parties there, just as 
 the ideas in the mind of my relative, in London, sent 
 her to the Palace. Here was a proof of direct mental 
 communion, although thousands of miles intervened ! 
 
 The second sitting is, however, psychologically , the 
 most interesting. Here this mental communion 
 comes out stronger, and unmistakeably. Not a word 
 had been said of Morgan. Neither myself nor Emma 
 knew that there was such a person in existence. And 
 yet Emma began, unasked, to speak of him, and even 
 discovered his name. I have since learnt, that in the 
 letter which she held over her head, there was a refer- 
 ence to this person, and that as both parties had gone 
 from Liverpool, they had mutually arranged that each 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 141 
 
 should mention the other in their respective letters ; 
 that in case Mr. Morgan^s letters should be lost^ Mrs. 
 Willey should be able to give Mrs. Morgan some in- 
 telligence of her husband, and vice versa. Before Mrs. 
 Willey came to me^ she had been applied to on behalf 
 of Mrs. Morgan, and hence knew that the latter had 
 not heard from her husband, at the same time that she 
 had heard from Mr. Willey; beyond this, she then 
 knew nothing. But about October, or November, 
 Mrs. Willey came again to Bolton, and called on me 
 without Mr. Toulmin. She then informed me, that 
 she had heard from Mrs Morgan, and learnt that her 
 husband had been ill with a fever, and that that was 
 the cause of his not writing to her. Here, then, was 
 the first proof that Emma^s conversation with Morgan 
 was not mere imagination. But further proof was 
 obtained. Mr. Willey began to find that Morgan^s 
 manners were not congenial to him, and, hence, he 
 informed his wife, that he should have but little inter- 
 course with him after they were settled ; and, in fact, 
 he had almost, if not quite, ceased to know anything 
 about him. But, unknown to me^ Mrs. Willey had 
 sent out, in a letter, a copy of the printed notes tran- 
 scribed above. These were received by Mr. Willey 
 at San Francisco, just on the eve of his departure for 
 England. He was so surprised that he sought out 
 Morgan, and was informed, by the man himself, that 
 he had fallen overboard, and had had a fever, and in 
 some state of delirium fancied that he saw his vrife, 
 and heard her call him^ just as Emma had said. This 
 was mentioned by Mr. Willey at a family party, on 
 his return to England, in the spring of the yeai* 
 (1850), and Mr. George Toulmin, who was one of the 
 party, informed me of this remarkable corroboration. 
 But since then I have seen Mr. Willey personally, and 
 had from his own mouth an attestation of all I had 
 heard. He said, that on the receipt of the printed 
 paper, he shewed it to Col. Allen, the American post- 
 master of San Francisco, to whom he was well known, 
 who attested some of the statements there made, as 
 
142 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 being matters of which he was cognizant. He men- 
 tioned several circumstances respecting Morgan^ which 
 were strikingly in harmony with Emma^s statements. 
 He also pointed out some especial details : — Thus, as 
 to Emma'^s expostulation with him for ascending the 
 rigging, he said he was particularly struck. Owing 
 to the concourse of persons, it was with great diffi- 
 culty a passage could be obtained from Panama ; but 
 Mr. Willey having been accustomed to a sea-faring 
 life, gave him an advantage, and on that account, he 
 got forward when many more were detained behind; 
 and he said he did once go aloft to help to furl the 
 sails, and instruct the saflors. Then, again, in cross- 
 ing the Isthmus of Darien, the boats were propelled 
 up the rapids of some river there, by men ^^ putting 
 sticks ^^ out of the side as Emma had described. The 
 rubbing of Ms arms, also, had been a daily occupation, 
 and he had traded in the way Emma had said. 
 
 I found Mr. Willey a very respectable and religious 
 man, not at all likely to be deceived or imposed upon 
 by any fanciful statements. He expressed his willing- 
 ness to corroborate the printed statements personally 
 at any time ; but that he could not engage to answer 
 letters. I found Emma^s personal description very 
 good, and was struck with the exact resemblance of 
 his hair to the colour she had pointed out. It should 
 also be stated, that Mrs. Willey did receive letters, as 
 Emma said she would. In describing Morgan^s ill- 
 ness, Emma manifested the greatest sympathy, and 
 entered into many details not recorded. I had no 
 idea of whom she was talking, but saw clearly, that if 
 it was Mr. Willey she meant, it would not at all agree 
 mth her previous statements; and I felt somewhat an- 
 noyed, as Mrs. Willey had come from Seacombe, near 
 Liverpool, to hear something about her husband, solely 
 on the report she had received of the first interview 
 with Mr. Toulmin. Whether it was the letter, in 
 which the name occurred, but which wsls folded up, and 
 even if open she could not read it, or whether it was 
 the information that Mrs. Willey had received, but 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 143 
 
 not mentioned, that put Emma on the tracks I cannot 
 say; but the state of the party soon drew forth her 
 pity and sympathy. Altogether considered, this case 
 of Morgan^ s, is, in my estimation, the most inter- 
 esting, and the most suggestive, of all the cases I 
 have witnessed. As regards the gold dust, when I 
 found Emma expressing such surprise, on her return, 
 I asked her what she saw in the dust ? She said, 
 ^^ If I were to file up sovereigns it would look like it.^^ 
 And yet she did not seem to know that it was gold, 
 until 1 told her, and she then seemed to doubt it. 
 
 Soon after the discovery of Mr. Arrowsmith^s 
 money, I had many personal applications from parties 
 anxious to discover where registers of baptisms, mar- 
 riages, or burials, could be found, which were required 
 in suits at law, or equity. I tried several, and Emma 
 appeared in some cases, to see the missing documents, 
 and described the churches, &c., where they were to 
 be found, but she could not name the locality. As 
 the use of such enquiries, would entirely depend on 
 being able to recognize the church meant, from her 
 description, and this did not seem a very easy matter, 
 I refused, after a few trials, to put such questions. 
 But, latterly, I was urgently solicited to try again, in a 
 case, that has been some time in chancery, and already 
 she has correctly pointed out three churches where the 
 desired registers were to be found. In this case we 
 got a clue to the locality, because she had been sent 
 some months before, to see a person living near one 
 of the chiu'ches, and in speaking of this particular 
 church, said it was near where this person lived. I 
 have seen the certificate of this register in the clergy- 
 man's hand-writing; and the date of the marriage 
 was June, 1746. It is probable that she may have 
 been right in other cases, if we could have discovered 
 the locality she mentally saw\ 
 
 To enumerate all the successful cases, would be 
 tiring to the reader, and would, also, be monotonous; 
 as there has been a great similarity in her mode of 
 describing persons and places. Besides, the majority 
 
144 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 have been of mere private interest^ and must liave 
 been witnessed to be appreciated. Some^ also, might 
 be referred to mind-reading. But I would by no 
 means wish the reader to suppose^ that Emma was 
 always successful. In some cases, there have been no 
 means of proving or disproving her statements : in 
 others she has apparently mixed up the past with the 
 present, and thus presented a confused and erroneous 
 picture. Sometimes imagination, or some false per- 
 ception has intruded, and led her into error, which 
 her peculiar state of vision prevented her from dis- 
 covering, or even sometimes of rectifying when pointed 
 out. Besides the errors arising from imaginative ac- 
 tion, others might arise, from her not properly com- 
 prehending what she really did see ; and again, her 
 want of adequate descriptive language, renders what 
 she says, very apt to be misunderstood, and wrongly 
 interpreted. The reader will thus see the difficulties 
 attending these enquiries, and observe the many 
 sources of error. Clairvoyance has its uses, and, un- 
 fortunately, from the enthusiasm of some parties, and 
 the knavery of others, its abuses. But it ought by 
 no means to be considered as equalling, much less of 
 superseding, the investigations and conclusions of the 
 normal rational faculty. 
 
 In concluding this chapter it may be advisable to 
 advert to the clairvoyant enquiries so frequently 
 made, to ascertain the fate of the missing expedition 
 under the command of Sir John Franklin. Owing to 
 the interest generally felt on this subject, and the 
 publicity given to some of the earlier experiments, it 
 has awakened general curiosity, and given rise to 
 expectations, some of which owe their foundation, 
 entirely to erroneous reports. Soon after the dis- 
 covery of Mr. Arrowsmith^s money, I was applied to 
 by a naval gentleman, a private friend of Sir John 
 Franklin, to know if I thought any light could be 
 thrown on the fate of his friend, by the aid of my 
 clairvoyantc. My reply, in substance was, that judg- 
 ing from past experience, I thought if I had some 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 145 
 
 writing of Sir John^s^ she could say whether he was 
 dead or aUve. My own idea then was, that the ships 
 had foundered among the dangers of Baffin^s Bay, or 
 some other portion of the Polar Seas; and that this 
 was the reason why no trace of their progress could 
 be found. When Sii^ J. C. Ross returned from Leo- 
 pold's Island, without finding any trace of the missing 
 ships even so far west^ this idea appeared to receive 
 confirmation. I had, therefore, concluded, that all 
 were lost, and that Emma would at once say that she 
 could not find the writer, and that he had ^^ shelled,^^ 
 — her phrase for dying. On the receipt of a portion 
 of an old letter or envelope, containing an address in 
 Sir John's handwriting, I tried her with it, and, to 
 my surprise, she said the writer was alive, and, soon 
 began to speak of him, and describe his situation, 
 and very graphically, for one wholly ignorant of 
 ships, navigation, or geography. She spoke of the snow, 
 ice, &c., of the place where the writer was; said that 
 many with him were dead, but that he was alive, and 
 expected to get away in about nine months, but that 
 she could not say whether he would be able to do so, 
 but that it appeared to her he would get home again. 
 This nine months would bring round the time when 
 the breaking up of the polar ice, might set the ships 
 at liberty, and so far was probable. 
 
 I communicated the result to Sir John's friend, 
 who came to Bolton to be a personal witness of what 
 she might say. We had several sittings, and it was 
 during this trial, that, at this gentleman's suggestion, 
 she was desired to ascertain the time there, which she 
 professed, by some means, to be able to do ; and, by 
 this means, we judged of the approximative longitude. 
 A small map of North America was also given her ; 
 and she put this over her head in the usual way, and 
 then placed her finger just about the group of the 
 Parry Islands, which nearly harmonised with the time 
 she gave. This excited much surprise on our parts, as 
 she knows nothing of the construction of maps, or of 
 the meaning of lon2:itude, or why there should be a 
 
 7 
 
146 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 difference of time. Indeed^ many of her remarks on 
 this last circumstance^ were highly amusing ; and - she 
 always felt the most puzzled to know why the clocks 
 should differ sOo She thought they must be very bad 
 ones. I afterwards tried her with a larger map^ and 
 with the Admiralty chart of the polar seas ; but she 
 appeared to have lost this instinctive sort of power to 
 mark the place^ and I found that no reliance could be 
 placed on her in this respect^ and she complained 
 that she could not understand maps; so that the 
 only way of fixing the locality^ was by the time. 
 
 The statements made in this gentleman^ s presence, 
 were substantially the same as before made to me. 
 What was very singular^ in going to the polar regions, 
 she appeared to go through a warm country first, and, 
 apparently to change her course two or three times. 
 The letter given her was an old one ; and from this 
 circumstance, and Sir John having previously fiUed 
 the situation of governor of Van Dieman^s Land, it 
 would seem, that she mentally followed him through 
 other climes, and former scenes, to his then situation. 
 She appeared in this, and subsequent sittings, to give 
 Sir J. C. Ross, a greater western longitude than Sir 
 John Franklin ; here she was evidently wrong; and it 
 seems that she has frequently confounded the various 
 ships connected with the expedition and the search, 
 and that hence the mistakes have arisen. She has 
 since told me, that all the ships seem to come be- 
 fore her. Not long before the arrival of Sir J. C. 
 Ross, she said, quite spontaneously, while talking, as 
 was supposed, ideally with Franklin, ^^Yes! I see there 
 arc two ships coming home, that will bring news.^^ At 
 that time I had not discovered the mode of conversing 
 with her when away, and no questions were asked, as 
 to what ships these were. Indeed, it was supposed, 
 that it might refer to some returning whale ships. 
 This statement of hers was reported in the ^* Man- 
 chester Guardian,^^ some time before the arrival of Sir 
 J. C. Ross. She had spoken of a returning ship at 
 the second sitting; but the ^^ North Star^' having 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 147 
 
 been named by Sir Jolm^s friend^ it was thought she 
 saw that ship, 1, therefore^ expected some ship con- 
 nected with the expedition, to arrive about the begin- 
 ning of November,, 1849^ and in that months both the 
 ships^ under the command of Sir J. C. Ross^ reached 
 England. After the pubUcation of the account of their 
 homeward passage^ I questioned Emma very closely 
 on the subject^ and her replies left no doubt on my 
 mind^ that the ship she spoke of in September^ was 
 Sir J. C. Eoss^s. She said^ the ship had got but a 
 very little way from the ice when she first saw it^ and 
 that there was another behind. On referring to the 
 dates^ I found that Sir J. C. Ross had left the ice only 
 the day before ! It appeared to me, that she had seen 
 these ships^ as frozen up, and again in their passage 
 homeivardSy without thinking of the intervening time^ 
 just as we often do in dreams^ and that hence arose the 
 confusion and mistake. 
 
 Subsequently^ I received a later letter of Sir John 
 Pranklin^sj the last^ I believe^ received by Lady 
 Franklin. This has formed the medium of all the 
 later inquiries. After using this several times, it 
 occurred to me^ that if I had the handwriting of other 
 parties with Sir John, it would serv^e as some sort 
 of a test; for if she gave a different time, or 
 placed them in a different situation to Sir John, it 
 would shew, that very little, if any, reliance could be 
 placed on her statements, as regarded time and situa- 
 tion. Through the instrumentality of a gentleman 
 holding a high official situation, several letters were 
 procured, and sent me, written by different officers in 
 Sir John^s ship ; also an official letter of Captain 
 Crozier, the commander of the ^^ Terror /^ and an- 
 other, written by the commander of the '' North Star,^^ 
 relieving vessel. These were accompanied with a per- 
 sonal description of the different writers. I tried 
 Emma with these, in the presence of several highly 
 respectable gentlemen of Bolton, who made notes of 
 her statements. I first gave a letter, written by an 
 officer in Sir John^s vessel. She found him ; and di- 
 
 7* 
 
148 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 lectly spoke of him as being with Sir John; and the 
 description she gave of him accorded so exactly with 
 the written one_, that we were all much struck. An- 
 other was given, with the same result. I then gave 
 another^ without previously reading his personal de- 
 scription, and I found her equally accurate. One of 
 these gentlemen has reddish hair; this she compared to 
 the hair of a neighbour's child, which is of that colour. 
 The next day we had another test. I gave her the 
 commander of the ^'^ North Star's'^ letter, which, in 
 appearance, was very much like the one bearing 
 Captain Crozier's signature, as if it was written by one 
 of Sir ./. Franklin's party ; and merely told her, we 
 wished her to go again, and see if she could find this 
 one. Her first observation, after trying, was remark- 
 able : ^' This letter wont let me go the same way as the 
 other !'' It has since been found, that the '' North 
 Star'' wintered on the north-east side of Baffin's Bay; 
 while Franklin must have been far away to the west 
 of Barrow's Straits. Six letters were given her, and 
 in all, her description of the writers was correct ; her 
 remarks often graphic and amusing. Thus, of Captain 
 Fitzjames, of the '^ Erebus," she said, '' He is a half- 
 master, but Franklin is the master of all." She also 
 spoke vividly of the polar scenery ; the ^'^ saltpetre 
 lights" shooting up into the sky : the darkness and 
 dreariness of the tract around the Pole ; the modes 
 employed to entrap and destroy animals for food; 
 using their blubber, or oil, for fuel and for light ; and 
 other matters. One of these parties she spoke of as 
 being dead : since then, of others. Sir John's per- 
 sonal safety she attributed to the quantities of fish oil 
 he was in the custom of drinking; a habit, which I have 
 been since informed, he acquired in former polar 
 voyages. Her description of him, personally and 
 mentally, I am also informed, was quite correct. 
 
 During the past summer and autumn, she repeatedly 
 asserted, that Sir John had got his ships afloat, and 
 moving homewards, and she gave a decreasing longi- 
 tude ; so much so, that if the ship, she spoke of, was 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS. 149 
 
 liis^ lie ought to have been here by the end of No- 
 vember. Here^ however^ she seems to have made the 
 same mistake as last year^ and to have confounded 
 other ships^ connected with the discovery^ with Sir 
 John^s own ship; for two vessels were actually nearing 
 homCj but they were the "North Star/^ and Lady 
 Franklin's vessel, the "Prince Albert/' The most 
 important of her statements^ during the autumn^ was 
 made in the months of August and September. On 
 the 24th of August, she said she could see a ship ap- 
 joroacAm^ Franklin, which, to her^ did not seem along 
 way off; and, that Sir John had not seen the " North 
 Star.''^ On the 7th of September, she said, that Sir John 
 had food, but, again, that he had 7iot seen the " North 
 Star.'^ On the 15th of September, she told me, in a 
 state of much excitement, that Sir John had been met 
 by a ship, commanded by a " white headed'^ man, and 
 relieved! It is now known, that the "North Star'' 
 did not see Franklin ; but, that about the time she 
 said a ship was approaching him, traces of the gallant 
 adventurer had been discovered at Cape Riley, situate 
 at the north-west extremity of Barrow's Straits, con- 
 siderably to the westward of the point to which Sir 
 J. C. Ross penetrated, and directly in the track that 
 she has led me to expect Franklin took; and it is 
 now known, that the relieving ships had passed Cape 
 Riley several days before she says Franklin was met. 
 Soon after this, her statements appear to represent 
 Franklin's ship, with two others near to it, one of 
 which is the "white headed" man's ship, as being 
 again frozen up. 
 
 At present, what we do know, tends to confirm the 
 main points of her statements. She has all along as- 
 serted, and still continues to assert, that Franklin is 
 alive, and her expectation of his coming home, but 
 not the way he went. Notes of her statements are in 
 the hands of several gentlemen; so that, when the 
 time arrives for clearing up the mystery, there will 
 be opportunity for doing so, without any possibility of 
 collusion or mistake. When I began these inquiries, 
 
150 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 they were quite of a novel kind^ both to myself and 
 the clairvoyante; and hence^ necessarily^ crude and 
 imperfect : for the clairvoyant, like ordinary^ percep- 
 tion, becomes clearer and improved by familiarity 
 with any subject. I have, therefore, regretted that 
 ever any notice of this particular investigation, found 
 its way into the public newspapers, because it has led 
 to a host of imitators ; some of whom seem to have 
 reflected the statements already known or reported. 
 And I know, that Lady Franklin has been pestered, 
 and her feelings hurt, by persons intruding on her 
 the most arrant nonsense and downright falsehoods, 
 as pretended clairvoyant revealments. When the fate 
 of Sir John is known, and, especially, if his safety is 
 ascertained, which I hope will be the case, then the 
 notes of these inquiries will receive additional in- 
 terest. 
 
 The difference of time which Emma gave during the 
 winter of 1849-50, and under every circumstance, was 
 from 7 to 7ihours. Assuming this, as an approximation, 
 it will give Sir John a western longitude of about 110 
 degrees ; and other matters would make the latitude 
 from 75 to 78 degrees north. She places the three 
 ships now, about one hour, or more, eastward. She 
 was an hour wrong in the longitude of the ^^ North 
 Star f^ and since I have found her confounding vessels 
 one with the other, I have considered her statements 
 of time as of little weight ; nevertheless, she has been 
 tolerably correct on many other occasions : thus, in 
 Mr. Willey^s case, she gave a difference of eight hours 
 west for San Francisco ; several times, about two 
 hours east, for Port Natal; and, in several cases, in 
 the United States and Canada, the error has only been 
 a few minutes. 
 
 As Sir John Franklin has before been ice-bound in 
 the Polar regions, and, as it would seem, from repeated 
 experiments, that every action of a man^s life leaves 
 an indelible trace, perceptible to a sufficiently lucid 
 clairvoyantc, and as I have found Emma mistaking the 
 '^ marks,^^ as she calls them^ of a person, for the per- 
 
CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS, 151 
 
 son^s actual presence at the time of inquiry, it will be 
 impossible to say how far she may, or may not, have 
 mixed up the former expedition with the present, 
 until certain intelligence arrives by which to solve 
 the problem. On the larger map, soon after I re- 
 ceived it, she pointed out Regenfs Inlet as the position 
 of Franklin. He was frozen up in that place, I believe, 
 in the former expedition; but the time she gave, placed 
 him farther west, and it is not probable that he is 
 there noiv, I sometimes suspect, that in giving a de- 
 creased longitude, making a difference in time of about 
 one hour, she may have had her perception directed 
 to the present situation of the ships, forming the last 
 relieving expedition ; and, as all these vessels are, in 
 her mind, grouped round Franklin as a centre, she may 
 have erroneously given him a different position to that 
 assigned in the winter of 1849-50. But all must be 
 considered as conjecture until the arrival of actual 
 informatiouo 
 
CHAPTER VIL 
 
 CLAIRVOYANCE, AS APPLIED TO PHYSIOLOGY AND MEDICINE^. 
 
 Every practical physiologist will admits that there 
 are many curious points^ connected with the functions 
 of various parts of the internal structure of the human 
 body^ which it would be desirable to know^ but which 
 can hardly be understood^ because it is impossible to 
 see these parts while living and in action. The 
 medical practitioner^, also^ would frequently be glad to 
 learn the cause of perplexing symptoms; to know 
 exactly the seat and nature of disease^ that he may be 
 enabled to apply the most appropriate remedy. As 
 he cannot see the cause of disease^ he uses the stethe- 
 scope^ in order to enable him to compensate, by hear- 
 ing, for the absence of seeing. In both these cases, 
 the services of a sufficiently lucid clairvoyante^ may be 
 of the greatest use. And, although the clairvoyante 
 may not fully understand the nature of the objects 
 seen^ the educated practitioner can hardly fail to ap- 
 preciate the description, and estimate the morbid ap- 
 pearances at their true value. 
 
 In the case of Emma, it was not long after the dis- 
 covery of her lucidity, before I observed that she 
 sometimes noticed the internal structure of the body. 
 One evening, she began to describe my lungs, as 
 ^^ pink things, full of holes like a s^ponge, with air in the 
 holes, and thousands of little veins in all directions.'^ 
 She said, the right lung was not so good a colour 
 as the left, and that ^Ht stuck at the middle flap.'^ 
 This I considered to be the case, having twice suffered 
 from inflammation on that side of the chest, and, 
 therefore, thought she might but be giving utterance 
 to my ideas. But I soon found that this was not 
 so ; but, as in the case of the pictures, she really 
 did see what she described. I asked her some ques- 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MEDICINE. 153 
 
 tions relative to the heart, which she accurately de- 
 scribed, both as to the auricles and ventricles; but^ as 
 might be expected, in very homely language, yet suf- 
 ficiently intelligible to any one acquainted with the 
 anatomy of that organ. Thus, she called the auricles 
 ^Hhe ears,'^ and the ventricles ^Hhe meaty part, '^ She 
 also clearly distinguished the difference between the 
 arterial and venous blood, and the situation of each in 
 the heart; calling one, ^^ the light side,^^ the other, 
 ^^ the dark side J' I thought her at fault once, but 
 found that, while I was thinking about the heart, and 
 expecting a description of some of its parts, she had 
 wandered to the windpipe, with its rings. It was 
 some time after this discovery, before it could be used 
 without inconvenience ; for when her attention was 
 directed to the internal organs of the bodj^, the 
 strangeness of the sight, together with the universal 
 motion, and circulating blood, so terrified her, that 
 she would tremble from head to foot ; and even when 
 awakened, complained of being ill and frightened, 
 without knowing the cause ; and would inquire, what 
 I had been doing to her, while in the mesmeric state. 
 But, by degrees, she became familiarised with these 
 investigations, and soon was able to examine the in- 
 ternal organs calmly, and without fear. Her manner, 
 on these occasions, was quite different to what it was 
 in other experiments. It was always serious and kind; 
 her language soft, but, from her want of education, 
 imperfect. Had she received an anatomical educa- 
 tion, her gift would be more valuable ; or, rather, 
 more accurate descriptions might be obtained : but, 
 on the other hand, her want of education proves that 
 she does not derive the knowledge of the internal or- 
 ganism of the body, which she evinces, from lier pre- 
 viously stored memory. 
 
 The faculty by which Emma described tlic internal 
 condition of the body, in such cases as above alluded 
 to, is what I have distinguished as lucidity. The first 
 time she ever evinced a distant perception of the in- 
 ternal condition of the organism, was in the case of 
 
 7** 
 
154 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 the physician^s lady^ mentioned at p. 129, This was 
 done chiefly for experiment ; but on the 29th of Sep- 
 tember^ 1848^ an opportunity was afforded for an en- 
 tirely new^ and unexpected manifestation of Emma^s 
 powers^ and in a more serious case. A highly respect- 
 able gentleman, residing at, and well known in, Man- 
 chester, having, at that time, a daughter seriously ill 
 with a cerebral disease, which baffled the ordinary 
 medical treatment, and which, in addition to bodily 
 infirmity, had produced a state of insanity, had been 
 recommended to try, whether, by clairvoyance, a mode 
 of cure could be discovered. He came to Bolton on 
 the 28th j but Emma being then in a state of trance, 
 to be subsequently described, he could not obtain the 
 information sought. He left with me a few pencil 
 marks by the lady, as a means of forming a medium 
 of connection. On the date above, I gave this paper, 
 with the marks on it, to Emma, and asked her, if she 
 could find the person who made the marks, and tell me 
 what was the matter with her. I said nothing about 
 doing her good, for, at that time, I had no idea of her 
 selecting any remedies. She soon found the lady ; 
 described accurately the external symptoms of the 
 patient, and also her perception of the internal con- 
 dition of the brain, to which organ she referred the 
 whole cause of illness. After recommending various 
 mesmeric passes, she exclaimed, pointing, at the same 
 time, towards the ceiling of the room, — ^^ There is 
 what will cure that lady, along with mesmerism. Eh! 
 what little bottles V^ These she described as contain- 
 ing little things, like the small comfits called ^^ thou- 
 sands.^^ I said, " Have I anything like them in the 
 surgery V '^ No ! you have nothing like them.^^ 
 '' Where can they be obtained?^' ^' There — in that 
 big town (pointing towards Manchester), in that shop 
 with a head in the window ; they are kept there in a 
 drawer.^^ It would not have occurred to me what 
 medicine she meant, but that, in the previous month, 
 when in London, I had been shewn, by a lady much 
 interested in mesmerism, and especially the higher 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MEDICINE. 155 
 
 phenomena of clairvoyance^ a case of homoeopathic 
 medicines. I do not recollect ever before seeing any; 
 and I waSj at that time^ quite ignorant as to the mode 
 of preparing and using them. I am also certain, that 
 in her wakeful state, Emma knew nothing about, nor 
 had ever seen, any of these medicines. The shop, I 
 subsequently found, Avas Mr. Turner^ s, homoeopathic 
 chemist, Piccadilly, Manchester; and in the shop 
 window was a bust of Hahnemann, the founder of 
 homoeopathy. But I was then ignorant that there 
 was such a shop just in that neighbourhood, having 
 seldom occasion to go to that part of the city. 
 
 I wrote to the gentleman, informing him of Emma^s 
 remarks ; and, on the receipt of my letter, he went to 
 Mr. Turner^s, purchased a case of medicines, and 
 came over to Bolton to ascertain the particulars. 
 When Emma was mesmerised, the sealed box was put 
 into her hands. After holding it over her head, she 
 said the case contained the medicine she saw, and 
 pointed especially to the situation of one bottle in the 
 case. When the box was opened, she selected a bottle 
 labelled ipecacuanha, which lay just under the place 
 she had pointed out, and tasted the globules through 
 the glass, without attempting to draw the cork. By 
 way of test, the bottle was put into another part of 
 the box, and other bottles slipped unawares into her 
 hand; but she invariably detected the change, by 
 tasting through the glass, and putting the bottle to her 
 forehead. She became angry at these changes, and 
 said we should poison the lady, with some of the bot- 
 tles we had picked out. I fetched a little powdered 
 ipecacuanha, and gave it to her ; and asked, if that 
 was like what was in the bottle she had selected. 
 She said, there was some of that in, and two other 
 things, and something sweet. This evinced a remark- 
 able perception of the composition 'of the globules, 
 which, I believe, are formed of sugar of milk, starch, 
 and a tincture of the drug, diluted with spirits of wine. 
 From that time the prescribed globules were duly ad- 
 ministered, and the mesmeric passes regularly made 
 
156 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM* 
 
 by the lady's father : and the result was^ the restora- 
 tion of the lady to healthy both in mind and body. 
 Two years have now nearly elapsed since the cure was 
 effected^ and the lady remains perfectly well. How 
 far the cure is to be attributed singly to homcEopathy 
 or mesmerism^ or to both conjoined, I do not pretend 
 to say. That the mesmeric passes are of the greatest 
 use in cerebral affections^ especially when the mind is 
 affected, I feel confident. Emma accompanied me 
 once to see this lady, soon after the cure was under- 
 taken. I put her into ^^ the sleep,^^ and then set her 
 to make passes over the lady_, which she did with a 
 soothing effect. Thinking that I could assist in the 
 operation, and that, as Emma had been mesmerised 
 by me, the influence would be the same, I made a few 
 passes over the occipital region and down the spine ; 
 but not so fully down as I wished, on account of the 
 position in which she was sitting. Presently the lady 
 began to evince great signs of anxiety and excitement. 
 I saw something was wrong, but did not know what. 
 Emma, however, perceived both the excitement and 
 the cause. " Don^t you see,^^ she exclaimed, ^^you are 
 making the lady worse. You are putting the fluid on 
 her head again. ^^ She meant, as she explained it, 
 that I did not shake my hands after passing down the 
 back, and that thus the hand charged with the fluid, 
 returned it to the patient when a fresh pass was made. 
 I then left it to Emma, who soon soothed the lady 
 with her passes, and spoke of the effects which were 
 visible to her, as she proceeded. Ever since then, I 
 have been extremely cautious not to mix influences, 
 and to shake from the hand whatever may have been 
 drawn from the patient. 
 
 The above remarkable case — remarkable, especially, 
 for the choice of a remedy foreign to my practice, and 
 for the precision with which she pointed out the shop 
 where the remedy was to be obtained, still remains 
 without a parallel in my experience. What should 
 have directed her attention to the homoeopathic medi- 
 cines, I know not : when I have asked Emma what 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MEDICINE. 157 
 
 led her to see them^ she has replied, ^^That she was 
 helped, and shewn what would cure the lady/^ It 
 ought also to be stated, that she always affirms that 
 there is an influence over her, when examining serious 
 cases of disease, quite different to what she experi- 
 ences in inquiries after losses, or mere experiments. 
 It induced me to investigate the nature and composi- 
 tion of the homoeopathic medicines, and that mode of 
 treating disease. That investigation has led me to 
 conclude^ that there is much that is good in the ho- 
 moeopathic system of medicine ; but it has not con- 
 vinced me of the propriety of confining practice to in- 
 finitessimal doses. I also think, that the virtues of 
 all medicines depend on their physiological action ; 
 and that, hence, for the action of the best, and most 
 tried homcBopathic remedies^ a scientific reason may 
 be assigned^ in agreement with the acknowledged 
 principles of therapeutics, and better than the mere 
 eynpirical idea of specifics. I must own, that I have 
 seen the best effects follow the use of homoeopathic 
 remedies ; but I have always used my own judgment^ 
 as to the dose and manner of exhibition. Emma has 
 repeatedly identified the homoeopathic globules with 
 the tinctures from which they are prepared, and this 
 merely by her method of tasting through the bottle. 
 This certainly proves that something of the medicinal 
 virtue remains in them, although so highly diluted^ 
 and so minute^ as not to be ascertained by the most 
 delicate chemical test. It is, perhaps, one of the best 
 examples of the highly exalted sense attendant on 
 clairvoyance. Many persons, admirers of homoeo- 
 pathy, sought the assistance of Emma^s powers, and she 
 sometimes exhibited a sort of intuitive knowledge of 
 the property of these remedies; at other times, her per- 
 ceptions were more limited. 
 
 The success attending her perception of homoeopa- 
 thic remedies, induced me to try her with the usual 
 medicines. A small quantity of the most useful drugs 
 and chemicals were mixed with sugar, to give them the 
 same sweet base as the homoeopathic preparations, 
 
158 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 and put into small bottles^ corked and capped. These 
 she would examine the same way, by tasting through 
 the bottle ; and such as she considered good for the 
 patient, en rapport with her, she called ^^ nice ;" such 
 as were not suitable, ^^ nasty f^ though, sometimes, 
 the ^^ mce" medicines were intensely bitter : such, for 
 instance, as the sulphate of quinine. Her manner 
 was, after examining the patient, to taste the medi- 
 cines, and to select such as bore some relation to the 
 complaint ; and were, therefore, good for the patient 
 then before her ; but she had no idea of appropriating 
 certain medicines for certain recognized diseases. It 
 was, therefore, no use to shew her an assortment of 
 medicines, and ask her to point out what complaints 
 they were good for : she always said, ^^ Shew me the 
 poorly person, and then I can see if any of them will 
 do them good.^^ Of the quantity of the medicine she 
 seems to have no just perception, but simply of the 
 quality ; hence, in her choice of homoeopathic reme- 
 dies, I consider it was rather the inherent quality, than 
 the proper dose, which she perceived. But, by subse- 
 quent conversations with ladies who were in the habit 
 of using homoeopathic medicines, she acquired a know- 
 ledge of the mode of administration, and carried her 
 wakeful idea into the mesmeric state. The recognised 
 medicines of the pharmacopoeia, which she most fre- 
 quently selected, were generally appropriate, and such 
 as I was in the habit of commonly using ; and hence, 
 it may be, that my knowledge, or practice, influenced 
 her choice. 
 
 Since the case above related, I have had many, both 
 in the neighbourhood, and in distant parts of the 
 country; but, from motives of delicacy to the patients, 
 I suppress all reference to the parties. Besides, I 
 have been especially desirous to avoid even the appear- 
 ance of giving this work the character of an interested 
 record of cures and cases ; and, in medical matters, 
 have aimed, at what an American reviewer of the First 
 Edition calls ^^ a commendable brevity /^ therefore, I 
 give the briefest summary of two years experience. 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MEDICINE. 159 
 
 The most numerous successful cases have been^ dis- 
 eases of the chest_, liver^ or nervous system. I have had 
 the satisfaction of seeing parties restored, who were 
 considered as past hope. Some of these parties I have 
 never personally seen, but prescribed for them accord- 
 ing to the clairvoyante^s diagnosis : others, in the neigh- 
 bourhood, I have seen repeatedly, after the first or se- 
 cond clairvoyant inquiry. In one case, in the North of 
 England, at a great distance from Bolton, I had the 
 satisfaction of receiving a corroboration of the clair- 
 voyante^s statements, from the physician in attendance. 
 I have also had the gratification to receive letters of 
 thanks, from individuals wholly unknown to me per- 
 sonally, who have been cured, and whom I have not yet 
 seen. Professional gentlemen of the highest standing, 
 have also applied to me for a clairvoyant diagnosis of 
 their own cases. As might be expected, the cases often 
 were of the worst description, in which various modes 
 of cure had been unsuccessfully tried, and proved 
 sometimes incurable. One great advantage of mes- 
 meric treatment, and element of success, — that of im- 
 parting confidence and hope to the patient, — will be 
 obvious to every practitioner. I will merely add a 
 short account of a case of blindness from amaurosis, 
 which occurred close to my then residence, and which 
 the parents of the patient are desirous should be 
 known. 
 
 Towards the close of the summer of 1849, Ellen 
 Daniels, about seven years old, and daughter of Mr. 
 and Mrs. Daniels, of No. 9, Cheapside, Bolton, while 
 visiting at a relative's in Bury, began to exhibit symp- 
 toms of cerebral affection, with partial paralysis. The 
 relative became so alarmed, that she brought the child 
 home ; here the symptoms increased ; her eyes grew 
 gradually dim, and eventually she became totally 
 blind. The child had been in this state about a fort- 
 night or three weeks, when I first heard of it. I sent 
 for her, and examined her eyes minutely, and could 
 discover no sensibility to light, and satisfied myself 
 that she was really blind. I then put Emma into the 
 
160 SOMNOLISM AND 1?SYCHE1SM. 
 
 lucid state^ and desired her to examine the child^s 
 head thoroughly. She did so; and attributed the 
 cause of blindness to the state of the roots of the optic 
 nerveSy and the general disordered condition of the ner- 
 vous system. She said,, if passes were daily made over 
 the child^s head in the manner she proposed, and a mild 
 tonic chalybeate mixture, I was in the habit of using, 
 administered, the child would recover its sight in a 
 few weeks. Being desirous to ascertain whether she 
 was correct in her perception, at the same time to 
 benefit the child, if possible, I sent, in the evening, for 
 its father, and said, that if he would allow me to try 
 my way of curing the child, and not suffer any one 
 else to interfere, I would do so, and not charge him 
 anything for it. He consented; and the child was 
 mesmerised daily; sometimes by Emma, and some- 
 times by myself; at the same time, the medicine was 
 used. At the end of about three weeks, the child 
 manifested the first perception of light, which gradu- 
 ally increased, until the sight became sufficiently re- 
 stored to enable her to join in the gambols of other 
 children, and also to read large print; so that a stran- 
 ger could hardly perceive any defect. Her recovery 
 would have been, I believe, more rapid, and still more 
 perfect, if a sufficient time could have been spent on 
 her; but the many interruptions I experienced 
 prevented it. When I first examined the child, 
 the outline of her cranium was very peculiar, being 
 considerably elevated at the back of the top part; 
 but, as her health and strength improved, I ob- 
 served a gradual return to the ordinary form. Now, 
 at the close of 1850, the child retains her sight, 
 but is somewhat near-sighted. While examining this 
 child, Emma told me of several cases, where, she 
 said, continued mesmeric passes would restore vision. 
 But I have had no opportunity of trying any similar 
 case. Edward Barnes, the epileptic patient, who was 
 so susceptible of my mesmeric influence, and who at- 
 tributes his cure entirely to the mesmeric passes, con- 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MEDICINE. 16] 
 
 joined with the tonics I gave him^ remained free from 
 the fits^ when last seen during the past autumn. 
 
 In putting the case of a distant patient^ I give 
 Emma the handwriting, or a lock of hair, of the pa- 
 tient, as the material medium of connection. In some 
 instances^ where I have known nothing of the symp- 
 toms, she has given me a very exact and full descrip- 
 tion of the case ; in others, she has omitted things 
 which ought to be known. This may have happened 
 from her attention not being directed to the part, or 
 from her not perceiving the importance of the appear- 
 ances. As regards external appearances, she seldom 
 paid any attention to them, unless especially directed 
 to do so. Considering that medical investigations are 
 too important to be made matters of mere experiment, 
 I have, for some time, refused to put any distant C2i^e, 
 unless the symptoms were communicated to me confi- 
 dentially. By this means, I can be assured that Emma 
 has the right party mentally before her, and can di- 
 rect her especial attention to such parts, or organs, as 
 the symptoms may lead me to suspect are disordered. 
 When patients apply personally for clairvoyant diag- 
 nosis, I generally desire them not to inform me of 
 their complaints, until the clairvoyante has made an 
 examination, and described the internal appearances 
 and symptoms ; and, not unfrequently, they have ex- 
 pressed their surprise at hearing their symptoms so 
 accurately described, and the locality of pains correctly 
 pointed out, or the time of the day at which periodical 
 pains set in, stated, without a word being said to either 
 myself or Emma on the subject. It is this, which has 
 made an indelible impression of the reality of clair- 
 voyance on many persons. I invariably recommend 
 patients to apply personally, if practicable. Their 
 personal presence awakens the interest and sympathies 
 of the clairvoyante, and that is of no little importance 
 in these investigations. Besides, it is the faculty of 
 lucidity yfhioh is then called into exercise; and this is 
 not liable to the mistakes of distant clairvoyant per- 
 ception, nor is it so fatiguing to the clairvoyante. 
 
162 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 Distant clairvoyance appears more surprising and won- 
 derful; but lucidity is the most certain and useful 
 faculty. 
 
 The non-professional reader would feel but little 
 interest in the physiological researches^ to which I 
 have applied Emma^s faculty of lucidity ; I, therefore, 
 reserve many details which I may publish in another 
 work. I would only observe,, that these revealments 
 throw light on various obscure diseases, especially of 
 the heart and nervous system. It would appear, that 
 there is a circulation, or transudation, of the blood 
 through minute orifices in the walls of the heart, 
 which have been generally overlooked, on account of 
 their minuteness, and the complexity of the arrange- 
 ment of the fibres of the heart. A late physiological 
 writer, has applied the safety-valve principle in illus- 
 tration of the use of the valves of the right ventricle ; 
 but here appears a more universal safety-system, by 
 which the balance of the circulation, in this important 
 organ, may be preserved, and, at the same time, the 
 heart rendered less absolutely dependant for nutrition 
 on the coronary arteries, than generally supposed. 
 The knowledge of this parietal circulation, and of the 
 action of the organic nerves, explains the reason of 
 sudden death, from spasm of the heart ; at the same 
 time, it suggests a rational and safe mode of treating 
 heart-disease. Then, again, the clairvoyant descrip- 
 tion of the forms and uses of the cortical spherules, or 
 grey vesicular matter of the brain, and of the permea- 
 bility of the medullary fibrous substances, and their 
 different conditions in healthy and diseased persons, 
 and of the use of the arachnoid membrane, throws 
 much light on the causes of insanity. Emma has, 
 on two or three occasions, pointed out on her own 
 head, the locality of disease in insane persons not 
 then present ; and I have ventured, from these state- 
 ments, to say, on phrenological grounds, what the 
 chief symptoms of mental alienation should be, and 
 the friends have confirmed my description. 
 
 It will be obvious to the reader, that the uses of 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MEDICINE. 163 
 
 clairvoyant revealment, do not end with the case in 
 which it is made. The knowledge thus obtained may 
 be useful to the physician in all similar cases. I must 
 own^ that I have derived information from this source^ 
 which I could not have obtained from the usual me- 
 thods of study ; and^ at the same time^ more confi- 
 dence in certain remedial applications. Clairvoyance 
 and mesmerism are not to supersede the physician 
 and medicinal agents; but the former is to be used by 
 the physician as he uses his stethescope^ — that is^ as 
 an instrument of investigation ; in fact^ a true lucid 
 clairvoyante may be styled a living stethescope; and the 
 latter is only one among many remedial agents. jNIes- 
 merism, I consider^ has suffered from the enthusiasm 
 of some of its admirers ; who put it forward as the 
 universal and unfailing panacea^ to the exclusion of all 
 other healing measures j a practice too common with 
 the enthusiastic A^otaries of all 'opathies and 'isms. 
 But the time occupied by clairvoyant investigation is 
 a considerable hindrance to its use. The process is 
 necessarily slow. Seldom has an examination lasted 
 less than an hour; sometimes it has extended over 
 two hours. This is a longer time than a physician 
 can generally afford for a single case ; and then the 
 clairvoyante is too much fatigued to investigate an- 
 other. Patients^ too^ have mostly required long notes 
 of their cases. Clairvoyance has also been sometimes 
 used to gratify patients^ when really not required. I 
 should not feel confident in prescribing for absent pa- 
 tients^ on reading a list of their symptoms only^ unless 
 I found the clairvoyante^ s statements^ on examination, 
 accounted for those symptoms; and when patients apply 
 personally^ in very obscure cases, a clairvoyant investi- 
 gation may be necessary. But, in the majority of 
 cases, the usual method of inquiry, combined with the 
 information obtained from many clairvoyant investiga- 
 tions, would be quite sufficient, if the patient fully 
 stated the symptoms, and underwent the usual exa- 
 minations. By this mode of procedure, the benefits 
 derived from clairvoyant revealments would be more 
 
164 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 generally diffused ; much time saved ; and, conse- 
 quently, tlie charge to the patient lessened. Emma 
 has no recollection of anything she may have seen, or 
 stated, while making these inquiries, just as happens 
 in other mesmeric experiments; consequently, many 
 cases may be put, or questions asked, to which there 
 might be some objection, if she retained a knowledge 
 of what had transpired, when she returned to the 
 wakeful condition. 
 
 In concluding this section, it may be proper to 
 state, that the remedies I now chiefly employ, consist 
 of the active principles of vegetable substances, chemi- 
 cally prepared, and impregnated with the odylic and 
 vital magnetic influences, and especially as regards 
 the solutions. Some are of the homoeopathic class, 
 and those which are contained in the recognised 
 Pharmacopoeia, are, from their mode of preparation, 
 free from all nauseous taste ; while, owing to their 
 concentrated form, they are transmissible by post, 
 which is a great convenience to distant patients. In 
 addition, simple and medicated baths, and atmospheric 
 and galvanic electricity, are freely used, in all suitable 
 cases. 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS IN ELECTRO-CHLMI:^TRY AND 
 MAGNETISM. 
 
 In prosecuting my enquiries into mesmerism and 
 clairvoyance^ I soon perceived that there were some 
 striking analogies to the phenomenon of terrestrial 
 magnetism and electricity; such^ for instance^ as some- 
 thing like polarity^ attraction, and repulsion. Subse- 
 quently I experimented a little in chemistry. About 
 this period, a reverend gentleman kindly sent me Dr. 
 Mayho^s work ^^ On the Truths contained in popular 
 Superstitions/^ in which I saw some account of the 
 earlier experiments of Baron Von Keichenbach, and 
 of his newO D force. I was struckwith the similarityin 
 the results of some of his experiments and my own. 
 For the information of those unacquainted with the 
 Baron^s researches, I may briefly state, that he has 
 several female patients, who appear to be the subjects 
 of severe nervous disease, in one instance, confining 
 the patient permanently to her bed. The unusual 
 condition of the nervous system of these patients, 
 partly perhaps constitutional, and partly the eff'ects of 
 disease, render them peculiarly susceptible of sensa- 
 tional impressions; and from their extreme sensitive- 
 ness they are enabled to see phenomena, chiefly in 
 connection with magnetic, electric, or chemical action, 
 which are not at all perceptible to the senses of ordi- 
 nary observers. Reichenbach, alluding to the influ- 
 ence felt by some persons from the proximity of a 
 magnet, says, that in Germany, at least one-fourth of 
 the inhabitants are susceptible of its influence in a 
 greater or lesser degree: this class he calls sensitives; 
 but such persons as his patients, sensitives in the hi'jhest 
 degree. In these investigations, Reichenbach, like the 
 mesmeric operator, has had to depend principally on 
 the statements and feelings of others, and not on the 
 
166 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 evidence of his own senses_, or on the senses of per- 
 sons constituted like himself. Hence a shadow of 
 doubt cannot but arise^ which can only be dissipated 
 by continued experiments^ and the most rigid tests. 
 As regards mesmeric subjects^ I have always been 
 fearful, lest the opinions or conjectures of the ope- 
 rator's mind should be unconsciously reflected by the 
 subject; but in the following experiments, most of 
 the statements refer to matters of which I had no 
 previous idea. In the spring of the present year 
 (1850), being in Edinburgh, I shewed to Professor 
 Gregory some notes I had with me on these subjects; 
 and he very kindly read to me, some passages from 
 his then unpublished translation of Eeichenbach^s 
 larger work, which were so strikingly similar, that I 
 saw they were two entirely independent testimonies 
 to the same class of phenomena. The notes I tran- 
 scribe, will I trust, prove interesting and suggestive 
 to the enquiring reader, and I believe they are the 
 first published English experiments of their kind. 
 
 February 10, 1850. — In experimenting with Emma 
 this day, she said, while in the lucid state, there is a 
 fluid issuing from the points of the fingers of each 
 hand. This fluid, she said she could see, and that it 
 was of an orange or reddish colour from the right 
 hand, and greenish or bluish from the left hand. She 
 represented this fluid as passing out of the right hand 
 into the left, and thus making a circle. By trying 
 these experiments her hands became so strongly at- 
 tracted to each other, that it was only by long-con- 
 tinued cross passes that they could be separated. The 
 adhesion was so great, as to cause the fingers and 
 hands to be distorted in a way not to be voluntarily 
 imitated, and the muscles were swollen and rigid, 
 with all the appearance of severe spasm. On the 19th 
 of February, and several subsequent times, I tried her 
 again on this point, to sec whether her perceptions 
 remained the same, but found no essential difl'erence 
 in her statements. 
 
 February 21st. — Emma, in the " sleep/^ told me 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MAGNETISM, ETC. 167 
 
 this day, for the first time, that if silver was placed 
 on the skin, over the heart, "it would have her^^ — her 
 phrase for being demesmerised. Also, that if a plate 
 of silver was placed there, while she was in the wake- 
 ful state, she could not be put into the mesmeric sleep. 
 How she came to know this, I could not learn; it 
 seemed like intuitive perception. I gave her, at her 
 request, a shilling to try this effect. She placed it over 
 her heart, and became gradually demesmerisedj but 
 on awaking, did not seem quite right. She was some- 
 what convulsive, for, perhaps, a minute; and this mode 
 of demesmerising her did not awake her so easily and 
 tranquilly as upward passes. At another sitting she said. 
 That if silver was placed in her hands, it would help her 
 back when away on distant excursions. That is, it 
 would help her to re-invert the currents, &c., and re- 
 turn to the first y or lucidy state. On another occasion 
 she said, that a piece of silver, as a shilling or half-a- 
 crown, passed over from right to left, would prevent 
 going into the " sleep,^^ and act as a safeguard. That 
 a piece passed from left to right would bring her back, 
 from a distance; and if put next the heart, would bring 
 her out altogether. These statements I have found 
 of great practical value. By putting a shilling into 
 Emma^s right hand, passed as she directed, or simply 
 breathed upon, and, at the same time, making passes 
 round her head and shoulders, from her left to the 
 right side, she can easily be restored to the first state, 
 and the former excitement and palpitationss of the 
 heart are thus avoided. At times, also, when Emma has 
 gone spontaneously into a mesmeric state from abstrac- 
 tion, or deep attention, as has happened when in a 
 place of worship, I have, unobserved, slipped a shilling, 
 so passed, into her hands, and restored her silently to 
 wakeful consciousness — greatly to her own surprise ; 
 for she was unconscious of the change which had 
 passed over her, until aroused from it. I did not try 
 the effect of placing silver over the heart, to prevent 
 the " sleep,^^ for a considerable time ; being fearful, 
 on account of her peculiar sensitiveness, that I might 
 
168 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 injure her^ or impair her interesting mesmeric suscep- 
 tibilities; but this experiment has now been made 
 several times. The first time I made the trials Emma 
 placed a half-a-crown^ I gave her for the purpose, on 
 the sternum, rather than over the heart; and, I believe, 
 her linen partially kept it from touching the skin. I took 
 her by the hands in the usual way, and looked stead- 
 fastly at her, and she went speedily into the ^^ sleep.^^ 
 I thought that she had made a mistake ; and, indeed^, 
 from my powerful influence over her, I thought it im- 
 possible that, by any means, she could be made to re- 
 sist it. When I found where she had placed the coin, 
 which I did on demesmerising her, I desired her to 
 put it on the skin, close under the left breast ; at the 
 same time, leading her to expect that it was to send 
 her quicker into the sleep, (for I had not informed her 
 in the wakeful state of what she had said respecting 
 it ;) she did so; and I tried for ten or twelve minutes, 
 but could not succeed in mesmerising her ! Several 
 times she seemed as if about to nod, and spoke of 
 feeling sleepy, but the feeling directly passed off". 
 Fearful of impairing her powers, I did not try longer, 
 at that time, but tried again on another day, and with 
 the same result. As Emma was in the wakeful con- 
 scious state during these latter experiments, her sen- 
 sations, on these occasions, belong to the class of 
 KeichenbacVs sensitives, and as such will be described. 
 Twice, after using the half-a-crown on the left side, 
 and finding that I could not send her into the ^^sleep,'^ 
 1 got her to remove it to the corresponding situation 
 on her right side, and desired her to describe the sen- 
 sations she felt ; but not many seconds elapsed, after 
 taking her hands, and looking at hex', before she was 
 in the mesmeric state. 
 
 Many experiments were tried with a small bar, and 
 horse-shoe magnet, which were often repeated and 
 varied, with a view to test the accuracy of her state- 
 ments. The general result may be thus stated : 
 Emma could see an aura, or fluid, passing into, along, 
 and out of the magnet. Nothing was said to her re- 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MAGNETISM^ ETC. 169 
 
 specting the poles of magnets^ or their relation to ter- 
 restrial magnetism^ lest any idea should be suggested 
 to her, which might give a bias to her perceptions ; 
 but she invariably represented the fluid as passing in 
 at the south pole of the magnet, and out at the north 
 pole. This she did, whether the bar or horseshoe 
 magnet was used. She describes the colours as 
 '^rainbow-like/^ duller, with greenish and bluish 
 colours predominating at the south end; and more 
 brilliant colours, with red predominating, at the north 
 end. In comparing the current with that in her 
 hands, she said. That the current out of the north pole 
 of the magnet, and out of her right hand, was warmest, 
 and that was the reason she called her right hand, 
 '^ the warm hand -/' and the right side of the body, 
 generally, " the warm side.^^ In describing the cur-^ 
 rent through the bar magnet, she represented it as 
 passing along the upper surfaces of the magnet, and 
 returning underneath; but whether she meant under- 
 neath the magnet, or under the upper surface, I could 
 not tell. She described the magnet as full of ^^ little 
 holes,^^ — poreSy probably ; and said, that the fluid had 
 a more zig-zag course in the magnet than in the air, 
 because it was stopped by these little holes : — perhaps 
 some irregularity in their pores. 
 
 A bar magnet was laid on a table, nearly north and 
 south ; with the north pole of the magnet to the north 
 pole of the earth. Emma desired to look at the mag- 
 netic fluid in the air, and see whether it went in the 
 direction the magnet was lying. After a minute or 
 two's examination, she placed the magnet in a position 
 nearly N.N.W., and S.S.E.; that is, nearly, if not quite, 
 in the line of variation, the northern current having a 
 western declination. In this position, she said, the 
 fluid in the air, and that in the magnet, travelled in 
 the same direction. In describing the course of the 
 fluid in the bar magnet y she invariably represented it as 
 passing from the south-east corner to the north-west. 
 When the magnet was reversed with its south pole 
 placed northerly, she said the current was contrary to 
 
 8 
 
170 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 the current in tlie air. The magnet was then laid in 
 a position from east to west^ with the north pole to 
 the east : she now said^ the current entered at the 
 south-west angle, and passed out at the north-east; in 
 this mode, crossing the terrestrial current. But the 
 most curious thing, perhaps, is, she represents the 
 fluid as describing a series of epicycloidal curves in its 
 course. These curves she pointed out, with a pencil, 
 on the magnet, and afterwards roughly drew them on 
 paper. 
 
 August 14th. — A small iron wire was passed through 
 the keyhole of the door, and into the yard, in the sun- 
 light j but the sun was rather obscured : the other end 
 was put into Emma^s hand, or else held before her. 
 When asked, if she could see anything ? she replied, 
 ^^That she could see sparks of fire coming from the 
 wire— nothing else. It is of the same sort of colour 
 as flies from the points of the electric machine; — they 
 jump!^ She then described them as like a mass of 
 twisting fire (spirals, probably,) round the outside of 
 the wire, and at the point they seemed to fly ofi*. She 
 had a silver ring on her finger; I put the wire through 
 the ring, between it and her finger. She said, the 
 ring seemed to stop the sparks coming any farther; 
 they twisted round the ring, and then flew off" at its 
 edges. When the sparks passed from the edges of 
 the ring, they were of a similar colour as when they 
 passed from the point of the wire, but brighter. A 
 gold ring was now tried. ^^They now seem two 
 colours. The sparks part into two colours as they fly 
 off'. They are a brilliant red, and a pea green. They 
 seem to go the same way, but some are red and some 
 are green. When the sun does not shine out, they 
 are not so bright.^^ A gold and garnet ring tried, 
 and the wire put through. — '^The sparks fly from the 
 edges of the ring, green and rod. The stones stop 
 the rays.^'' A gold ring was held out in the sunshine, 
 and then given her. She said, it felt cool ; but the 
 vapour, from the end of the wire, hot. It should be 
 observed, that Emma shews no real signs of feeling 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MAGNETISM^ ETC. 171 
 
 when mesmerised ; but may easily be led to imagine 
 that she feels pain^ by pretending to prick her, or ex- 
 citing the idea of pain; whether in these experiments, 
 she really felt, as well as saw, by some abnormal means, 
 or only had the perception of what the sensation would 
 be, I cannot determine. 
 
 On another occasion, I passed both a brass and 
 iron wire under the window, and fastened them, by 
 small staples, so as to be exposed to the bright sun- 
 shine of a summer^s afternoon ; the other ends were 
 given to Emma, in a shaded part of the room. Al- 
 most the first observation she made was, that the yel- 
 low wire was mixed ; this struck me forcibly, as I am 
 sure she knows nothing of the composition of brass. 
 She said, the light from both wires was the same 
 colour, but that the yelloAV wire had the strongest 
 spark. The sparks came spiral along the wire, and 
 then flew off at the end ; a knot, or circle, in the wire 
 does not stop the current. She said, unasked, that 
 the yellow wire would do a patient good. Afterwards, 
 that if a person had a pain in the face, the current 
 from the wire would tend to cure it, in the same way 
 as the mesmeric influence, but that it ivould not send 
 into the ^^ sleep/^ She also said, that if the wire was 
 placed on her skin, round her waist, I could not ^^send 
 her,^^ — that is, send her into the ^^ sleep. ^^ This I have 
 not tried; but I found that she did not go into the 
 sleep until she loosed the wire, which I did not per- 
 ceive she held in her hand, until I found a difficulty in 
 mesmerising her. This appears to be similar to what 
 she before said of silver. 
 
 I noticed one very singular occurrence at this sitting. 
 I put the end of the wire through the ring she wore, 
 as in a former experiment ; Emma wished to examine 
 it closely, by looking at it over her forehead, in her 
 usual manner. In passing it upwards, she accidentally 
 touched the upper part of her nose with the ring, and 
 instantly exclaimed that a shock, or prick, had been 
 given her : this she rather saio than felt. She said, 
 that^ after she was demesmerised, inflammation would 
 
 8* 
 
172 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 arise tliere^ and that I should see it. I saw none then; 
 and, upon awaking her, I did not tell her what she 
 had said. About two hours afterwards, while walking 
 in the street, she felt so distinctly^ as if something had 
 struck her on the nose with a small stick, that she 
 turned round involuntarily to see if any one was near 
 her. When she mentioned this to me^ I told her what 
 she had said in the ^^ sleep/^ In the evening, I saw 
 plainly a small circular elevated patch of inflammation; 
 this did not wholly subside for three days. When I 
 had her again in the mesmeric state^ I asked her how 
 it was that the wire and ring afi'ected her nose ? She 
 said, it was because " she was warmy^ — meanings mes- 
 merised. This may shew that there is a real influence 
 flowing from wires so placed^ which can be felt by sen- 
 sitive persons ; and the readers of ReichenbacVs last 
 work, will observe a similarity, if not identity, with his 
 odylic force. These experiments with the sunlight, I 
 repeated several times, and with similar results. 
 
 After one of the foregoing experiments, I tried an- 
 other directly chemical. I placed my daughter on a 
 closed staircase, and gave her a tumbler of water_, con- 
 taining about half an ounce of bicarbonate of soda : 
 into this I introduced one end of a small iron wire, 
 which I brought through the door, and the other end 
 I held before Emma. While the soda was dissolving, 
 Emma said she could see light coming from the end of 
 the wire^ like the light of burning sulphur ; it seemed 
 to come through the wire. By preconcerted signals, 
 my daughter put portions of tartaric acid into the 
 solution. Every time the acid was added, Emma ex- 
 claimed, that the light from the wire was more brilliant, 
 and if I touched her with the wire it gave her a shock. 
 When I touched the gold and silver rings she then had 
 on her fingers, especially when the acid was added, 
 it drew and contracted the muscle, and twisted the 
 arm, like the effect of a powerful charge from a medical 
 galvanic apparatus. This, to me, was a most interest- 
 ing experiment; the results were so striking and un- 
 expected. It may be objected, that Emma^s lucid 
 
CLAIRVOYANCE IN MAGNETISM^ ETC. 173 
 
 faculty enabled her to see what was going on behind 
 the door^ and that she fancied the additional action 
 when she saw the effervescence ; but she sees only such 
 things as her attention may be directed to^ and I en- 
 deavoured to fix that on myself and the wire I held. 
 
 Some days afterwards I fixed a small brass wire so 
 that one end was in another apartment, and could con- 
 veniently be dipped into solutions, and gave directions 
 for their management, and for letting me know what 
 was being done. The above recited experiment, 
 sKghtly varied, was repeated. Bicarbonate of potass was 
 now tried in solution; one end of the brass wire dipped 
 into it ; the other I shewed to Emma in the next 
 apartment. She said a light came through the wire, 
 not round it ; this she now compared to burning salt- 
 petre. Tartaric acid was added at a signal, as before. 
 She said the light was more brilliant, and that it shot 
 forth every time the acid was added, and during the 
 effervescence. It gave her a shock as before; and 
 when the wire touched her silver ring, it produced the 
 galvanic effect on her hands and wrists: or what looked 
 like rigid mesmeric catalepsy. 
 
 A piece of iron tvire was put into largely-diluted 
 sulphuric acid, and the concealed end of the brass 
 wire introduced ; the other end shewn to Emma. 
 She said, light comes out of the wire, more of a buff 
 colour than in the other experiments. It comes through 
 the wire, and out like little globules or sparks. It 
 tasted sour : very sour and bitter, '^ something like the 
 iron water of Turton." This was a most pointed com- 
 parison. I put the end of the wire into her hand, and 
 then, unobserved, slipped half-a-crown into the palm 
 of the hand in contact with the wire. Instantly her 
 hand and arm became distorted and bent, as with a 
 powerful galvanic charge; and so strong was the effect 
 on her, that she twisted the wire tightly round her 
 hand and wrist, as if it had been a piece of string ; and 
 the tightness caused a deep indented discoloured ring 
 where the wire pressed. I had some difficulty in re- 
 moving the half-crown and setting her hand at liberty. 
 
174 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 and feared I liad much hurt it. Here, and in similar 
 cases, the effect was undeniable,, and obvious enough 
 to the senses of all observers. I afterwards directed 
 her attention to the glass in the other apartment. 
 She said that " there was something at the bottom of 
 the glass that looked round, but she could not distin- 
 guish what it was; that there were bubbles in the 
 glass :^' which was correct, as they arose from the 
 gradual decomposition of the water, and the escape of 
 the hydrogen, and ^^that it tasted sour.^^ She was 
 not very lucid that day, and complained of headache. 
 These experiments shew, that there is some real 
 unknown influence excited by chemical action, light, 
 heat, and the magnet, which can be perceived by 
 highly sensitive persons, and more distinctly, probably, 
 in a high state of cerebral lucidity, or clairvoyance ; 
 and the reader will be prepared to admit the possibility 
 of mesmerising water, which has generally been con- 
 sidered as merely imaginary. Frequently I have just 
 dipped the tips of my right fingers into a tumbler 
 of water, and almost as soon as Emma has taken a 
 portion into her mouth it has evinced its powerful 
 effect on her, by momentarily arresting her breathing, 
 causing a convulsive gurgling in her throat, and then 
 a complete lapse into the mesmeric state. This has 
 occurred when I have touched the water unknown to 
 her. She generally manifested this great sensibility 
 just after awaking from the mesmeric sleep. The in- 
 convenience andcouA^ulsive action was the effect of the 
 suddenness. How long the water would have retained 
 the influence I cannot say, having always thrown it 
 away to prevent accidents. But it would seem that 
 the mesmeric influence may be transferred to most, if 
 not all, bodies. One morning, a letter arrived from 
 her parents, with the love and kisses common in such 
 epistles. After reading it to her, I jokingly breathed 
 over the words, and made some passes over it as I 
 folded it up and gave it her, saying, ^* Take your let- 
 ter ; it is full of love now,^^ or some such expression : 
 she took it, and instantly fell on the floor, as if in a 
 
SENSITIVE EXPERIMENTS. 175 
 
 fit ! I felt alarmed, and hastened to raise her up ; 
 and as soon as she recovered herself, she said it was 
 occasioned by the letter^ which was so charged that 
 the suddeness with which she took it instantly took 
 away her senses. Fortunately she was not hurt. 
 She desired me to burn the letter ; but this I did not 
 do, nor did I think of demesmerising it ; but put it 
 with others in a letter-rack. I afterwards found her, 
 either on the after part of that day, or the next^ again 
 lying on the floor, with the letter in her hand, and in 
 the mesmeric state. Upon inquiry, I found she had 
 been sitting, sewing, near the rack, and felt an influ- 
 ence drawing her head towards it. The strange feel- 
 ing induced her to look, and seeing the letter, she got 
 up to take it down and throw it in the fire ; but no 
 sooner had she taken it in her hands, then she fell as 
 before, and remained in the mesmeric state till I found 
 her. I had no intention really to mesmerise the letter 
 when I gave it her, much less that it should afl'ect 
 her as it did ; but the mere passes and breathing con- 
 veyed the influence which remained in contact, or in- 
 herent, in the paper. This influence, therefore, like 
 that resulting from chemical, or odylic action, is a real 
 something J which can be retained and transferred. As 
 the plague may be disseminated by papers or garments 
 imperceptibly contaminated; so may the soothing and 
 health-gi\ang influence of mesmerism, and its kindred 
 elements, be conveyed to medicinal substances, and 
 the eff'ect experienced will be according to the recep- 
 tivity of the subject. 
 
 Sensitive experiments. — The endeavour to mes- 
 merise Emma, with a plate of silver over the heart, 
 shewed that she is in the wakeful state, what Heichen- 
 bach calls, a sensitive. But I apprehend all mesmeric 
 subjects will be found more or less sensitive. I do 
 not positively know, but have reason to suspect, on 
 physiological grounds, that the ordinary sight of sensi- 
 tives will be found weaker than that of robust persons. 
 Hence, after all, the ability of sensitives to see objects 
 invisible to ordinary vision, may result from the ac- 
 
176 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 tivity of the sensorium, as in lucid mesmeric subjects^ 
 and the peculiar state of the nervous system may 
 render them internally susceptible of impressions 
 which cannot be felt by individuals normally consti- 
 tuted. The most healthy will experience a sensation 
 of light from a blow near the eye^ as well as from other 
 strong stimulating applications ; this is generally re- 
 ferred to the stimulus conveyed to the retina^ fee.;, 
 and the light considered merely imaginary. But, 
 from the results of Reichenbach^s experiments^ it is 
 probable that the strong nervous stimulus excites the 
 odylic action, and renders the odylic light momentarily 
 visible. 
 
 When I found that I could not mesmerise Emma 
 while the half-crown was over her heart, I directed my 
 attention to any other symptoms that might arise, 
 and asked her if she felt any peculiar sensations. I 
 first held her hands in the usual way ; that is, her left 
 hand in my right, and right hand in my left. I found, 
 that whenever I loosed, or changed my hands so as to 
 take her left hand in my left, she started, and drew a 
 sudden convulsive inspiration, similar to what would re- 
 sult from a slight electric shock, or a sudden plunge of 
 the body into water. This shock was experienced every 
 time the hands were changed. When my right hand 
 held her left hand, she felt as if something was going 
 up her arm; this sensation was felt in the hand, at the 
 elbow, the shoulder-joint, and then down to the place 
 where the half-crown was placed ; there it was felt as 
 a gentle blowing sensation around the coin. When I 
 crossed my hands, and took her left in my left, after 
 the first slight shock, she felt a sucking or drawing 
 sensation over the heart ; then a feeling of swelling, 
 or filling, in her breast ; then a darting sensation to 
 the shoulder, — the elbow, — the wrist, — and these sen- 
 sations continued as long as the two left hands were 
 connected. No particular sensation was felt when 
 her right hand only was held. When both hands were 
 held in the usual way, no particular sensation was felt 
 over the heart, but a continued sensation in her hands 
 
CONSCIOUS LUCIDITY. 177 
 
 like what is called ^^ pins and needles/^ This sensa- 
 tion was considerably heightened^ if the thumbs were 
 compressed as well as the fingers. I have several times 
 tried Emma^s sensitiveness to the magnet ; sometimes 
 she has shewn considerable sensibility^ at others, but 
 little. The general result is as follows : When a bar 
 magnet was drawn doivn her right arm, she felt a sen- 
 sation, at times, even through the sleeve of her dress, 
 but stronger very near, but not touching the naked 
 skin. If the north pole of the magnet w^as held next 
 to her, she described the sensation as it passed down, as 
 being that of an agreeable coolness, as it passed along 
 the straight bones of the arm, hand, and fingers; but a 
 warmer, or sort of hot sensation at every joint. If the 
 north pole of the magnet was passed upwards, it 
 produced a somewhat disagreeable warm sensation. 
 When the magnet was passed spii^ally round her arm, 
 with the north pole towards her, she described it as a 
 sensation of a wire or cord drawn tight round the arm, 
 and cool as it passed downwards. 
 
 Nov. 15th, 1850 — This day, after several failures, 
 I succeeded, as about two years since, in arousing or 
 awaking Emma to full wakeful consciousness, but 
 with the lucid faculty in activity. After several of 
 these trials, she awoke, but with the eyelids closed and 
 quite dark, and wholly unable to see anything; in fact, 
 like many persons are in the first stages of mesmerism. 
 I tried the effect of breathing on the top of her head ; 
 when, after a little time, she shrieked out with fear, 
 and said that everything was light, although the eye- 
 lids were still closed. Notwithstanding; her familiarity 
 with physiological inquiries while in the mesmeric 
 state, she now felt so horrified at the sight of the cir- 
 culating blood and moving viscera, that I was speedily 
 obliged to close the vision. On the evening of that 
 day, and the next, I tried her again, and got her to 
 be a little less frightened. After fully awaking her, 
 and bringing her, apparently, completely into tlie nor- 
 mal state, suddenly, from some cause, she went into 
 the lucid state ^vith the eyes wide open, and continued 
 
 8** 
 
178 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 SO for a few minutes^ and then sunk into the mesmeric 
 state. This was a very different state to that of spon- 
 taneous mesmerism with the eyes open ; because^ in 
 this latter state,, her eyes were always fixed, or nearly 
 so, and the whole tone of voice, language^ and manner, 
 evinced that she was in the mesmeric, or magnetic, 
 state, notwithstanding the eyes remained unclosed. 
 But in this state of wakeful lucidity her eyes freely 
 moved, and all the senses appeared in the normal 
 condition. 
 
 In this wakeful lucid state, she began spontaneously 
 to speak of my skin ; the outer part of which she 
 compared to fish scales, lying one over the other : and 
 spoke of the edges of the scales as appearing irride- 
 scent with all the colours of the rainbow. This, with 
 many other observations, seems to shew, that not only 
 is the lucid vision clearer and brighter than ordinary 
 light, but that it magnifies the objects, and hence her 
 ability to see the blood corpuscles and other minute 
 parts of the body. The true skin she compared to 
 many fibres of fine cotton lying in various directions, 
 and interspersed with numerous blood-vessels. Al- 
 though the eyes were open, and freely moved about 
 as her attention was directed to different objects, it 
 did not appear that they were the organs of this lucid 
 vision ; for she seemed to see clearer, and to have 
 more light, when she held her eyelids down with the 
 fingers of her right hand, as, if in accordance with 
 what she says of the vital electric, or magnetic, cur- 
 rents, the circuit was completed when she pressed in 
 this way on her eyelids. When the gas was turned 
 down, so as to be nearly out, she said it was lighter ; 
 and when turned on again, said it had become darker: 
 another proof, that the light, or its analogue, issued 
 from within. 
 
 I took the opportunity of this unexpected conscious 
 lucid state, to try her again with the magnets; and I 
 felt mure induced to do this, because I found that she 
 had no recollection of what she had said or done in 
 the mesmeric state. Indeed, it was amusing to see 
 
CONSCIOUS LUCIDITY, 179 
 
 how clumsily she did things in this lucid state^ in ac- 
 cordance with my direction, which, in the mesmeric 
 state, she did spontaneously, as if by instinct. I was 
 gratified to find her corroborate all her mesmeric 
 statements. She placed the magnet exactly in the 
 same direction, to be in the line of the magnetic cur- 
 rent ; drew the same curves, unasked, and again said 
 that the fluid went in at the south end, and out at the 
 north; but she spoke plainer of the course of the 
 current. She said, that it formed an arch in going 
 from point to point of the curves; that there were 
 sparks of light issuing from the ends and points of 
 these curves, of a phosphorescent appearance, — for 
 she compared them to the light produced by rubbing 
 a lucifer match in the dark. The current, after pass- 
 ing from south to north, issued out at the north-west 
 corner, formed an arch over to the north-east corner, 
 and then returned through the middle of the magnet, 
 crossing it in the centre to the south-west corner, 
 then arching to the south-east corner, where it entered, 
 and went on as before. She saw the luminous fluid 
 issuing from my fingers, and, as before, said it came 
 out of the right hand, and that the colour in that 
 hand was brighter than the left. When the hands 
 were joined a current was formed. It is proposed to 
 enter into these magnetic and chemical experiments 
 on another occasion, and in a scientific form. The 
 scientific reader will, doubtless, see in these simple ex- 
 periments, results suggestive of very interesting inquiry. 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 
 EXTASIS, OR TRANCE. 
 
 The ancients were acquainted with a state^ in which 
 'the patient fell into a sort of swoon, and, while under 
 its influence, the mind became, as it were, loosened from 
 its bodily connection, and could, by this means, obtain 
 a perception of objects, and a knowledge of things not 
 cognizable to the ordinary senses. To this state they 
 gave the name of Energumene, from its inward work- 
 ings ; and Extasis, because the mind thus stood, com- 
 paratively, out of the body. It was not confined to 
 prophets or inspired teachers ; although it is highly 
 probable that such persons were almost invariably the 
 occasional subjects of this state, and were thus made 
 the mediums of Divine Revelations. The condition, in 
 itself, seems to be, a merely partial uncovering of 
 the veil which conceals '^ the things unseen;'^ and 
 Extatics may be considered as travellers in an un- 
 known country, enabled to see something of its na- 
 ture, and to report, according to the degree of their 
 perception, or powers of observation. But in no true 
 sense, are they to be regarded as Divine Agents, un- 
 less specially called to that office independently of 
 their Extatic condition. The sacred historian calls 
 the vision of St. Peter, mentioned in the Acts, chap. 
 X., ver. 10, an Extasis*; but the call or office of the 
 Apostle was antecedent and independent of the vision: 
 the use of the term, however, shews that the state was 
 known. It is not within the design of this work to 
 enter critically, or theologically, into an investigation 
 of this subject : I, therefore, merely suggest, that all 
 states of ExtasiSj were, and arc, but an uncovering of 
 the perceptions of the Psyche, or natural part of 
 
 * St. Paul says he went into the state of Extasis^ while praying in the 
 Temple at Jerusalem. Acts xxii. 17. 
 
EXTASIS^ OR TRANCE. 181 
 
 man^s spiritual organization ; and hence the earthly 
 character^ as to scenery and the Hke^ of all such re- 
 vealments : the higher and prophetic revelations re- 
 ceived by St. John, are said to be the result of being 
 *^ en pneumatiy^'—^^ in the spirit J^ 
 
 The foregoing chapters refer to the phenomena 
 witnessed in the state of induced extasis, or mesmeric 
 trance j the present to states of much higher, or more 
 interior character, and differing in some respects es- 
 sentially from the observed facts of ordinary mes- 
 merism, whether induced by the will or passes of an 
 operator, or arising spontaneously, or from abstrac- 
 tion, as mesmeric states may do. They are precisely 
 such states as were understood by Extasis, and as 
 such are here classed. One very striking difference 
 is observable ; in the mesmeric trance, all is a blank 
 to the subject when aroused; but in the extatic state, 
 not only is there, in some measure, a power to des- 
 cribe what is seen or heard, or perceived as heard, 
 but also, a recollection of what has transpired while 
 in the extasis. 
 
 Frequently during the spring and summer of 1848, 
 Emma would, in the mesmeric state, speak of the 
 scenery and nature of the spirit-world, in such a way 
 as to impress the beholder with a conviction, that the 
 descriptions she gave could not be the result of any 
 previously acquired knowledge, or of an active imagi- 
 nation. She also, occasionally, spoke of things which 
 had actually occurred, but which it was impossible 
 for her to know by any ordinary means. Her ideas 
 of religion were principally derived from the teach- 
 ings of a village schoolmistress in connection with the 
 Church of England, and from occasional attendance 
 at the public service of the church. She had been 
 taught, she said, to read a little, while a child, but 
 had lost the acquirement through a fever, and want 
 of continued tuition ; and, as before observed, at this 
 time she could not read, nor even correctly tell the 
 letters of the alphabet ; and yet the ideas to which 
 she gave utterance, were frequently of an elegant 
 
182 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 and exalted description^ although couched in homely 
 language. As she still continued to have no recollec- 
 tion of what she uttered^ when she returned to the 
 normal state^ I one day said to her^ with a view of 
 observing what her reply would be^ — ^^ Emma^ I have 
 heard of some persons having seen such things as you 
 speak of^ but they could recollect what they saw^ and 
 write an account of it in books/^ She replied^ " Yes ; 
 because it was permitted them ; and she should also 
 be permitted by and by to recollect ivhat she sawP I 
 was much surprised at her reply^ but I did not tell 
 her this when she awoke^ nor did I expect^ then^ that 
 her prediction would be verified. Subsequent events 
 proved that she was correct in making this assertion. 
 It has since occurred to me_, that she was undergoing 
 a change^ preparatory to the development of the ex- 
 tatic state, and that on this account her mind was 
 drawn more to spiritual scenery. But the reader 
 must not suppose that I imagined her to be invested 
 with a religious character ; which indeed, would not 
 be in harmony with her ordinary state of life, as she 
 never manifested what are called *^ religious impres- 
 sions /^ or that I considered her in the light in which 
 ^^ the extaticas ^^ have been represented in some Ko- 
 man Catholic countries. All these states I believe to 
 be conformable to, and the result of, natural laws act- 
 ing upon the peculiar nervous organization; but I 
 consider that these natural laws are but the results of 
 more interior and higher spiritual laws; and that 
 these higher laws may, on this account, modify and 
 control the lower. But while disclaiming all preten- 
 sions to a religious character, I must say, that I con- 
 sider her statements, whether true or false, as inde- 
 pendent as any which have been made before, and, as 
 far as I know, wholly uninfluenced, by any thing I 
 have read, or any opinions I may have entertained. 
 I have carefully avoided instructing her in many 
 things, lest it should bias her mind, or give a colour 
 to her statements; and some of her most striking 
 revealments have been opposed to my preconceived 
 
EXTASISj OR TRANCE. 183 
 
 opinions; while others^ relate to matters I have never 
 considered. 
 
 The first of these spontaneous states of extasis^ or 
 spiritual trance, occurred on the 3rd of July, 1848, 
 without any expectation, or forewarning on her part, 
 at least, as far as I know. This did not last more than 
 a quarter of an hour. Afterwards she had several 
 which lasted about half an hour ; and since then, some 
 which have continued for four, six, ten, and even 
 twelve hours. But few, if any, of these states were 
 observed during 1849, and not many during the pre- 
 sent year (1850), and those which have occurred, have 
 been of a less interesting nature on the whole, than 
 those which occurred in 1848. Of most of these 
 states, she had a presentiment while in the mesmeric 
 state, and, in one instance, foretold the occurrence 
 nearly two months before it happened. Generally, 
 it was about a week or fortnight before the trance 
 that she received an intimation of it, which she al- 
 ways represented as being told her ; and as the time 
 approached she would know the exact hour it was to 
 take place, and usually about three or four days be- 
 forehand. She knew nothing of what was forthcom- 
 ing, while in her ordinary wakeful state, and for the 
 sake of experiment, and to test the truthfulness of 
 her predictions, she was never informed when these 
 trances were to occur; and yet she was invariably 
 found correct, even to the exact time ! They have 
 usually been preceded by a feeling of quietness, and 
 a confused strange sensation in the head, but not ex- 
 actly of pain ; but as soon as she fairly passed into 
 the extatic state, all this feeling of strangeness and 
 discomfort left her. Frequently she has complained 
 to me of these feelings, and has enquired the cause, 
 which I well knew, but could not consistently tell 
 her. Several gentlemen whom I have apprized of 
 her predictions, have been witnesses of their accuracy, 
 and of the genuineness of this abnormal condition. 
 Only one state that she had predicted^ has fiiiled to 
 occur; and that depended on a contingency which 
 
184 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 has not yet taken place. In regard to these predic- 
 tions^ it must be observed that they relate entirely to 
 her own states : of the future as relating to others, or 
 to general events, she appears to have no perception^ 
 or but an imperfect one, except sometimes in the re- 
 sults of cases of illness. 
 
 In these states of spontaneous extasis she preserved 
 a recollection^ at times, of the place she was actually 
 in, and of the persons by whom she was surrounded ; 
 and, at the same time, she had a distinct and sensa- 
 tional perception of a higher and spiritual state of ex- 
 istence, and of a class of beings living in such a state. 
 She would speak of these things while in the trance; 
 and on her return to the normal state, she could recol- 
 lect, and, with a feeling of awe and dijBfidence, again 
 describe what she had seen and heard. During the 
 first trance of four hours^ duration, which occurred on 
 the 28th of September, 1848, and was witnessed by 
 several highly respectable gentlemen from Manchester, 
 she was so far elevated in her perceptions, that she 
 spoke of this world as the other world, just as if she 
 had passed from this life by death. She said, also, 
 that the persons in the room with her, appeared only 
 like shadows, and a long way from her. Upon exa- 
 mination, she was found, in this and other trances, 
 insensible to pain, and her eyes upturned, as in the 
 ordinary mesmeric state, and her limbs continued 
 flexible. At times, she would seem wholly indrawn ; 
 and then she would, as it were, return and speak of 
 what was passing before her mental vision. But, in 
 a subsequent trance, of six hours' duration, she be- 
 came, for a part of it, quite insensible to all outward 
 things, and perfectly cataleptic from head to foot. A 
 gentleman, who was with me on this occasion, as- 
 sisted me to raise her body, and we found it as stiff 
 and inflexible as a log of wood. 
 
 The subject of these trances would afford matter 
 for many pages; but some were of a private character, 
 and, although highly interesting to the parties con- 
 cerned, would not be interesting to others, except as 
 
OR TRANCE. 185 
 
 illustrating the nature of the spirit^s home, and some 
 of the general laws by which spiritual associations 
 are regulated. It was with some hesitation I ventured 
 to publish anything on this subject, in the first edition 
 of this work, knowing that it was calculated to expose 
 the writer to the sarcasms, and, perhaps, contempt of 
 a certain class of readers ; but I knew that there were 
 some persons who would feel an interest in such reveal- 
 ments,and I find this latter class larger than I expected, 
 and not confined to any particular creed or denomi- 
 nation. I, therefore, venture on a somewhat fuller 
 statement, but still very brief. All that I have ob- 
 served in these trances, tends to confirm the distinc- 
 tion between moral good and moral evil, and the im- 
 possibility of those who depart this life in a state of 
 moral evil, attaining hereafter to a state of moral 
 goodness. In this respect, Emma's statements are 
 strikingly dissimilar to those of Davis, the cele- 
 brated American clairvoyant. But, as Davis subse- 
 quently stated, he had not been the subject of extasis, 
 or the ^^ superior state,^^ as he terms it, when he de- 
 livered the lectures, afterwards published under the 
 title of ^^ Nature^s Divine Revelations ; ^^ conse- 
 quently, as he was only in the induced state of ordi- 
 nary mesmerism, he may have, unconsciously, re- 
 flected the minds and ideas of those in mental associ- 
 ation with him. 
 
 A general statement of Emma^s revealments while 
 in the state of extasis, will enable the reader more 
 fully to comprehend the particular details of indivi- 
 dual trances. Man is represented as a spiritual 
 being, rising from what she calls ^' the shell^^ of the 
 dead material body, immediately after death ; or as 
 soon as the connection between the soul and its ma- 
 terial covering is completely severed, which she says, 
 does not sometimes occur, until a day or two after 
 what appears as death. The risen and emancipated 
 spirit, is a perfectly organised existence, preserving the 
 human form, and having a complete sensational percep- 
 tion of his fellow spiritual beings, and of the beautiful 
 
186 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 scenery of tlie spiritual spheres ; that is^ provided he 
 possessed during his natural life^ a moral state in 
 harmony with those spheres. The male and female 
 sex retaining all the characteristics necessary to a 
 spiritual state of existence, and living together in a 
 state of angelic union, being united as to their minds. 
 Those who have been interiorly united here, coming 
 into a state of union hereafter ; those who have not 
 been mentally united here, seek their true mental 
 counterpart hereafter. She represents male and fe- 
 male spiritual beings thus united, appearing at a dis- 
 tance as one, and says they are not called two, nor 
 the married, but the one. Infants and young chil- 
 dren who have passed from this world by death, are 
 stated to grow to a state of adolescence, but more 
 speedily than in the natural world. During infancy, 
 and early childhood, they are confided to the care of 
 good female spirits, or angels, whose delight it is, to 
 instruct them by various methods, especially by repre- 
 sentations of things, which form a sort of pictorial 
 teaching. These spiritual spheres are not located in 
 the distant regions of space, or in the sun, or heavenly 
 bodies ; but are connected apparently with our own 
 planet, and the spiritual inhabitants are in close asso- 
 ciation with us, and exercise an influence over us, 
 although we are unconscious of it. It would appear, 
 that all that is required, in order for men to have a 
 sensational knowledge of their existence, — -that is, to 
 be able to see and hear them, is the closing of the ex- 
 ternal consciousness, and a full awakening of the 
 internal consciousness. In the highest state of ex- 
 tasis, she appeared to herself to be among spiritual 
 beings as one of themselves, at home, and surrounded 
 by objects which to her were real, and which appeared 
 more real, than the shadowy beings, with whom she 
 was naturally associated. At other times, she said, 
 that she appeared to the spiritual beings as shadowy, 
 and her own perceptions were proportionably obscure. 
 The first receptacle, or common plane of departed 
 spirits, she describes as a sort of middle state or place, 
 
EXTASIS, OR TRANCE. 187 
 
 from which the good^ as they become prepared, ascend 
 gradually, to higher and more delightful places; those 
 that are the best having higher abodes than the others. 
 All, she says, are welcomed by angelic spirits on their 
 arrival in the spirit-world ; but the evil will not asso- 
 date with the good, and recede of their own accord, 
 more or less rapidly, to darker places below this mid- 
 dle state, and which appeared also to be to the left : 
 but of these darker places she had not seen so much, 
 as of the abodes of the good. How far the objects 
 presented before the extatic vision are in themselves 
 what they appear to be, or how far they are accommO' 
 dated to the perceptions of the extatic, and, in accord- 
 ance with the suggestion I have thrown out above, 
 are thus presented in agreement with natural ideas, I 
 do not presume to determine : the essence may be 
 spiritual; the appearance natural. 
 
 I have said, that before Emma became the subject 
 of the extatic state, she had, in the ordinary mesmeric 
 state, began to speak frequently of spiritual objects 
 and beings. I soon perceived, that one being, under 
 whose influence she seemed to be, and of whom she 
 frequently spoke, had been most nearly related to me, 
 while in this world, but she had departed this life for 
 about ten years when the first of these trances oc- 
 curred. Emma always says that this ^Hady,^' as I 
 will call her, following Emma^s phraseology, ^^ helps 
 her^^ in all serious cases of illness, and the like, but 
 not in mere secular, or trifling cases. How far this is 
 true I will not venture to say; but, assuming the jf^o^^ifiz- 
 /i^y of such influence, no circumstance would seem more 
 likely. She also spoke of ^fountain of crystal water, 
 in which, she said, the ^Hady^^ bathed her, before she 
 could follow her to behold the scenery she afterwards 
 described. This "lady^^ and ^^fountain^^ she fre- 
 quently referred to, when in the trances, and, by this 
 means, shewed that there was some connection be- 
 tween the states of induced and spontaneous extasis. 
 The following narrative will shcAv that, at least, some 
 of the matters connected with these trances, cannot be 
 
188 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 accounted for by resolving them into mere imaginative 
 action ; but that there is a reality in her extatic per- 
 ceptions, and that she then possesses a super-sensual 
 gift. 
 
 In the month of July^ 1848, she told me, on a 
 Saturday evening, while in the mesmeric state, that 
 the ^^ lady was coming to her, in the night between 
 Sunday and Monday, and that she would shew her a 
 book with some writing in, which she was to take and 
 shew to me;'^ and further, that the " lady would come 
 to her again, at a quarter past nine on Monday morn- 
 ing when she v^^ould know more about it/^ I found 
 her, as usual, on awaking, ignorant of what had tran- 
 spired, and carefully concealed it from her ; but men- 
 tioned it to a friend, whom I requested to be present 
 on Monday morning to witness the trance, should it 
 occur. From the general drift of her remarks, and 
 her connecting the books and the writing with the 
 ^^ lady,^^ I concluded, that, if there was any truth in 
 her statements, one of three books was intended ; two 
 of these were in the house, the other, a small pocket- 
 bible, was not in the house; but experience having 
 convinced me of the correctness of her predictions, I 
 got this little bible, unknown to her, and put it, with 
 the other two books, on the shelves with many more, 
 taking care not to put them together. In the night 
 she got up in a state very similar, if not quite like 
 somnambulism, and descending two flights of stairs, 
 unheard by me, she went to the book-shelves, and se- 
 lected this very pocket-bible, and ascending the stairs 
 with it, came to my room, the opening of the door of 
 which aroused me. She walked up to me, and ad- 
 dressing me in the peculiar way she then used to do, 
 when mesmerised, she said, — '^ I have brought you a 
 book which the Mady^ wishes' you to read to me.^^ 
 She was holding the book open over the top of her 
 head, with the inside of the book next her. This I 
 could see by the twilight; but, as I could not see 
 whereabouts the book was opened, I went to get a 
 candle for that purpose, but, in doing so, owing to the 
 
EXTASIS^ OR TRANCE. 189 
 
 darkness^ I inadvertently knocked the book out of her 
 hand. She picked it up^ and speedily found the place 
 again^ by turning over the pages^ right and left^ over 
 her heady in her usual mesmeric manner^ until she 
 said she had found the same place again. The pas- 
 sage selected was Joshua^ ch. i. vv. 8^ 9.* I read the 
 passage to her ; she said, " Yes ! that is it, — ^ Be of 
 good courage/ that is what the lady reads.^^ When 
 I began to read beyond the tenth verse, she stopped 
 me, saying, ^^the lady did not read that.^^ She appeared 
 quite pleased and relieved by my reading to her, and 
 soon spontaneously awoke. The next morning, she 
 remembered being out of bed, and that I had led her 
 up stairs ; but she did not recollect for what she got 
 out, or where she had been. Frequently afterwards, 
 by way of test, this Bible was given her when mes- 
 merised, and she was asked, before many persons, to 
 point out this text, which she invariably did, without 
 attempting to look at it, but by feeling the pages, and 
 turning them over while the book was over her head. 
 She also told me circumstances connected with the 
 history of that book, which, she said, the lady told 
 her, and in which the " lady^^ was concerned ; which 
 I am positive she could not know by any ordinary means; 
 for some were only known to myself! She was asked 
 to tell by what means she found the passage, as she 
 could not read, and was also in the dark ? She re- 
 plied, that the ^^ 4ady ' had a similar book, but a 
 larger one, open upon the left arm, where it lay with- 
 out any weight, and that the ^lady^ pointed, with 
 the right hand, to the same pages and text : That her 
 own hands seemed guided in their movements by the 
 ^ lady^s^ hand ; and that when she had got to the 
 right place, she could no longer turn the pages, either 
 to the right or left ! ^^ How far this was ffincy, or some 
 
 * *' This book of the law shall not depart out of thy mouth ; but thou shalt 
 meditate therein day and night, that thou mayest observe to do according to 
 all that is written therein ; for then shalt thou make thy way prosperous, 
 and then thou shalt have good success. Have not I commanded thee.' 
 Be strong and of good courage, be not afraid, neither be thou dismayed: 
 for the Lord thy God is with thee whithersoever thou goest." 
 
190 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 real quasi magnetic drawing, it is impossible rightly 
 to determine ; but it is certain^ that on trying her 
 with the same bible a few months afterwards, when 
 she had lost the connecting influence^ she could not, 
 after repeated trials^ find the passage as she previously 
 had done. On the Monday morning, the friend al- 
 luded to came^ as if accidentally^, soon after nine 
 o^ clock, and we observed Emma becoming strange in 
 her appearance ; and, almost to the minute stated, 
 she relapsed into the state of extasis. In this state, 
 she explained how it was she was directed to the pas- 
 sage in Joshua, and many other things of an interest- 
 ing nature, which, to avoid repetition, I omit. She 
 also appeared, at times, to be eating something. 
 
 On Friday, July 14th, 1848, she said, while in the 
 mesmeric state, that the "lady^' wished her to shew 
 me another chapter, and would come for that pur- 
 pose, and that she should ^^ go away'^ again, — that is, 
 into the state of trance, at ten o^ clock on Saturday. 
 From a few words she said, now, and at another time 
 when mesmerising her, I thought the subject was very 
 similar to the vision of Peter, recorded in Acts, ch. x. 
 About four o'clock, on Saturday morning, she came 
 again to me ; but, this time, more in a state of trance 
 than somnambulism. She had the same pocket-bible, 
 and open over her head, at the part I had anticipated. 
 I read the narrative to her : she said, ^^ That was it, 
 and the ^ lady ^ would tell her more bye and bye/^ She 
 then aroused, but partially recollected what had tran- 
 spired, and expressed great fear of something like a 
 lion, which she said came near her, but which the 
 ^' lady^^ said would not be allowed to hurt her. At 
 ten o^ clock she went into the trance, as she had said, 
 in the presence of myself and a friend. This state, 
 like the former, lasted about half an hour. The re- 
 sult of inquiries made in and out of the trance, were 
 briefly as follows: She saw " a great thing^^ coming 
 down out of the clouds to her, suspended at each 
 corner by cords, and the manner of suspension she 
 afterwards shewed with a piece of paper and some 
 
EXTASIS^ OR TRANCE. 191 
 
 sewing cotton. When it was down, it opened, and all 
 sorts of animals and birds, and snakes and adders, 
 got out of it. There were lions^ and other fiercer 
 looking animals, but they all looked kindly at her. 
 One, who stood by, took a bird, and told her to eat : 
 she did so; but it did not seem to hurt the bird. 
 Afterwards, all went back, and up again. I asked 
 her to inquire ichy she had such a vision? Her reply 
 was very singular, and I give it without comment. 
 She said, '^ It was because people were beginning to 
 doubt whether such a thing ever happened, audit was 
 to shew that it was possible and true. No one had 
 seen this since the man who first saw it, but she did 
 not know his name.^^ She also said, that, before this 
 vision, she saw the ^^lady,'^ but was not permitted 
 to touch her, but now she was permitted to touch her 
 too. Also, that she had, for the first time, a white 
 dress given to her, but not so beautiful as the 
 '' lad/s.^^ 
 
 On Thursday, September 28th, 1848, Emma went 
 into a trance she had foretold nearly two months 
 before : this was the most remarkable she had, and 
 lasted nearly four hours, and was witnessed by several 
 gentlemen, besides myself. As there are many per- 
 sons desirous to know the fullest particulars of these 
 remarkable states, I shall transcribe more fully from 
 notes made two days afterwards ; and the general 
 manners, and statements, of this trance, will shew the 
 nature of the others. One o^ clock, p.m., was the time 
 Emma had predicted for this trance. About a quarter 
 before one, she complained of feeling mazy, and looked 
 very strange. I left her, to make some preparation 
 for the length of time I anticipated, from her state- 
 ments, she would be in the trance. I returned to her 
 just after the clock had struck, and found her seated 
 in a chair, partially cataleptic, with her eyes Jixed, 
 wide open, and staring, as it were, into vacuity. I 
 spoke to her ; but, at first, she did not hear* me ; I 
 then saw her eyes roll upwards and inwards, as in the 
 mesmeric state, and then the eyelids closed. She re- 
 
192 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 quested me " not to take her away/^ that is^ not 
 to interfere with the trance, which I promised, and 
 led her to a more convenient place, where she 
 might recline. I found it was with difficulty she 
 could stand, and I had to support her to the seat pre- 
 pared for her. She soon sunk into a complete sort of 
 lethargy; occasionally moving her jaws, as if eating; 
 at other times, speaking, as if to invisible personages : 
 the principal remarks were questions, or such obser- 
 vations as seemed to repeat the answers she had re- 
 ceived. After speaking, she appeared conscious of 
 our presence, and rationally replied to what was said 
 to her, and described what was visible to her percep- 
 tions. Then she relapsed into a state of unconscious- 
 ness to outward things, and, after a time, returned to 
 the consciousness of our presence. These alternations 
 continued to the close; but some minutes before 
 arousing, her manner indicated that a change was 
 passing over her. When she returned to the normal 
 state, she was quite low and prostrated, and it was 
 some hours before she could take any food. These 
 protracted states, although interesting psychologically, 
 were prejudicial to her health, and prevented the use 
 of her ordinary mesmeric powers. The colour did not 
 leave her cheeks during this trance, nor did she be- 
 come cold. I raised the eyelids several times to ex- 
 amine the eyes, and found them always turned up, 
 but manifesting a sort of tremulous, or reflex motion. 
 She was pinched sharply, and suddenly, in various 
 parts of the body, but did not evince the slightest 
 sense of feeling. When asked,— ^^ How do you see 
 me ? like as when you are mesmerised ? ^^ She re- 
 plied, — ^^No; you seem like a shadow, or pale cloud; 
 but I know it is you.^^ ^^ Why can you not see me 
 as before ?^^ "Because you are natural, and I am 
 now higher up.^^ " Can you see my lungs now, — or 
 the things in the room?^\' ''No!^^ A gentleman 
 in the room spoke to her, but she did not notice him. 
 He then took her by the hand, and she at length 
 heard him, and said, '^ She could see him, but only 
 
EXTASIS; OR TRANCE. 193 
 
 like a cloud/^ We enquired^ Can you see those around 
 you in the spirit ^/am/y F She repUed^ ^^ Yes: as plain 
 as men could see each other^ and that everything was 
 real, and that she could touch them^ and feel them, 
 and that they felt to her as solid as we do : but it was 
 not until she saw the sheet with the animals that she 
 was permitted to do so : before she only saw them. 
 She said she was very happy, and did not want to go 
 back agahi^, but knew she was to do so, and felt sorry 
 for it. The following paragraphs contain, in nearly 
 her own words, the substance of what she saw and 
 heard during this, and another similar trance^ as 
 elicited by questions put during, and after, the 
 trance, and from her own recollections of what had 
 transpired. 
 
 ^^ When sitting in the chair, I felt as if something 
 run up me^ and I went mazy, and the room seemed 
 as if it opened, and I was in another place, although 
 I had some knowledge that I was still in the room ; 
 my eyes were open, and I could not shut them. 
 Afterwards, when they were shut, it seemed as if they 
 were open. At first, many beings came to me, and pre- 
 sently I seemed to be with them as one of themselves ; 
 this was after I was removed to the other seat ; for tak- 
 ing me up stairs, seemed to draw me away from them. I 
 did not feel strange, or any alarm, nor did they ap- 
 pear to think ncie strange or different to themselves. 
 I felt with them just as I do now with you. There 
 were many : some that I did not know, and some 
 that I did know; some had been my companions when 
 a child, and had been dead for years, but they knew 
 me, and were glad to see me, and took me about 
 gardens, like paradise gardens. The ^lady^ came 
 first, and many others with her; she was with me the 
 whole time. When I took hold of your hand, she 
 looked and smiled, and seemed pleased. It appeared 
 to me nearly the same each time I have been. I saw 
 each time that, from the place where I entered this 
 
 * Similar expressions to this, and the desire to remain in a spiritualized 
 mesmeric state, is represented by Cahagnet as a desire to commit suicide. 
 
 9 
 
194 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 spirit-world, there was a way leading to the rights up- 
 wards, to the good middle place ; and away to the 
 left, downwards, to the bad middle place, and there 
 was a worse place lower down, but I did not see to 
 it. All along the way leading to the good middle 
 place, there were trees and flowers of various kinds 
 growing, and writings up (inscriptions) in many 
 places. The letters were of diflerent kinds and 
 colours, but I could not tell what they meant. It 
 was told me, that they were directions and instruc- 
 tions, and that I must learn to read, that I may 
 know what they mean. The good middle place 
 seemed very large, and very many were there. Most 
 that were there, staying there, were clothed in plain 
 white loose dresses. I saw higher up, to the top of a 
 hill, where, it was told me, angels lived. I did not 
 go straight up, but slanting to the side ; the angels 
 who came to meet me, came a nearer way than I 
 went. After going to the right, upwards, for some 
 time, I came to a beautiful fountain, or lake {pond, 
 she sometimes called it,) silvery looking. A beautiful 
 brook, or river, flowed from the top of the hill, down 
 into the fountain. I never saw such beautiful crystal 
 and shining water anywhere else. Round this foun- 
 tain,'or lake, and on each side of the river, there grew 
 the most beautiful flowers and trees 1 ever saw. The 
 leaves which fell off" these trees sparkled like gold and 
 silver, as they lay along upon the ground. If a leaf 
 fell off* a tree, another leaf sprang forth directly, and 
 the trees did not become bare, as here. The same, if 
 a flower was plucked, another immediately sprang 
 forth. No one can go up the hill until they have been 
 bathed in that fountain ; I had to bathe in it, and 
 drink the water, before I could ascend; then you 
 could go up on either side of the river. It was in 
 this fountain I saw the beautiful fish I before spoke 
 of, which was given me to eat; and it was in the 
 walks about this river that I saw the fruit grow of 
 which I ate. This fruit they eat as bread, but it is 
 not bread, but most delicious fruit. It is something 
 
OR TRANCE. 195 
 
 like an orange, with seeds in it:^^ — afterwards, she 
 compared it to a pear, sweet, and with seeds in it, — 
 possibly something that seemed like a fig, or pomegra- 
 nate. ^^ After bathing in the fountain, and going up 
 the hill, I came down, and we sat down, round and 
 near the fountain, and eat of the fruit, and many 
 things were shewn and told me. 
 
 ^^ It seems as if the idea of what you should say 
 comes into the mind, and they (the angels) tell you 
 what you want to know. When I got with the angels, 
 I seemed like one who had gone a journey and got 
 home, but I could not tell hoio I went the journey: I 
 only found myself among friends, and comfortable. 
 When I was seated near the fountain, I asked, ^ How 
 people got there ?^ meaning, how they left the world 
 by death. It was told me, that persons were not al- 
 ways dead when their friends thought so ; for all the 
 actions of the body stop by degrees : it was sometimes 
 two or three days after what was called death, before 
 the spirit quite left the body, and rose to consciousness 
 in the spirit- world ; but it was not always alike ; some 
 were a longer, others a shorter, time. During this 
 time, they were like a person asleep, and in a state 
 betwixt this world and the other. The angels can 
 see them before they can see the angels. They stand 
 around them. Angels come down in pairs, two and 
 two : I don^t recollect whether they were all male 
 and female in the twos, but I do recollect that some 
 were. You can instantly distinguish the sex, for the fe- 
 males all have long hair, which flows down their back, 
 and over their shoulders, like a cape ; but both sexes, 
 that I saw, were dressed in long flowing robes. As 
 soon as people rise into the spirit-world, angels talk 
 to them, and tell them where they are, and endeavour 
 to lead them upwards. If they are bad, they yn)! not 
 believe there any more than here, but are stubborn 
 and obstinate. All people first awake in this middle 
 place; the angels call it rest; (probably, resting^ 
 place.) It looked very much like this world; the 
 best middle place appeared about half-way up ; I did 
 
 9* 
 
196 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 not see any houses or dwellings^ but many trees and 
 flowers. 
 
 ^' I wanted to know what became of persons who 
 killed themselves. I was told, that if persons had 
 led a good life, and yet, from trouble of mind, were 
 led to kill themselves, they were kept a long while in 
 the lower middle place, and suffered great punishment. 
 That the angels prayed with them, and helped them ; 
 and that if they had been really good, they would at last 
 come out, and go higher up ; but that they would 
 have to stay a long while, and suffer a good deal, be- 
 fore they could get rid of what they had done. But 
 if the suicides had been bad people, they would never 
 come out, but sink down lower. No one can come 
 out until changed, and these bad ones cannot be 
 changed. 
 
 "I thought that when children, or infants, died, 
 they went to heaven directly, and remained infants 
 for ever ; but, it was told me, that such is not the 
 case. When infants die, they enter the other world 
 as infant-spirits, but they do not remain infants, but 
 grow up to, what we should call, about twenty years 
 of age, and they never become older ; those persons 
 who have left this world in old age, look like persons 
 about forty, or thereabouts. When infants enter the 
 other world, they are given in charge of female angels, 
 who take care of them, and instruct them. These 
 angels do not feel it any trouble, but a pleasure, to 
 instruct them. I saw some of the schools high up, 
 near the top of the hill. The little children were all 
 quite naked, and set in a circle, and the teacher in 
 the midst. I saw them with books. I saw children, 
 not bigger than a few months old here, walking 
 about ; the angels teach them to walk, and they learn 
 everything quicker than we do here. When they 
 grow bigger they have clothes, and go to masters to 
 learn. 1 did not sec the masters^ schools ; I am to 
 see them when I go again. I saw into the gardens, 
 but was not permitted to enter them. 
 
 ^' Governess told me, that if infants were not bap- 
 
EXTASIS, OR TRANCE. 197 
 
 tized, they would wander about^ and go neither to 
 heaven nor hell. But it was told me^ that this is not 
 true, and that infants go to heaven whether they are 
 baptized or not. If they are not baptized here, they 
 are baptized in the fountain, hereafter. Baptism 
 here is proper and useful, because it puts the name of 
 Jesus on them. Baptism should be in the name of 
 Jesus. There is a white, stone-looking thing, hol- 
 lowed out, into which the water flows from the foun- 
 tain, and they are dipped in there. I saw a representa- 
 tion of a grave to the right, near the garden, but they 
 did not call it a grave, but a sepulchre. There was 
 water oozing through into it. There was a stone in 
 front of it, which was drawn up, or vanished away \ I 
 did not see how it went. I looked into the sepulchre, 
 and saw the water running in. It was told me, that 
 Jesus was baptized by John, and afterwards in the 
 sepulchre, I did not see the body of Jesus, but was 
 told that he lay there, and was baptized by the water. 
 I was also told, that the baptism of infants here, was 
 like the baptism of Jesus by John ; and that the bap- 
 tism of infants near the fountain, was like the baptism 
 of Jesus in the sepulchre.^^ 
 
 Emma had predicted another long trance, which 
 occurred on the 7th of November, and lasted nearly 
 six hours : it was in this trance she became so univer- 
 sally rigid. For the week previous, she had been 
 quite abnormal in her manner, wishing to be very 
 quiet and alone; several times she went spontaneously 
 into the mesmeric state, and then her language shewed 
 that she was occupied with the forthcoming extasis ; 
 but in her wakeful state she knew nothing of it, and 
 referred her feelings to bodily ailment. Once I found 
 her singing a sort of infantile rhyme ; on asking the 
 reason of her doing so, she replied, — '^ I am ouly 
 singing with the little children under the trees/' Of 
 this trance I have only preserved shorter notes. She 
 said : — '^ I felt mazy, and then all went dark^ and then 
 became Vtght, I first saw^ four little lambs, which were 
 yoked in pairs to a sort of carriage, and passed 
 
198 SOxMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 rapidly by me, to the right; as before, the ^lady/ 
 and others, came to meet me. We went by the 
 fountain I before saw, and further on, towards the 
 gardens. I then saw a sort of large palace, and I 
 went towards the door, and sat down, because I felt 
 tired with the long way ; I did not feel tired before, 
 nor did I go so far. While sitting, tired with the 
 way, some came and touched me, and said — ^rest:^^ 
 and I no longer felt tired. I got up, and went into 
 the garden, — into four gardens, — all of which were 
 beautiful. Some of the walks seemed as if gravelled, 
 and some as if formed of scales of silver; but it was 
 not gravel nor silver. I saw many pigeons [doves ?] 
 flying about among the trees, and beautiful fruit 
 growing there. The fruit was given me to eat; it 
 was most delicious, of the shape of a pear, but dark- 
 coloured inside, juicy, and full of seeds. I walked in 
 the garden for a long while, and saw many there. At 
 the end of the last garden I saw a school, taught by 
 masters. All the children were dressed. The females 
 had fuller dresses than the males, and they were all 
 in white. They had books, and seemed to read out 
 of these books, and learned very quickly ; much more 
 so than here. 
 
 ^^ When near the palace I saw a sort of carriage 
 come down from above to the ground, it was a kind 
 of orange colour. There was a beautiful angel in it, 
 clothed like the rest, it seemed only one angel in the 
 carriage and at stepping out, but afterwards I saw 
 two, and it appeared as if the female issued from the 
 male. When I saw two I was nearer to them, than 
 when I saw one, but I was never close to these angels. 
 I wanted to know what the carriage was, and what 
 it meant? It was told me, that it was the one^s 
 carriage ; and then I wanted to know what was meant 
 by one ? They said, the meaning was, that when a 
 male and female angel willed the same, and were both 
 of the same mind, Jesus made them one, and then 
 they called them TJie one ; they called it united, but 
 I did not hear it called married. In subsequent 
 
EXTASIS^ OR TRANCE. 199 
 
 trances she has frequently spoken of this scene^ 
 and once said she saw a pair made one, by having 
 their fingers linked together^ and a blessing put upon 
 them^ and that all who were made oney seemed to go 
 into this carriage. 
 
 ^^ I saw the sepulchre again — (she called it the 
 cemetery, until corrected^ and before could not get at 
 the full sound of the word^ until from her half-pro- 
 nunciation I understood what was meant^ and pro- 
 nounced it to her.) It looked something as before^ 
 but not quite like it ; there were angels around it^ 
 clothed in white ; and I saw John there, and he ap- 
 peared, to be dressed richer than the angels : he was 
 a tall pale looking man, with a mild countenance. 
 But I was told that the dress in which the angels ap- 
 peared was not their true dress, but the dress suited 
 to their appearance at the sepulchre. In heaven 
 they are dressed according to their state : the clothes 
 are not taken on and off as here, but seem to belong 
 to the person of the angel, and change, by seemingly 
 vanishing away. John touched the lid of the sepul- 
 chre, which then opened. The lid seemed as if made 
 of fine marble, but it was not marble. I saw water 
 oozing through as before, and, at the bottom of the 
 sepulchre, clothes lying, folded carelessly. {^^ In a 
 ruck^' — she said — a Lancashire phrase for things 
 heaped together disorderly.) They appeared to be 
 striped with different coloured lights, and from them 
 stars issued, and seemed to ascend and fix themselves 
 on a white marble thing at a little distance ; they 
 were stars with points and shone brilliantly. Pre- 
 sently all the stars seemed to unite in one very bril- 
 liant star, and then the marble thing spread open 
 very wide, and from the points of this centre star, 
 other stars issued in all directions, and lighted up all 
 the heavens, and gave light everywhere. I asked 
 what these things meant ? It w as said to me ^ Speak 
 not,^ I felt grieved, as if I had done wi'ong, but 
 John touched me and said ' Grieve not ;' and I then 
 ceased to grieve. After all this had vanished, I was 
 
200 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHESISM. 
 
 told that it had reference to the resurrection of Jesus^ 
 and was a sign or token to the angels that He had 
 risen/^ I have used the term angels, as she did; but 
 it is evident, that she meant the same as good spirits; 
 the term angel, in her language, being synonymous 
 with the perfected spirit of a good man. 
 
 Since the time to which the above notes refer, 
 Emma has had similar states of extasis, and foretold 
 them in the same way, but none have been of the 
 same spiritual or religious character. One of her re- 
 vealments, of which she has spoken in two, if not 
 three trances, is very curious, and connected with her 
 former visions; and being a subject on which Locke 
 speculated, I give a summary of her statements, with- 
 out offering any opinion as to the probability or cor- 
 rectness of it. Before a trance which occurred in 
 January of this year, she said, in foretelling it, that 
 she should know something aboat still-born children. 
 The revealment was as follows. If the foetus died 
 before *' it had stirred,'^ it was not immortal, because 
 the soul or spirit was not sufficiently developed to 
 have an independent life. But when it ^^ had stirred/^ 
 and acquired this independent life, then it had the 
 germ of immortality. If it died at any time from this 
 period, but before birth, it was transferred to the 
 spirit-world, but did not mix with those children who 
 had breathed or taken food here. The latter had by 
 this means become fully developed. They were placed 
 in a sort of downy receptacle near ^' the gardens,'^ 
 where the children were seen. Here they remain for 
 a time equivalent to the period of gestation, and are 
 then, as it were, born into the spirit-world. Matronly 
 female spirits had charge of this receptacle, and knew 
 when any of these young immortals were to be re- 
 moved. She said, she once saw four of these female 
 spirits carrying one of these infants in a sort of 
 couch, formed by the slight union of their fingers and 
 the folds of their robes, and they took it and bathed 
 it in " the fountain,^^ and then it could walk, and mix 
 with the other infants* 
 
EXTASIS, OR TRANCE. 20 1 
 
 I took occasion^ in these later trances^ to question 
 her on the most intricate points of physiology ; but I 
 found that she had no perception, or could derive no 
 information, on some points, but in others she had; 
 such as the action of life in the brain, and the course 
 of the currents in the body. I also found that matters 
 on which I had enquired in the mesmeric state, were 
 sometimes referred to, and she has told me when those 
 states of extasis would arise, in which she could learn 
 things that she could not know by ordinary mes- 
 merism. These, generally, were cases in which some 
 person involved in the enquiry, had departed this 
 life. 
 
 In one case, where, as an experiment, an enquiry 
 was being made relative to a missing will, she told 
 me, not only what I asked her, but spoke of other 
 things which neither myself nor she knew anything 
 about, nor had I been asked about what she said; but 
 I was afterwards informed that what she said was 
 correct. This was a description of some old furniture, 
 and some bags with money in, in an Irish town, the 
 existence of which things was perfectly unknown to 
 me ; but they were connected with the missing docu- 
 ment, and Emma professed to derive her knowledge of 
 the existence of these things, from the spirit of the de- 
 parted. She asked me about the removal of this money, 
 as if I knew of it. ' My correspondent afterwards in- 
 formed me of the correctness of Emma^s statements ; 
 but refused to continue the inquiry, from a supersti- 
 tious dread of holding communication with the dead. 
 This case, as far as it went, was an excellent one, 
 to prove the continued existence of man after death. 
 I was desired by a gentleman to investigate 
 a mysterious murder which occurred nearly twenty 
 years ago. No particulars whatever were communi- 
 cated to me, beyond that some bones which were 
 sent me, were found in a very peculiar manner, and 
 that there were reasons for supposing them to be the 
 bones of a person long missing. I am precluded 
 from going into the particulars of this case, further 
 
 9** 
 
202 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 tlian that I founds from subsequent letters^ that the 
 the skull was fractured in the part she said it was ; 
 that the bones were in the condition and found in 
 such a place and manner as she described, and that 
 her description of the supposed murderer,, corres- 
 ponded exactly with an individual suspected ! I ex- 
 pended a good deal of time on this case^ on account 
 of its interest^ and as another test of clairvoyance, 
 and for the satisfaction of the gentleman^ who had 
 himself taken much trouble to procure the bones^ and 
 a portion of the clothing of the missing man, as a 
 medium of enquiry. Emma several times spoke of 
 this affair in the trance state, and, from the general 
 correctness of her statements as far as the circum- 
 stances are known, it would seem that the whole 
 transaction was gradually made known to her, and 
 that she saw in the trances, a representation of the 
 occurrence. As I said before, in respect to lost pro- 
 perty, my object in these instances, was not to meddle 
 with matters of police, but to test the faculty which 
 Emma possesses. I have not therefore made enquiry 
 or published statements relative to recent murders, as 
 was commonly reported, and I only now mention the 
 above, as an instance where the state of extasis en- 
 abled Emma to know through the departed, as she 
 said, the nature of an awful transaction, which she 
 knew nothing of in the normal state. Another curi- 
 ous feature in enquiries where departed persons were 
 involved, was observed. She would sometimes speak 
 of these persons, and say she could see them, but that 
 she could not communicate with them, because they 
 had not gone away long enough, or had not passed into 
 the proper state; and she has fixed the time, when, she 
 said, such communication could be had, in conformity 
 with what she represented as the law of the spirit- 
 world. 
 
 Should the foregoing notes be displeasing to some 
 readers, or be considered derogatory to the character 
 of a book professedly written to discuss the subject of 
 mesmerism, on scientific principles, let it be remem- 
 
EXTASIS, OR TRANCE. 203 
 
 bered^ that in endeavouring to set forth the science of 
 the soul, as revealed by mesmerism^ it was scarcely 
 possible^ and certainly would not be just to the reader, 
 to suppress those revealments which most directly 
 bear on the subject of the souFs nature, its continued 
 existence after separation from the body, and the na- 
 ture and laws of the world in which it dwells. As 
 observed at the outset of these notes, the writer is in 
 these cases but a reporter, andthat report will be judged 
 according to the reader^s faith, inclination, or know- 
 ledge. The moral tendency of such revealments can- 
 not be questioned ; they seem to afford a key to un- 
 lock some of the mysterious narratives of the New 
 Testament, or at all events, are suggestive of an ex- 
 planation, and they tend to remove much of that 
 superstitious dread, which is entertained of another 
 life. I would just observe, by way of allaying the 
 suspicions of the strict Protestant reader, that t?ie 
 doctrine of a middle, or intermediate state, was an 
 article of faith in the primitive church, and has been 
 stated by learned divines, to be meant by the clause 
 in the Apostle^s Creed, ^^ He descended into heir^ — 
 or Hades ; and that in none of these trances, have I 
 observed anything to countenance the Romish notion 
 of Purgatory. 
 
CHAPTER X. 
 
 PRACTICE AND USE OF VITAL MAGNETISM, OR MESMERISM. 
 
 The direct use of vital magnetism^ or mesmerism, is 
 as a Curative Agent, to alleviate and remove human 
 suffering. In this view it is of universal application, 
 and at all times available. Numerous authentic cases 
 are on record, and many more are known in private 
 circles, where the most remarkable cures have been 
 effected by magnetic treatment only, after the ordinary 
 medical remedies have proved useless. And, what is 
 well for suffering humanity, the soothing, healing in- 
 fluence of vital magnetism may be adequately received, 
 without the coma, or loss of consciousness requisite for 
 displaying merely amusing experiments. Cerebral lu- 
 cidity or clairvoyance, is a faculty only occasionally 
 developed in individuals of peculiar constitution, and 
 as already intimated, its most legitimate and certain 
 use, is as a means of assisting the medical practitioner 
 in his diagnosis of inward disease. 
 
 The practice of mesmerism or vital magnetism as a 
 curative agent, is a very simple process ; the induction 
 of the state of coma, or the mesmeric sleep, is equally 
 simple, but generally requires more continued applica- 
 tion But I am led to conclude, from such experience 
 as I have had, that the result depends more on the 
 peculiar constitution of the subject, than on the sup- 
 posed power of the magnetiser, or mesmeriser. Some 
 patients yield to the influence at the first sitting; 
 others, after continued trials, remain comparatively, 
 insensible to its influence. All that is required as 
 preliminaries to success, consists, in patience, a proper 
 disposition, quietness, and freedom from disturbance. 
 Let the subject sit or recline in the easiest and most 
 comfortable posture. The operator should be seated 
 in front, and then calmly take both hands of .his pa- 
 
PRACTICE OF MESMERISM. 205 
 
 tient in his left hand, placing his right hand on the 
 patient *s head, and steadfastly look at the patient^s 
 eyes, throwing, as it were, as much of his influence 
 into them, as possible, which will be eff'ected by a 
 concentration of purpose, and a determination to do 
 good. After retaining this posture for a few minutes, 
 let the operator move his right hand gently forwards 
 and downwards over the patient^s face, and down to 
 the waist ; the hand and finger points may either be 
 passed at a distance of about one inch from the pa- 
 tient, or the fingers may gently touch him. After 
 reaching the waist, withdraw the hand about ten or 
 twelve inches from the subject, and^ in again elevating 
 it, hold the fingers backwards, and incline them for- 
 wards again when the hand reaches the patient^s head, 
 and then pass downwards as before. These are what 
 are understood by Mesmeric Passes. The patient 
 should keep his eyes steadily fixed on those of the 
 operator, and yield himself unreservedly to his influ- 
 ence. If this course is persevered in for twenty or 
 thirty minutes, some efifect will generally be observed; 
 and if the subject is susceptible, or a sensitive, the 
 ^^ sleep^^ may be induced even at the first sitting. 
 This is the method I generally pursue, and is the most 
 simple, and as successful as any other. Some have 
 given a variety of directions, as to holding the thumbs, 
 pressing in the shoulders, and other modes, which to 
 me savour of quackery and mystery; besides being, in 
 my estimation, useless. Sometimes, when I have 
 made the passes downwards for some time, looking at 
 the patient, and have not found them yielding to my 
 influence, I have closed the patient^s eyes, and pressed 
 the fingers of my right hand gently on the eyelids, and 
 retained them there for a few minutes, at the same 
 time concentrating all my eff*orts. This succeeds with 
 some patients, better than the continual stare. If it 
 is desired to save so much personal labour, or to pre- 
 pare the patient for the mesmeric sleep, he may be 
 directed to stare fixedly for some time daily, at some 
 small distinct object, such as a pencil case, or small 
 
206 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 magnet, held, or fixed near the eyes ; but I do not re- 
 commend this mode^ as it is attended with a painful 
 sensation, and causes some determination of blood to 
 the parts; and has, I think, a tendency to weaken the 
 optic nerves. 
 
 It may be desirable sometimes to combine the odylic 
 force^ and terrestrial magnetism, with the influence of 
 vital magnetism. In this case, let the patient be seated 
 in a shaded room with a southern aspect, and a brass 
 wire be carried out into the bright sunshine, and the 
 other end be held in the patient^s left hand, and re- 
 tained there ; or else the point occasionally directed to 
 painful parts, during the sitting. If the room has not a 
 southern aspect, the wire should be carried round until 
 fully within the range of the sun^s rays. The operator 
 may proceed with the passes, while the patient holds 
 the wire, in the manner above directed. If it is de- 
 sired to combine terrestrial magnetism also, or the 
 odylic influence which flows from the magnet, a 
 powerful horse-shoe magnet may be suspended over 
 the patient^s head, who should be seated with his back 
 to the north, and looking towards the south east, so 
 as to be as nearly as possible in the line of the varia- 
 tion of the compass. The operator must now take a 
 bar magnet in his right hand, holding the north pole 
 just level with the tips of his fingers, and then make 
 the passes downwards, as above directed. The appli- 
 cation of these subtile influences, may also be combined 
 with the use of common electricity, by either insulating 
 the patient, and forming the electrical bath, or by the 
 gentle transmission of the electric aura. 
 
 As a general rule, more striking and speedy effects 
 may be expected when the ^^slcep^^ can be produced; 
 but it should never be forgotten, that coma is not ab- 
 solutely required in order to produce soothing and 
 curative effects. When the object is to relieve pain, 
 or remove disease, first try to produce the simplest 
 state of coma, by the means already pointed out. If 
 the patient does not speedily feel soothed or drowsy, 
 or even if he should fall into the coma, then simply 
 
PRACTICE OF MESMERISM. 207 
 
 make passes with the right hand^ or with both hands^ 
 downwards y slowly and gently over the parts affected ; 
 allowing the fingers lightly to touch the person of the 
 patient^ and taking care to shake the hands ivell after 
 each pass, just as if you were shaking something off 
 them. This action may be smiled at by the incre- 
 dulous and inexperienced in these matters ; but it is 
 absolutely necessary, for if it is not done, the labour of 
 the operator may be thrown away, even if he does not 
 increase the malady of his patient. I have had proof, 
 that in certain conditions of the nervous system, dis- 
 ease may be introduced into the body, and transmitted 
 by passes from one subject to another. For the same 
 reason, the operator, after leaving a patient afflicted 
 with a painful disease, should invariably, not only well 
 shake his hands, but wash them, and hold them, if 
 possible, for a short time under a stream of running 
 water, before he ventui^es to magnetise another pa- 
 tient. 
 
 It is in nervous diseases that the influence of vital 
 magnetism is most felt, and in none more speedily 
 than in painful nervous headaches. In this case, the 
 sufferer may, in ordinary cases, relieve himself, without 
 the aid of an operator; but the magnetizer^s influence 
 is generally most powerful. In these, and similar 
 affections of the head, I have found the greatest bene- 
 fit to arise if the passes were made in the course of 
 the sinuses of the dura-mater, and probably, because 
 the vital currents act on the venous currents within 
 the sinuses. In these cases, the passes should be 
 made, with both hands placed close together, from the 
 forehead over the crown of the head to the nape of the 
 neck ; here gently press the fingers and then separate 
 the hands^ and draw each hand gently forwards under 
 the ears and down the neck, and then shake off the 
 influence. Begin again from the forehead, passing 
 horizontally backw^ards over the ears, until the fingers 
 again meet in the nape of the neck, and then forwards 
 and downwards as before. This will generally relieve 
 headache in five or ten minutes, if properly performed. 
 
208 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 If the patient unexpectedly go into the state of ^'sleep^^ 
 or '' coma/^ no fear need be felt. Fresh patients will 
 generally awaken spontaneously^ after a short time of 
 apparent unconsciousness ; but if they do not awake^ 
 by continued upward and backward passes, from the 
 chest over the face and head, or by upwardly fanning 
 the face, the patient will be aroused. Some pass the 
 thumbs quickly along the eyebrows from the nose, 
 outwards, and blow, or throw water in the face; but 
 such proceedings, will be scarcely ever, if at all, neces- 
 sary. 
 
 But, besides mere headache, the influence of vital 
 magnetism, or mesmerism, may be most beneficially 
 applied in all nervous diseases; — in incipient and 
 partial insanity ; giddiness and stupor ; delirium tre- 
 mens, and other afl'ections of the brain ; in all painful 
 nervous diseases of the body ; neuralgic affections, 
 rheumatism, lumbago, sciatica, and gout ; and in 
 most diseases of the internal organs. And in all ap- 
 propriate cases the magnetic, or mesmeric, influence, 
 will be more effectual, if combined with appropriate 
 medicines, especially if these medicines are impreg- 
 nated with the vital magnetic and odylic influence. 
 But in carrying out a vital magnetic, or mesmeric, 
 mode of treatment, the whole intention must be of a 
 soothing, strengthening, and, in some cases, of a 
 gently stimulating character. None of the old system, 
 — of excessive bleeding, bUstering, setoning, and pur- 
 ging, must be allowed. In fact, there is little doubt, 
 but that, under this once common system, many pa- 
 tients, labouring under diseases of the lungs, have 
 been sent to a premature grave : and that many have 
 died, who would have stood a chance of recovery it' 
 they had been left entirely to nature. There can be 
 no doubt, and, in this case, I am speaking from posi- 
 tive experience, that by the mode of treatment pointed 
 out, all curable diseases may be removed in the quick- 
 est, safest, and pleasantest manner. In this mode, 
 the physician is labouring to impart a healthful vigour 
 to the living nervous system, and is thus acting in 
 
PRACTICE OF MESMERISM. 209 
 
 accordance with the principles of nature in curing 
 disease. But^ while censuring the old practice of 
 medicine in the cases above named^ fairness obliges 
 me to say that equal blame attaches to some enthusi- 
 astic mesmerists^ who^ from their partial knowledge^ 
 are led to despise and misrepresent all medical treat- 
 ment. The very circumstance of true clairvoyants 
 prescribing medicines, proves, that those most under 
 its influence perceive mesmerism to be only onCy 
 among other means, of restoring and preserving 
 health. 
 
 The practice of mesmerism, or vital magnetism, 
 ought, like that of medicine, to be considered, as a 
 sacred calling, too important to be made into a mere 
 show, and, except in some instances, fitted only for 
 the control and direction of the responsible and edu- 
 cated medical practitioner; but it cannot be expected 
 that medical men should generally be the actual mes- 
 merisers, as, if they are to be remunerated on the 
 same scale as their professional brethren, they would 
 not be able to bestow sufficient time. To carry fully 
 out the uses of mesmerism as a curative agent, re- 
 quires a class of properly adapted and trained male 
 and female mesmerisers, to act under the super- 
 intendence of qualified medical practitioners; and, 
 perhaps, it w^ould be most successfully practised in 
 establishments similar to hydropathic institutions, 
 where all the advantages of such an establishment 
 would be combined with more general means of 
 cure. 
 
 In compliance with custom, I have used the gene- 
 rally adopted terms of mesmerism, or vital mag- 
 netism, in describing the influence flowing from the 
 human body, and its use. The first is unmeaning ; 
 the second is apt to convey the idea that the influence 
 is identical uith terrestrial magnetism. Reichenbach 
 has given the term odyle to this influence, considering 
 it the same as that flowing from the activity of light, 
 heat, and chemical action. This I consider very 
 doubtful. That the influence flows from the bodv is 
 
210 SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM. 
 
 certain ; no less certain, I am induced to think, is it, 
 that the mind influences the body, and is the primary- 
 agent in this action. As I have adopted the classical 
 and Scripture term psyche, to signify that part of the 
 spiritual organism more immediately concerned in 
 mesmeric, or vital magnetic phenomena, and have 
 thence suggested Psycheism as a proper term for the 
 knowledge of the soul and its properties, obtained by 
 this means ; I considered, that if a name of kindred 
 sound could be found, that would convey an idea both 
 of the nature of the influence and of its source, it 
 would be better than using an unmeaning, or wrong, 
 one. Hence, in the first edition of this work, I pro- 
 posed to call this soothing and healing influence, 
 Parapsycheism, from the Greek words, parapsyche, to 
 soothe, or comfort, and psyche, the animal-soul, or 
 mind. Parapsycheism would, therefore, signify that 
 soothing influence that flows from the mind in con- 
 nection with the body ; and to transmit this influence, 
 would be to parapsycheise, — not psycheise, as stated 
 in the ^^ Zoist.^^ If these words were adopted, we 
 should have two euphonious terms, having a definite 
 and appropriate meaning, instead of the present un- 
 meaning and erroneous ones; and custom would 
 soon reconcile both the eye and ear to their form and 
 use. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 Illustrations of the activity of the Internal Me- 
 mory. — In the Autobiography of Sir John Barrow, it is stated 
 that the late Lady Spencer wrote to him, requesting his 
 influence to procure a copy of a letter written by Admiral, 
 then Captain, Beaufort, to the late Dr. W. Hyde Wollas- 
 ton, describing his own sensations and thoughts, of body 
 and mind, while in the act of drowning, when a young 
 man, in Portsmouth Harbour. This letter is highly in- 
 teresting, and remarkably corroborative of the existence of 
 the internal memory which becomes consciously active, in the 
 higher and more interior stages of the mesmeric extasis; it is, 
 also, strikingly in harmony with what I have repeatedh' ob- 
 served; namely, that in the state of extasis, there is some- 
 times presented before the internal memory, a sort of phan- 
 tasmagoric representation, in which the occurrences of 
 years appear compressed into the compass of as many mi- 
 nutes or seconds. The letter is as follows, and appears to 
 have been written about 1825. — " Dear Dr. Wollaston. — 
 The following circumstances, which attended my being 
 drowned, have been drawn up at your desire; they had 
 not struck me as being so curious as you consider them, 
 because, from two or three persons, who, like myself, had 
 been recovered from a similar state, / have heard a detail 
 of their feelings^ which resembled mine as nearly as icas 
 consistent with our different constitutions and dispo- 
 sitions, 
 
 " Many years ago, when I was a youngster on board 
 one of His Majesty's ships in Portsmouth Harbour, after 
 sculling about in a very small boat, I was endeavouring to 
 fasten her alongside the ship to one of the scuttlings ; in 
 foolish eagerness I stepped upon the gunwale ; the boat, 
 of course, upset, and I fell into the water, and, not knowing 
 how to swim, all my efforts to lay hold, either of the boat 
 or the floating skulls, were fruitless. The transaction had 
 
212 APPENDIX. 
 
 not been observed by the sentinel on the gangway, and, 
 therefore, it was not till the tide had drifted me some dis- 
 tance astern of the ship, that a man in the foretop saw me 
 splashing in the water, and gave the alarm. The first 
 lieutenant instantly, and gallantly, jumped overboard, the 
 carpenter followed his example, and the gunner hastened 
 into a boat, and pulled after them. 
 
 With the violent, but vain, attempts, to make myself heard, 
 I had swallowed much water ; I was soon exhausted by my 
 struggles, and, before any relief reached me, I had sunk below 
 the surface — all hope had fled — all exertion ceased— and I 
 felt that I was drowning. So far, these facts were either par- 
 tially remembered after my recovery, or supplied by those 
 who had latterly witnessed the scene; for, during an interval 
 of such agitation, a drowning person is too much occupied 
 in catching at every passing straw, or too much absorbed 
 by alternate hope and despair, to mark the succession of 
 events very accurately. Not so, however, with the facts 
 which immediately ensued; my mind had then undergone 
 the sudden revolution which appeared to you so remarkable 
 — and all the circumstances of which, are now as vividly 
 fresh in my memory as if they had occurred but yesterday. 
 "From the moment that all exertion had ceased — which 
 I imagine was the immediate consequence of complete suf- 
 focation — a calm feeling of the most perfect tranquility 
 superseded the previous tumultuous sensations, — it might 
 be called apathy, certainly not resignation, for drowning no 
 longer appeared to be an evil, — I no longer thought of 
 being rescued, nor was I in any bodily pain. On the con- 
 trary, my sensations were now of rather a pleasurable cast, 
 partaking of that dull, but contented sort of feeling, which 
 precedes the sleep produced by fatigue. Though the senses 
 were thus deadened, not so the mind ; its activity seemed 
 to be invigorated in a ratio which defies all description, — 
 for thought rose after thought, with a rapidity of succes- 
 sion that is not only indescribable, but, probably, incon- 
 ceivable, by any one who has not himself been in a similar 
 situation. The course of these thoughts I can even now, 
 in a great measure, retrace ; — the event which had just 
 taken place, — the awkwardness which produced it, — the 
 bustle it must have occasioned (for I had observed two 
 persons jump from the cliains), — the effect it would have 
 on a most affectionate father, — the manner in which he 
 
APPENDIX. 213 
 
 would disclose it to the rest of the family, — and a thousand 
 other circumstances minutely associated with home, — were 
 XhQJirst series of reflections that occurred. They took then 
 a wider range ; — our last cruise, — a former voyage and 
 shipwreck, — my school — the progress I had made there, 
 and the time I had misspent, — and even all my boyish 
 pursuits and adventures. Thus travelling backwards, every 
 incident of my past life seemed to me to glance across my 
 recollection in retrograde succession ; not, however, in 
 mere outline as here stated, but the picture filled up, with 
 every minute and collateral feature ; in short, the whole 
 period of my existence seemed to be placed before me in a 
 kind of panoramic review, and each act of it seemed to be 
 accompanied by a consciousness of right or wrong, or by 
 some reflection on its cause or its consequences ; indeed, 
 many trifling events, which had been long forgotten, then 
 crowded into my imagination, and with the character of 
 recent familiarity. 
 
 "May not all this be some indication of the almost in- 
 finite power of memory with which we may awaken in 
 another world, and thus be compelled to contemplate our 
 past lives ? Or might it not, in some degree, warrant the 
 inference that death is 07ily a change, or modification, of 
 our existence, in which there is no real pause or interruption. 
 But however that may be, one circumstance was highly re- 
 markable, that the innumerable ideas which floated into 
 my mind were all retrospective ; yet I had been religiously 
 brought up — my hopes and fears of the next world had 
 lost nothing of their early strength, and at any other pe- 
 riod, intense interest and awful anxiety would have been 
 excited by the mere idea that I was floating on the thresh- 
 hold of eternity ; yet at that inexplicable moment, when I 
 had a full conviction that I had all already crossed that 
 threshold, not a .'single thought wandered into the future. 
 I was wrapt entirely in the past. The length of time that 
 was occupied by this deluge of ideas, or rather the short- 
 ness of time into which they were condensed, I cannot now 
 state with precision, yet certainly two minutes could not 
 have elapsed from the moment of suflbcation, to my being 
 hauled up. 
 
 The strength of the flood tide made it expedient to pull 
 the boat at once to another ship, where I underwent the 
 vulgar process of emptying the water, by letting my head 
 
214 APPENDIX. 
 
 hang downward, then bleeding, chafing, and even admi- 
 nistering gin ; but my submersion had been really so brief, 
 that according to the account of the lookers-on, I was very 
 quickly restored to animation. 
 
 " My feelings while life was returning were the reverse, 
 in every point, of those which have been described above. 
 One single, but confused idea — a miserable belief that I 
 was drowning — dwelt upon my mind, instead of the multi- 
 tude of clear and definite ideas which had recently rushed 
 through it — a helpless anxiety — a kind of continuous night- 
 mare, seemed to press heavily on every sense, and to pre- 
 vent the formation of any distinct thought, and it was with 
 difficulty that I became convinced that I was really alive. 
 Again, instead of being absolutely free from all bodily pain, 
 as in my drowning state, I was now tortured with pain, all 
 over me ; and though I have been since wounded in several 
 places, and have often submitted to severe surgical disci- 
 pline, yet my sufferings at that time were far greater, at 
 least in general distress. On one occasion I was shot in 
 the lungs, and after lying on the deck at night for some 
 hours, bleeding from other wounds, I at length fainted. 
 Now as I felt sure that the wound in the lungs was mortal, 
 it will appear obvious that the overwhelming sensation 
 which accompanies fainting, must have produced a perfect 
 conviction that I was then in the act of dying. Yet 
 nothing in the least resembling the operations of my mind 
 when drowning then took place ; and when I began to re- 
 cover I returned to a clear conception of my real state. 
 
 " If these involuntary experiments on the operation of 
 death, afford any satisfaction or interest to you, they will 
 not have been suffered quite in vain, by Yours, very truly, 
 F. Beaufort." 
 
 This letter of Admiral Beaufort (says Sir John Barrow) 
 must give rise to various suggestions. It proves that the 
 spirit of man may retain its full activity — we may perhaps 
 say, an increased activity — when freed from the trammels 
 of the flesh, at least when all the functions of the body are 
 deprived of animal power, and the spirit has become some- 
 thing like the type and shadow of that which we are taught 
 to believe concerning the immortality of the soul. 
 
 The reader will perceive one essential difference in the 
 experience of Admiral Beaufort and the results of the mes- 
 meric extasis, inasmuch as he could recollect in the ordi- 
 
APPENDIX. 215 
 
 nary state of outward consciousness, what had transpired in 
 the state of inner consciousness ; but this, as already shewn, 
 occurs after the state of spiritual extasis or trance, and the 
 Admiral's case is another illustration of the state of trance, 
 and of the higher mesmeric state, being analogous to par- 
 tial death. 
 
 As another instance of the crowding of the events 
 of a series of years into the perceptions of a few minutes, 
 I may mention the following case. I had occasion to send 
 Emma, mentally, to see a lady who resides in view of the 
 Castle in Edinburgh. Some months afterwards, the lady 
 with her husband called on me in Bolton. Emma was put 
 into the mesmeric or psychic state, inthe lady's presence, and 
 she unexpectedly, near the close of the sitting, told her, 
 that when she came to see her, she was attracted by a large 
 old house or building on a hill, and that she saw things 
 there at which she was much frightened. From some re- 
 marks, it was evidently the old castle that she meant, and 
 she spoke of seeing a very high lady there, to whom people 
 went down upon the knee, but that notwithstanding her 
 rank she was very unhappy, for she was very fond of the 
 priests, and her husband and the people did not like them. 
 She then, evidently went over the times of Mary, Queen of 
 Scots, spoke of the domestic troubles, &c., the ancient fur- 
 niture of the castle, and the tapestried rooms in which Mary 
 had dwelt, and eventually spoke of her decapitation. Her 
 description of the dresses, &c., was most graphic, and quite in 
 character with the times. But what was most singular, she 
 said that she did not see the persons and things she de- 
 scribed, for she knew that the persons had been "shelled" — 
 that is dead, for a great many years ; but she saw the marks 
 of what she spoke. Hence it would seem that the mere 
 spot, could recall the long train of eventful occurrences. 
 She was asked why she went into the castle ? but this she 
 could not answer. When in Edinburgh myself, I went into 
 the castle, and walked round the ramparts, but did not go 
 into any of the rooms ; I also walked round Holy rood 
 House, but did not enter the palace. The gentleman who 
 witnessed this sitting, thought that my having been so 
 lately in the castle was tlie cause of Emma being attracted 
 towards it ; this may be so ; but 1 had not at any time 
 sent her there, or said anything to her of Scottish history ; 
 and however attracted, her mind could not have been many 
 
216 APPENDIX. 
 
 minutes drawn to the subject, as I, apparently, fully occu- 
 pied her at the sitting alluded to with the lady's case. 
 
 A SINGULAR Dream, illustratiye of the Law of 
 Mental Association. — On the morning of the twenty- 
 first of February, 1851, I received a letter from London, 
 from my sister there; but as the direction was in a rounder 
 hand than usual, and I had no expectation at that time of 
 receiving a letter, I did not discover who the writer was, 
 until I had opened the letter. Emma saw the letter lying 
 on the table, and desired me not to open it, which I was 
 about doing. As soon as the absence of the servant 
 allowed her to tell me privately, she said she had had a 
 curious Dream about a letter, and she wished me not to 
 open the letter, until she had related it to me. She said 
 she dreamed that she saw a letter lying on something like 
 a table; it was unopened, and she had a perception from 
 the direction that it was for me. She then saw a man 
 standing in a thoughtful position, as if looking at her or 
 the letter ; but she knew that he was in some way or other 
 connected with the letter. In reply to a suggestion of 
 mine, she did not think it was the postman whom she saw. 
 Presently her attention was arrested by some noise in ano- 
 ther apartment, and on looking in, she saw, what appeared 
 something like a funeral party, and a coffin with a male 
 corpse in it, and the persons in the room were alarmed 
 because the corpse would not lie still, but kept moving the 
 arms, and rising up. She said to them, " Let me go in ; I 
 am not afraid of a corpse ; send for the man to screw the 
 coffin up, and I will keep him (the corpse) quiet." Then, 
 very oddly, she took a bunch of keys, and jingled them to 
 the corpse to keep it quiet, as might be done to an infant 
 in a cradle ! Her attention was now drawn away from 
 this room, to where she had seen the letter, which she saw 
 again, and the man standing by it also, but with the usual 
 incongruity of dreams, the man and the corpse seemed, 
 somehow, the same. But now the letter appeared as if 
 opened before her, and she saw that the envelope con- 
 tained two sheets of note paper, written upon, and that 
 one of these slieets had a piece, — about half a leaf, cut off; 
 and that there was a plain piece of paper besides in the 
 envelope, which appeared to be cut off the sheet. Just at 
 this time she was accidentally awakened by my daughter, 
 
AITKNDIX. 
 
 217 
 
 who sleeps with her, and the dream seemed us if inter- 
 rupted, or prematurely closed. 
 
 I now again examined the envelope, which was tightly- 
 sealed and evidently untouched, and indeed, it had not 
 been delivered half an hour. On breaking it open, I found 
 to my surprise, that the contents were exactly as she de- 
 scribed them, as seen in her dream! There were two 
 sheets of note paper, written upon ; one with a piece cut 
 off, about a quarter of the sheet : and a piece of plain pa- 
 per, apparently of the same kind, and fitting to the cut 
 portion ; but not quite so large as the portion removed. 
 Here, then, was unmistakeable ocular demonstration of 
 the correctness of the images presented in the dream. But 
 this, although the most sensible proof of the certainty of 
 unknown facts being presented to the mind in sleep, was, 
 perhaps, not the most interesting circumstance. The first 
 paragraph of my sister's letter referred to the recent decease 
 of a cousin, a Parochial Clergyman in Suffolk. Here was 
 the equally evident reason for the association, in the dream, 
 of a death-scene with the letter. But neither the envelope 
 nor its contents were of mourning paper, so that there was 
 nothing externally, to lead to the idea of mourning or deatli. 
 
 I have observed, that Emma's common sleep often 
 partakes of a mesmeric character, inasmuch as I have 
 frequently been obliged to make demesmerising passes 
 before she could be aroused. I concluded, therefore, 
 that if I mesmerised her, I should learn some further 
 particulars. In the evening I did so ; and she now knew 
 all about it. She saw the letter as in her dream, and the 
 " man" also ; but she now recognised him as a gentleman 
 I had a good while ago sent her to see, and she reminded 
 me of what she then told me. This was an experiment I 
 made more than two years since, in sending her in the 
 ^' sleep" to see my late cousin, and the correctness of her 
 remarks as to some papers, &c., was confirmed in a letter I 
 afterwards received from him. She said this gentleman 
 had not long " shelled," (died,) wliich was correct. That 
 he was one who had been in the habit of preaching, and 
 that his removal was much lamented. That he was a good 
 man, and she saw him rising out of the '' middle place." 
 In the mesmeric state, she saw that the dream was only a 
 sort of representation. The movements of the corpse were 
 significative of the rising of the spirit, and the jingling o/ 
 the keys, had reference to a door she saw. which wa-=^ only 
 
^ 1 8 APPENDIX. 
 
 a representation ; as the passage from one state to another 
 was like going through a door, but not really so. She 
 now said, that she had seen my sister also, during the night; 
 but she has never yet seen her personally. 
 
 Here is a curious concatenation of circumstances. Emma 
 says, that she had mentally seen the writer of an unex- 
 pected letter : she accurately describes the form of the con- 
 tents of the envelope, from what she saw in her dream, and 
 she connects this with the death of a gentleman. Clearly, 
 then, the train of ideas was obtained from the mind of the 
 writer, who was two hundred miles off; at least, no other 
 mode of accounting for such a dream seems so simple or 
 reasonable. But this admission as clearly recognises the 
 possibility of mental association, although the bodily pre- 
 sence of the parties is far removed from each other, and 
 one party is unconscious of the connection. This case 
 illustrates the modus operandi of Mr. Willey's case, and 
 others, referred to in the work. As to the post-mortem 
 state of the gentleman referred to, of course, we can have 
 no means of sensibly proving or disproving Emma's state- 
 ments. But from the character and past occupation of the 
 gentleman, and the harmony of Emma's account with the 
 whole tenor of her extatic revealments, we may rationally 
 conclude, that here also, she may have had a true vision. 
 And we may consider this as another proof of what may be 
 called the spiritual side of mesmerism, and the short comings 
 and error of Atheistical Materialism. 
 
 Dr. Vaughan on Miracles, &c. — It has been already 
 stated in general terms, at pp. 83 and 203, that a right psy- 
 chical interpretation of the higher magnetic or mesmeric 
 phenomena, is calculated to throw light on some of the 
 most remarkable narratives in the gospel history. The 
 delicacy of the subject, and the fear of being misunder- 
 stood or misrepresented, was the reason, why this point 
 was only just glanced at. My attention has, however, re- 
 cently been directed to the observations on Miracles, in 
 Dr. Vaughan's " Age and Christianity," which I have 
 perused with much pleasure and interest. The learned 
 Doctor's views are not altogether new ; but still, I believe 
 new to, and perhaps in advance of, general theological 
 opinion. ** We are not prepared to believe, that the ulti- 
 mate end of the existing system, will consist in anything 
 merely physical — in any set of relations between cause 
 and effect in material things. We must suppose, that the 
 
APPENDIX. 219 
 
 physical, in general, is designed to be the servant of the 
 moral, no less certainly, than the body of man is designed 
 to be the servant of the soul. If so, who can affect to 
 comprehend the whole purpose of Deity in relation to the 
 universe ? Who can, in consequence, be competent to say 
 to what extent it has been expedient, or may again become 
 expedient, to subordinate the physical laws of the present 
 
 system to moral ends ? To ' contradict,' to ' violate,' 
 
 to ' reverse ' if you please, a physical law for a moral 
 reason, may be as much an act of wisdom as the origina- 
 tion ; and in place of bespeaking a contradiction or incon- 
 sistency in the mind of Deity, as the argument now under 
 examination supposes, it may only be a new indication of 
 the immutability of the divine purpose, in seeking the 
 highest ends by the best means, subordinating, with this 
 view, the less to the greater, the material to the spiritual. 
 
 But further, — Suppose it should be made to appear 
 
 that a miracle is not, as is here assumed, the ^iolation of a 
 law of nature ? Suppose it could be shewn that a miracle 
 is simply a natural effect, following from some special 
 relation given to purely natural causes ? Would not a 
 miracle, in this case, cease to be a ' contradiction ' in the 
 sense asserted, and so cease to be an ^impossibility?' 
 Now this is surely conceivable. Events, taking with them 
 all that we intend by the term miracle, may be, in so far 
 as their immediate causes are concerned, strictly natural. 
 By a miracle, then, we do not understand even a suspen- 
 sion, much less a violation of natural laws, but simply, such 
 a control of natural causes as bespeaks the intervention of 
 a cause to which they are all secondary and obedient. 
 The old relations of cause and effect remain strictly as they 
 were, but a new power has come in, capable of giving a 
 particular direction to natural causes, so that a particular 
 event follows ; and as no one can doubt the power of the 
 Divine Being so to interpose himself, if we suppose him to 
 exist, the whole question, whether there may be miracles 
 or not, resolves itself into another, viz., — whether there 
 maybe a God or not? — (Age and Christianity, pp. 88 — 91.) 
 If I understand the Doctor's reasonings, what is generally 
 considered as a miracle, and, therefore, incomprehensible, 
 may be only an event, proceeding from the operation of a 
 law not generally known, or recognized, but which law 
 may be as fixed and determinate in its action, as what are 
 called the natural laws of the universe. A miracle is, 
 
220 APPENDIX. 
 
 therefore, properly, what the original term dynamis^ and 
 the Latin, miraculum, from whence our word miracle, im- 
 plies, — a powerful act, a wonderful occurrence, and '^ a mys- 
 tery;" because, according to the true meaning of that term, 
 a thing not yet understood. Without calling in question 
 the possibility of the immediate intervention of Deity, it 
 appears to me quite clear, that some of the miracles of the 
 New Testament require no immediate intervention, but 
 simply the operation of the superior, spiritual, or psychical 
 law ; and the existence and nature of that law is indicated 
 by the observed phenomena of vital magnetism and extasis. 
 It is not meant by any statement here made, to deny the 
 Divine Agency, or that the Saviour acted by His own 
 power, and His disciples in His name ; but, that this 
 power, or agency, was manifested by a law still operative. 
 
 Take the instance of the Transfiguration. How clumsy 
 and perfectly gratuitous is the assumption of Dr. Adam 
 Clarke and others, who have supposed that Moses and 
 Elias were furnished for the occasion with new material 
 bodies, to be seen by the disciples, and then to be dissipated 
 in an instant ! How clear is it, that the occurrence was an 
 extatic vision, in which, for the time, the outward natural 
 sense was closed, and inner vision opened, by which they 
 not only saw the "spiritual bodies" of Moses and Elias, 
 but the Divine spiritual body of their Master! When the 
 inner vision closed, they saw " no man, save Jesus only," 
 and Him in His ordinary appearance. 
 
 Take again, the appearance of the Saviour to the dis- 
 ciples, after his resurrection, when they were assembled in 
 the closed room. How plain is it, from the strictest letter 
 of the Sacred Narrative, that, notwithstanding "a spirit 
 had not flesh and bones as he had," yet that, from the mode 
 of His appearance and disappearance, and the various for 7ns ^ 
 under which He appeared, that His divine, or, as the 
 Apostle calls it, " glorious body," had nothing like the pro- 
 perties of fixed, inert matter attached to it! Here, again, 
 the simple opening and closing of the extatic vision ex- 
 plains the whole mystery; and also, that of his eating with 
 them, and apparent atmospheric ascent from Bethany to 
 heaven, — an event so opposed to the now known physical 
 constitution of the universe. If it be said, that the dis- 
 ciples tliought, or believed, they saw these things by ordi- 
 nary vision, — perhaps they did think so; possibly they 
 could not liel{) it, unless they had been controlled by persons 
 
APPENDIX. 221 
 
 in the normal state, who could have informed them of the 
 change which had, unconsciously to themselves, passed 
 over them. Facts are not less facts, because they are not 
 such as vulgarly comprehended. 
 
 In the cases of healing, we also see certain means 
 adopted, though apparently inadequate to the result. Two 
 blind men followed Jesus (Matt. ix. 27), and besought him 
 to give them sight. He '' touched their eyes ^' and "their 
 eyes were opened," and they saw! He '' touched the eyes'' 
 also of the two blind men sitting by the wayside near 
 Jericho (xx. 34), and '' immediately their eyes received 
 sight." To restore the blind man at Bethsaida (Mark viii. 
 23), " He spit on his eyes^ and put his hands on him J' 
 When the lame man was cured at the temple gate, Peter 
 and John ^'fastened their eyes upon him,'' and Peter, took 
 him by the right hand and lifted him up" (Acts ii. 4, 7). 
 When Paul perceived that the cripple of Lystra (Acts xiv. 
 8) ^' had faith to be healed," he "steadfastly beheld him, 
 while he cried with a loud voice. Stand upright on thy 
 feet!'' Possibly it would not be too much to infer, that 
 from the differing narratives of the Sacred Historians, 
 some significant action was performed at every cure, al- 
 though not expressly mentioned. It is not meant that Jesus 
 could not have performed the cures without these significant 
 actions, but we must conclude that these actions were dictated 
 by perfect wisdom, and that the best means were adopted. 
 
 Dr. Vaughan says (page 90), *' Suppose sight to be given 
 to the blind, hearing to the deaf, and even life to the dead ; 
 it is here to be remembered that as there are natural causes 
 which produce blindness, and deafness, and death, so there 
 are natural causes which give sight, and hearing, and life. 
 Hence, a miracle, may be no more than the putting of one 
 set of these causes into action in place of another." Whe- 
 ther the doctor means that the parties stated in the New 
 Testament history to be raised to life, were not really dead, 
 in the common acceptation of the term, I know not ; we 
 liave no evidence in either of the recorded cases, of any 
 organic change, or decomposition, and we know not how long 
 life may sometimes be latent in the body. Still, tliat these 
 miracles were genuine, in the true sense of the word, and such 
 as only superhuman power could effect, is, I think, certain. 
 
 Confirmation of the Theory of Sleep, from 
 Baron Reiciienbacii. — After the manuscript of this work 
 was in the printer's hands, Professjor Gregory, of Edin- 
 
222 APPENDIX. 
 
 burgh, very kindly sent me a copy of his elegant transla- 
 tion of Baron Reichenbach's '' Researches in Magnetism, 
 Electricity, &c., in their relation to the Yital Force." I 
 was, on perusing it, much gratified to find such a general 
 harmony with the results of my own experiments ; the 
 difference, where it exists, being such as might be expected 
 to arise from a different mode of investigation. Not the 
 least remarkable thing to me, was, to find the Baron indi- 
 rectly substantiating the doctrines I have inculcated, as to 
 the relative activities of the cerebrum and cerebellum, 
 during wakefulness and sleep! If what I have stated is 
 correct, and the odylic influence proceeds with greater or 
 less energy from different portions of the cerebral mass, 
 during wakefulness and sleep, it must proceed in the way 
 the Baron says it does. So that the clairvoyant physiology 
 of the brain, and the Baron's researches, in this particular, 
 mutually corroborate each other. At p. 200, No. 266, we 
 read, — " There is a greater anatomical difference between 
 forehead and hindhead than between the two sides of the 
 brain, and I was desirous also to investigate this. The ob- 
 servation was twice made, each time for twenty-four hours, 
 on the 19th and 20th of October, and the result is given in 
 fig. 7, pi. ii. (In the plate, the curves represent the odylic 
 influence rising in the hindhead, almost in exact proportion 
 to its fall in the forehead, and vice versa; so that the great- 
 est depression of the one very nearly coincides with the 
 greatest elevation of the other.) The difference here ap- 
 peared in the form of stronger polar opposition. The fore- 
 head, in general, was cold, the hindhead very warm, and 
 not only in human beings, but also in animals. The patient 
 observed it in the cat of the house; and when taken to my 
 stables, also in horses and cows; the depression in the back 
 of the neck, in the latter, being especially hot to her. The 
 human forehead rose quickly in the morning, with the grey 
 light of dawn, was little affected by the two periods of hun- 
 ger, and reached its maximum after sunset. During all 
 this time the hindhead remained nearly stationary; so that, 
 at 6 P.M., it stood where it had been at 6 a.m. But now 
 it began to rise, almost exactly at the time that the forehead 
 began to fall. From this point the lines cross each other; 
 that of the hindhead rising till 3 a.m., while that of the 
 forehead falls till about the same time; at which one reaches 
 its maximum, the other its minimum. From this time 
 tlmy again pursue oj)posite courses; and while the hind- 
 
APPENDIX. 223 
 
 head, which at 3 a.m. is very high, rapidly falls, the fore- 
 head, which at 4 a.m. is very low, begins to rise with equa 
 rapidity. No. 267. This play of forces is the image of our 
 sleeping and waking. The forehead represents the waking 
 state, the hindhead, that of sleep. The former becomes ac- 
 tive from the first peep of dawn, and increases till sunset. 
 It then loses the supply of odyle, derived from the sun, and 
 sinks continually till the new day breaks, when its force 
 again begins to rise. On the other hand, the hindhead 
 rests nearly motionless during the prevalence of daylight 
 [the Baron means motionless, as respects the emission of 
 odylic influence], but as the sun sinks below the horizon, 
 its hour for labour strikes. The Morpheus then rises, and 
 with rapid steps mounts up, till the first traces of early 
 dawn remind him that the forehead is on its way to relieve 
 its w^atch. The hindhead, at the close of night, falls as 
 continuously and rapidly to its lowest level, as was the 
 case with the forehead at the close of day. They are, 
 therefore, not only oppositely polar, the forehead being 
 cool and negative^ the hindhead warm and positive ; but 
 they are also diametrically opposite in the exercise of their 
 functions, as are day and night, waking and sleeping. 
 268. Vitality is just as active during sleep as in the waking 
 state ; its direction only is changed. The phenomenon of 
 sleep is governed by the posterior part of the brain, pro- 
 bably by the cerebellum^ while the forehead ceases from its 
 mental labour ; and when the forehead again, under the 
 influence of the solar rays, resumes its activity, the hind- 
 head relinquishes its claims on the vital energies." 
 
 '^ No. 269. Fig. 4, pi. ii., exhibits a small, but not unim- 
 portant confirmation of the above. On one occasion I be- 
 came sleepy soon after dinner, and leaning my head on the 
 back of my chair, and fell asleep for ten minutes. During 
 this sleep, as well as shortly before it and shortly after it, 
 Mile. Reichel (one of the 'sensitives' employed in these 
 experiments,) had examined the state of my hand. The 
 figure gives the result of these observations, made between 
 4 and 5 p.m. The force of my hand, instead of steadily rising, 
 as on all other days at this period, made an anomalous leap 
 downwards, after which it resumed and continued the normal 
 rise. The short nap in which I had indulged, had been suf- 
 ficient to cause a very sensible inversion of odyle in my per- 
 son. As long as I slept, the force in my hand rapidly sank; 
 the ordinate, representing it, became shorter, and only 
 
224 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 lengthened again when I had awakened, and all the vital 
 functions had once more entered on their former course." 
 
 The harmony of these results with the office and activi- 
 ties of the cerebrum and cerebellum, as pointed out in 
 Chapter III., will be obvious to every attentive reader. 
 The Baron may be right in making the relative activities 
 of the forehead and hindhead depend on the reception of 
 odyle from the sun ; but he appears to have overlooked the 
 greater influence of vital chemistry in producing the results 
 enumerated. The cerebrum presides over the faculties of 
 intellectual and animal life ; and tience, while the activity 
 of these faculties prevailed, the odylic influence of the fore- 
 head prevailed ; when sleep was induced, the intellectual 
 and animal faculties became quiescent, but the vegetative^ 
 organic functions proceeded with greater, because uninter- 
 rupted, activity ; hence, also, the odylic influence in the 
 hand sank, while it rose in the cerebellum. 
 
 Development of New States in Emma. — The reader 
 will have perceived the gradual development of Emma's 
 lucid powers, as narrated in Chap. V. It does not seem 
 that the full powers of the human mind are yet displayed ; 
 and hence, our investigations in this branch of knowledge, 
 will assume more of a progressive, than a finished character. 
 Towards the close of 1850, after the MS. of the foregoing 
 sheets were placed in the printer's hands, Emma had some 
 peculiar states of semi-trance, in which she said that fur- 
 ther changes were coming over her, and that she would be- 
 come yet more lucid, so as to see by the internal lucid 
 faculty when awake. It will be recollected, that when so 
 far demesmerised as to be consciously lucid, her eyelids re- 
 mained closed, and the eyeballs turned upwards and in- 
 wards, shewing that she was still partially under the mes- 
 meric influence. The first time I witnessed this new 
 faculty, or further development of the old one, was on 
 Monday, the 17th of February, in this year. She had a 
 perception of the time of the approaching change on the 
 previous Saturday, saying, in the mesmeric state, that she 
 kept hearing, or had the impression of liearing, the words, 
 "After Sunday, Monday," — and that she perceived it meant, 
 that on the day following the next Sunday, she should experi- 
 ence a change, and that, until that change occurred, she should 
 not possess her usual lucidity. Indeed, she had not sufti- 
 cient lucidity then, even to perceive me, her mesmeriser. 
 
 On the Monday, I found her very dull and heavy ; hardly 
 
appp:ndix. 
 
 225 
 
 able to keep herself awake. About 10 a.m. I put her in 
 the " sleep," and was then informed, that the change had 
 passed over her, and that the fibres of her brain had fallen 
 more forward, and that the forward movement was now 
 communicated to the cerebellum. That if I asked her re- 
 specting such subjects as Franklin, or " other proper 
 things, but not everything," and did not fully understand 
 her, and was to take her by the hand, and question her 
 when demesmerised and fully awake, she should be able to 
 recal the vision in her wakeful state ; but I could not under- 
 stand whether she meant, that she should remember the 
 mesmeric vision, and thus be able to recal it. At half-past 
 twelve I put her in the " sleep" to try this, and gave her a 
 letter written by Captain Austin, the commander of the 
 expedition in search of Sir J. Franklin, and desired her to 
 find the writer if she could. After a short time taken in 
 travelling and searching, she seemed to have done so, and 
 spoke very cheerfully, as if to the captain ; presently she 
 said, as if still speaking to him, *'I must go and see my old 
 friend, Franklin." She professed to speak to him also, and 
 said he was farther from England than Captain Austin. 
 She again had a perception of time, and stated the hour at 
 both places, and the difference with the time in Bolton, 
 gave a western longitude of 101 ° to 102° to Franklin, and 
 93° to 94° to Captain Austin. She again spoke of Frank- 
 lin being relieved by a " whiteheaded man," but now said 
 it was not Sir J. Ross. On demesmerising her, I asked 
 her if she could remember anything she had told me ? but 
 found, that, as usual, she did not. 1 then took her by the 
 hand, and looked at her, so as to avoid mesmerising her, 
 and said, — Can you see Franklin's ships now ? She said 
 not ; but presently she shrieked, clung to me, and exhibited 
 evident signs of terror. I endeavoured to allay this ; and, 
 when sufficiently calmed, she said. That suddenly the walls 
 of the room seemed to vanish, and to change to high white 
 hills (icebergs?) and rocks, with snow piled up. Then an 
 old man looking at her, who was reclining on a sort of 
 bench, or box; his cheeks looked puffed, but sunken. 
 Heard a noise, as of animals '' grunting." 8cc. I inquired, 
 Do you know the old man, or have you seen him before? 
 She replied, that she had not seen him before, and tliere 
 seemed to be no identification in her mind, with the Frank- 
 lin of her mesmeric sleeps. She begged of me to remove 
 the vision, if possible, as she felt so terrified. I observed tluit 
 
226 APPENDIX. 
 
 her heart was beating violently, and made quick transverse 
 passes before her eyes, and over her right hand, to change 
 the currents, and the vision soon disappeared. In the 
 afternoon I tried again, but found it produced such violent 
 excitement of the heart, that I was obliged to desist. 
 
 On the 19th of February, I had her in ^"the sleep" for 
 a medical purpose, when she suddenly spoke of seeing 
 Franklin, the ships, the ice, &c. This was the first time I had 
 heard her speak of the vision coming to her^ as she has had to 
 travel, as it were, to the person sought. This may have 
 been a mere re-excitation of the images in her memory ; 
 but it was so far interesting, as she said, that in the after- 
 noon, between two and three o'clock, she should see this 
 aivake^ without my mesmerising her. I found, on demes- 
 merising her, that she did not recollect what she had said, 
 and, to ascertain the correctness of her pre-vision, I did not 
 tell her ; but took care to be in the room about that time, 
 that I might, unobserved, watch the result. About half- 
 past two, she was endeavouring to write a copy, when she 
 complained of feeling strange, and presently said, she felt 
 as if the copy-book had jumped into her bosom, and would 
 not feel satisfied that something had not been put there, 
 until she removed her dress to search ; and even then the 
 sensation, or impression, remained. On another occasion, 
 I noticed a precisely similar sensation ; and the professional 
 reader will, I have no doubt, conclude, with the writer, 
 that some great impression had been made on the solar 
 plexus of organic nerves, which caused the imaginative 
 feeling of something being put into her chest. 
 
 Presently she ceased speaking of the sensation in her 
 bosom, gave a start, and shrieked aloud. I desired her to 
 be tranquil, and dispel her alarm, and seated myself by her 
 side to assure her. She said, the room again suddenly ap- 
 peared to open, and yet she was perfectly aware of the 
 place she was in. Tliis vision lasted about half an hour, 
 when she relapsed into the mesmeric state, from which I 
 aroused her in the usual way. From her vivid exclama- 
 tions and descriptions, it seemed as if a moving panorama 
 of detached scenes was passing before her, and each scene 
 seemed to vanish, and then, after a short pause, to be suc- 
 ceeded by another. She said, she felt as if going round in 
 water, — now a deep rolling sea, — water — water — nothing 
 but water ; no land to be seen ; — now two ships under 
 sail, — a pause; — sees people in the ships; — now sees the 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 227 
 
 same person she saw on Monday noon, when awake, 
 but he looks plumper, and his hair darker, — knows now 
 that it is Franklin. — Now it is getting dark and dismal. 
 Suddenly she exclaimed — Oh! oh! and seemed excited and 
 alarmed.*^ I inquired, What is the matter? Oh! such a 
 large fish jumped up there, or something like a fish. Now 
 I see the ships fast in ice ; there are three near together. 
 Another exclamation of, Oh ! oh ! and clinging to me for 
 security. Oh! what are those sparks jumping up? Oh I I 
 am so frightened. Ts this the place where the rainbows 
 come fronl? Here Emma began to give a vivid description 
 of the Northern Lights, as if really visible to her, starting 
 and clinging to me, as the scintillations shot forth. I en- 
 deavoured to calm her, by explaining these lights to her. 
 She again spoke of Franklin as being alive, but said she 
 could see many buried under the snow. Whether this is 
 to be considered an original vision, or a projection of the 
 images stored up in the mesmeric condition of the brain, is, 
 perhaps, difiicult to determine. This vision would seem to 
 be a representation of Sir John's voyage across the Atlantic, 
 and up Baffin's Bay to the polar regions, and then to be 
 mixed up with the present state of the voyagers. In this 
 vision, she spoke of seeing persons dressed in skins, as 
 somehow connected with Franklin. These I took to be 
 Esquimaux. As to the safety of Sir J. Franklin, I can 
 only repeat, what has before been said, that if Emma has 
 not confounded the present with a former expedition that 
 he undertook, and mixed up the occurrences of both voy- 
 ages, the presumption is, that he still survives. I have 
 since tried her with an old letter of Sir John Boss', which 
 carried her (mentally) to various places, before she followed 
 him to the Arctic regions, and she has confirmed her state- 
 ment above given, that Sir John Ross is not the '* white- 
 headed man" she spoke of She says, that he is not fiir 
 from Franklin, but cannot see him for the '^ ice Iiozises;" 
 meaning, probably, the intervening lands covered with ice 
 and snow, or the icebergs. She described Sir John Ross 
 as a whiteheaded man, in a small ship, and as being an old 
 friend of Sir J. Franklin. 
 
 Emma described the person who had met with Franklin, 
 as coming in a very little ship, not '' a proper ship,'' she 
 said ; and also, as not coming from England. She also re- 
 peatedly spoke of a sort of iron knife, or keel, connected 
 with this little ship. The whole of these statements ap- 
 
228 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 peared very mysterious, and puzzled me to account for 
 them. But in March, of the present year, the publication 
 of a letter from Captain Pullen, commanding a boat expe- 
 dition in search of Franklin, of which I was ignorant, 
 throws some light on the matter. This letter was dated, 
 July 16th, 1850, and the writer states his intention to en- 
 deavour to reach Banks' Land, from the mouth of the Mac- 
 kenzie River. It is just possible that he may have done 
 so, and been fortunate enough to meet with the object of 
 his search. Since reading this letter, I have asked Emma, 
 and compared her present with her former statements, and 
 it would seem, that this is the relieving party that she 
 meant. She accurately described the skin dresses of this 
 party, and sufficiently explained what she meant by the 
 epithet of " white-headed ; " but as this was after I had 
 read the letter, I think less of it, as I am always fearful of 
 her reflecting my ideas, or getting the train from my me- 
 mory. I merely record it for the sake of comparison, 
 when the events are known. It may turn out, that the 
 party she spoke of, on the 19th of February, whom I 
 took to be Esquimaux, may be Capt. Pullen's party. 
 
 After a few days' occasional exhibition of the faculty of 
 wakeful lucidity, Emma lost it ; but it again returned, and 
 I have now observed it many times. She has frequently 
 spoken of various internal parts of the human organism, as 
 visible to her, especially portions of the brain ; the course 
 of the blood; the form of the blood corpuscles; the condition 
 in some states of disease, &c.: but she has not fully con- 
 quered the feelings the vision occasions, and complains of 
 sickness, if it remains more than a few minutes at a time. 
 It would appear, that objects are seen singly, in the order 
 tliat the mind is directed towards them, and greatly magni- 
 fied. While looking at any inward portion of the body, 
 the outer portions and investments seem, for the time, as if 
 absent, or transparent. I asked her, in one of these states, 
 if slie distinctly saw the paper on the walls of the room ? 
 She replied tliat she did, but that the pattern seemed im- 
 mensely large, and so strange, that, but for memory, she 
 should scarcely have known what she was looking at. In 
 the mesmeric state, this perception of increased magnitude, 
 docs not seem to exist, or it does not interfere with the 
 vision. Emma could not say how slie saw, only that every- 
 tliing appeared liglit. 
 
 Repeatedly, when 1 have had Emma in the '' sleep" and 
 
APPENDIX. 229 
 
 she has forgotten the name of a person, or place, or been 
 unable to pronounce a word properly, she has instinctively 
 placed a finger on the top of her head, near to the spot 
 marked as ^'firmness," when she could recollect the for- 
 gotten name, or pronounce the required word. Observing 
 this, when I have found her unable to pronounce aright, or 
 forgetful of a name, I have placed my finger there, and the 
 same result has followed. Sometimes, she has found her- 
 self unable to pronounce words beginning with " W," and 
 has substituted a ^'B," but, on pressing with the finger, she 
 could utter the proper "W sound. The interchange of the 
 sounds of Wand B, as the finger was pressed on the cranium, 
 or removed, has frequently produced very amusing results. 
 In the lucid wakeful state just mentioned, Emma first disco- 
 vered the reason of this instinctive action, for by thus using 
 the fingers, she said, she pressed on ^* memory," which she re- 
 presents as located in one of the ganglia under the cerebrum. 
 But an investigation of this subject I reserve for another work. 
 Mr. Atkinson and Miss Martineau on the " Laws of 
 Man's Nature and Development." — When about half 
 the foregoing sheets were printed, the writer had the oppor- 
 tunity of perusing the above-named work. The perusal 
 led him to re- consider the principles he has adopted and 
 advocated ; — viz.. The existence of a Great First Cciuse, as 
 the Creator and Sustainer of the universe ; the recognition 
 of universal law in nature, as the manifested expression of 
 the Creator's will ; and the spirituality, yet true substanti- 
 ality and immortality of the human soul. According to 
 these gifted authors, such a belief is but a relic of super- 
 stition, having no foundation in fact : a God is but a theo- 
 logical fiction : atheism, the only faith worthy of a philo- 
 sopher. Paley's argument for a designer, from the unmis- 
 takeable design and adaptation displayed in nature, is a 
 weak and silly thing. Nature, we are told, is but the re- 
 sult of development and law. And, what is the strangest 
 thing, perhaps, with an open and exultingly avowed atheism 
 and materialism, we have an admission of the highest psy- 
 chical phenomena ; such as pre-vision, presentiments, or 
 even actual vision and perception of the death of indivi- 
 duals in remote parts of the country, and the highest mani- 
 festations of clairvoyance ! This is not the place, even if 
 space permitted it, to enter into a formal examination of 
 what appears to me, in many places, as but mere self-com- 
 placent assertions, totally unproved, and, perhaps, capable 
 
230 APPENDIX. 
 
 of refutation, from other portions of the work. But I de- 
 sire most explicitly, to enter my protest against the views 
 inculcated, believing them to be as diametrically opposed 
 to the truths of mesmerism, which these writers espouse, 
 as to the truths of Christianity which they deny. And, 
 after a careful consideration, I see no reason to abandon 
 the position I have taken, feeling persuaded, that what- 
 ever difficulties attend the full comprehension, or under- 
 standing, of these abstruse subjects, they will not be less- 
 ened by the adoption of materialism. 
 
 It may serve to give piquancy to their remarks, but is, 
 I think, scarcely worthy of such writers as Mr. Atkinson 
 and Miss Martineau, to confound the notions of a popular 
 theology, derived from a too literal interpretation of Scrip- 
 ture, and the dogmas of the dark ages, with a rational be- 
 lief in the great truths of religion. Assuredly it is 
 possible to hold the latter, without consenting to any 
 particular formula of theological dogmas. A firm be- 
 liever in Scripture, may see, that all theology, must, of 
 necessity, be on one side human ; that is, the language of 
 theology must embody the human apprehension even of 
 divine truth. It is not, then, unreasonable to expect, that 
 an enlarged development of theology will accompany the 
 enlarged and growing perceptions of philosophical Chris- 
 tians. Besides, for some of the popular '^ absurdities," 
 as they style them, the Scriptures are not answerable. 
 For instance, creation, in the Scripture sense, does not 
 mean a making of something out of nothing, as may be 
 seen by an examination of the Hebrew word. Philo- 
 sophy, and not Moses, is accountable for that " absurdity." 
 Atheism and Pantheism alike proceed from an oversight, 
 or ignorance of the laiv of degrees^ to which I have briefly 
 adverted in Chapter IV. 
 
 It is a gross abuse of language, to limit the term sub- 
 stance, to such forms and conditions as we usually associ- 
 ate with the term matter. Not one of the properties 
 usually spoken of in defining matter, are discernible in the 
 imponderable elements. We here see, that differcut orders 
 of substances have laws and properties peculiar to them- 
 selves ; and the observed eficcts of mind, shew that it has 
 a law and properties, distinct again from those of the im- 
 ponderable elements. Let the idea of mind, as a sub- 
 stantial existence, manifesting itself by certain definite 
 effects, be further elevated and purified, by the withdrawal 
 
APPENDIX. 231 
 
 of limitation and derivation, and we then have a conception 
 of an infinite, substantial, and self-existent God. With 
 the admission of a God, all nature becomes to us a series 
 of affirmative propositions, mutually confirming each other. 
 Law is, then, an intelligible term ; for we have a percep- 
 tion of the power that is working by law ; whereas, law, in 
 the materialistic, or atheistic, sense, is either an adynamic 
 energy, if such a term may be used, or a force, without a 
 subject of that force, or without an impulsive agent, which is a 
 non-entity. I am aware, that the metaphysical doctrine of a 
 God, has reduced him to an unsubstantial nothingness ; but 
 such is not the view presented in the Christian Scriptures, 
 nor was it entertained by the Christian Fathers. To me, 
 there appears much wisdom in the language of Tertullian, 
 quoted by the Bishop of Hereford, in his Bampton Lec- 
 tures : '^ Nihil enim, si non corpus. Omne quod est, 
 corpus est sui generis ; nihil est incorporale, nisi quod non 
 est. Quis enim negabit Deum corpus esse, etsi Deus 
 spiritus est ? Spiritus enim corpus sui generis, in sua 
 effigie." Here, corpus is used in a similar sense to that in 
 which I have used the term substance. 
 
 Having repeatedly been asked for my opinion, I now 
 very briefly advert to another work, quite the opposite to 
 that just referred to; I mean " Cahagnet's Celestial Tele- 
 graph, or the Secrets of the Other Life Unveiled, &c." If 
 Miss Martineau and her coadjutor are deficient in fjxith, 
 Cahagnet certainly is not ; but with him faith degenerates 
 into credulity. In the absence of all personal knowledge, 
 it would be wrong to assert any want of honesty, or inten- 
 tion to deceive. But I have very great doubts as to the 
 dependence which can be placed upon Cahagnet and his co- 
 adjutors, as careful and trustworthy observers. The ten- 
 dency to the marvellous is so evident, that even their 
 soberest relations must be received with great caution. 
 When, in the second volume, we find him speaking of ma- 
 terial substances, such as lost jewels, boxes, &c., being 
 brought from a distance, and transported with the velocity 
 of lightning through space, at the potent command, or 
 spell, of certain mesmeric or magic individuals ; and again, 
 of showers of stones descending through impossible places, 
 or in the way of miracle, we may reasonably question the 
 judgment, if not the honesty, of a writer, who could gravely 
 narrate such things. • As to the stones, in one case, at 
 least, the French poltce fully cleared up the mystery, and 
 
232 APPENDIX. 
 
 proved the trickery and guilt of the chief witness. In 
 other cases, it probably only wanted the same vigilance. 
 
 The spiritual visions, related in the first volume, may be 
 true in a certain degree. But as they are all the result of 
 induced extasis, they are mainly referable to mind-reading, 
 or the reflection of the memories of the individuals in con- 
 nection with the clairvoyant subject. Hence we see the 
 notions of human souls, so common among French mes- 
 merists, and other peculiar French ideas of religion and 
 theology continually reflected. Some of the cases referred 
 to, I have made matters of experiment with Emma, when 
 in the state of spontaneous extasis, and altogether removed 
 from my influence. The results have negatived Cahagnet's 
 statements. In other cases, actions and manners are attri- 
 buted to historical characters, such as Swedenborg, for 
 instance, which their known history and habits sufficiently 
 disprove. Thus, at p. 74, &c., vol. ii., Cahagnet repre- 
 sents Swedenborg as requested to magnetize some water, 
 which he obliges them by doing. The water is duly 
 labelled, when, lo, and behold ! twice the writing vanishes, 
 and then the spirit of Swedenborg is again evoked to ex- 
 plain the mystery ! He, the spirit, had caused the disap- 
 pearance of the material writing, because he wished the 
 bottle to be labelled "spiritualized water!" How utterly 
 discordant such things are with the character of Sweden- 
 borg, any one, acquainted with his history, and the impass- 
 able distinctions he made between matter and spirit, will 
 readily perceive. As in the case of the stones, the trans- 
 ported box, jewels, &c., there can be little doubt, but that 
 some crafty material agent was at work somewhere. 
 
 That there has been a great amount of exaggeration, and 
 even of directly fraudulent misrepresentations connected 
 with mesmerism, may be, alas ! true enough ; and by none, 
 are such misdoings more deplored, than by the patient and 
 truth-seeking observers of mesmeric phenomena. Quacks 
 and impostors will intrude themselves wherever they can 
 profit by public credulity, as the advertisements in our 
 own newspapers too plainly shew. The only satisfaction to 
 the true and honest inciuirer, is, that the presence of the coun- 
 terfeit shews that the true coin really exists. The dishonest 
 pretender, and the too credulous narrator, though not alike 
 morally guilty, may be equally injurious to the promulgation 
 of real mesmeric truth, by raising justifiable suspicions in 
 the minds of those io-norant of the real facts of the case. 
 
No. 1. 
 
 A Diagram of a Section of the Bkain divided nearly longi- 
 tudinally, ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE ARRANGEMENT AND DISTRIBUTION 
 
 OF THE Fibres. 
 
 1. The Cortical Spherules or Glands. 
 
 2. The Radiating White Fibres descending from the circumference of the 
 
 Cerebrum to the Anterior Cohimns of the Spinal Marrow, and ascend- 
 ing from the Sensory Columns. 
 
 3. The Ganglia of increase of Gall and Spurzheim, known as the Thalanii 
 
 Ol)tici, and Corpora Striata. 
 
 4. The Cerebellum laid open, shewing its leaf-like ni>pearance, the Arbor 
 
 Vilic; with the Fibres from the Medulla Oblongata entering it. 
 
 5. The Pons Varolii. 
 
 6. The Medulla Oblongata. 
 
No. 2. 
 
 Till': Base of the Brain, the Arachnoid Membrane, the Arteries and 
 Veins removed, shewing the Cerebellum, The Medulla Oblon- 
 
 CxATA, AND the PRINCIPAL NeRVES. 
 
 1 1. The Olfactory Nerves. 
 
 2. Tlie Optic Nerves, 
 
 3. The Third Pair, or Motores Ociilovum. 
 
 4 1. Tlic Fourth Pair, cr Trochlcarcs. 
 
 5 5, The Fiftli Pair.— Tiic Great Nerve of the 
 
 Cranium, distributed to tlie Head and 
 Face. 
 
 6. The Sixth Pair. The figure stands on the 
 Pons Varohi, the (Jreat Commissure, or 
 communication between tlie two sides 
 of the Cerebellum. 
 
 7 7. The two Nerves fomiing the Seventh 
 Pair. The uppermost is the Portio 
 Dura, which is the Motor Nerve of the 
 Face, ramifying on the Muscles of Ex- 
 pression. The lower is the Portio Mol- 
 lis, the Auditory Nerve, which is dis- 
 tribulcd on the Internal Ear, and is the 
 Nerve of the Sense of Hearing. 
 
 <> 8. The Eighth Pair, the Par Va<jii»i, or 
 
 Pneumogastric Nerve, distributed upon 
 the Larynx and Trachea or Wind-pipe, 
 the Pharynx and Gullet, the Heart, 
 Lungs, and Stomach. The name of 
 Pneumogastric, is derived from its ox- 
 tensive distribution over the two lat- 
 ter Organs. In the Engraving it is 
 seen to arise by several tllamonts from 
 the furrows between the Olivary and 
 Kestiformc Bodies. 
 
 C C. The two sides of the Cerebellum. 
 
 V. Tlic Vermiform Process. 
 
 P P. The Pyramidal Bodies. 
 
 O. The Olivary Bodies. 
 
 R R. The Rostiformo Bodies. These togctbor 
 form the Medulla 01)longalA, or begin- 
 ning oi the Spinal Marrow. 
 
 A A. The Anterior L»^bcs K^i the Cerebrum. 
 
 M M. The Middle LoK^s. 
 
 P L. Tlie P(»stcrior Lobes. 
 
No. 3. 
 
 Front Vieav of a pair of Spinal Nerves, shewing the Anterior 
 AND Posterior Roots. 
 
 A. Spinal Marrow. 
 
 B B. The Enveloping Membrane of the Spinal INIarrow, — The Theca 
 Vertebralis. 
 
 C C. Spinal Nerves. 
 
 D D D. Motor Nerves, with Roots issuing from the Anterior Column of 
 the Spinal Marrow. 
 
 E E. Ganglions, on the Posterior part of the Spinal Nerves, with Roots en- 
 tering the Posterior Columns of the Spinal Marrow. These are the 
 Sensory Nerves, which convey the impression of Fcelinfj to the Brain, 
 and which become dormant in the advanced stages of Mesmerism, 
 producing wiiat is called Ancvsthesia. 
 
No. 4. 
 
 A PORTION OF THE BrAIN DISSECTED, SHEWING A NUMBER OF MOTOR 
 
 Fibres descending from one of the Hemispheres of the Cere- 
 brum, PASSING UNDER THE ArCH OF THE OpTIC NeRVES, AND 
 
 through the Pons Varolii, and convebging to form the 
 Anterior Column of the Spinal Marrow. 
 
 1. Motor Fibres. 2. Arch of the Optic Xerves. 
 
 3. Pons Varolii cut through. 4. Medulla Oblongata. 
 
 5. Anterior Column of Spinal Marrow, right side. The left half is covered 
 
 with the investing Membrane. 
 
 6. Column of Sensory P'ibres, ascending from the Posterior Column of the 
 
 Spinal Marrow, going towards the Fifth or Great Cranial Nerve. 
 
 7. Seventh pair of Nerves, or Auditory and Facial. 
 
 8. Eighth pair, — Pneumogastric, or Par Vagum. Tlie filament? by which 
 
 it arises arc seen more distinctly liero, tlian in the engraving of the 
 Base of the Brain. 
 
 9. Spinal Acccssorv Nerve. 
 
No. 5. 
 
 A DlAGRAJtl ILLUSTRATING THE SYMPATHETIC AND PnEUMOGASTRIC 
 
 Systems of Nerves. 
 
 1. The Pons Varolii. 
 
 2. The Medulla Oblongata. P P. Are the Pyramidal Bodies. 0. Tlie 
 
 Olivary Bodies. R E. The Kestiforme Bodies. 
 
 3 3. The Pneumogastric, or Par Vagnni of each side, arising by many 
 filaments from between the Olivary and Restiforme Bodies. 
 
 4. The Spinal Marrow. 
 
 5 5, Spinal Nerves. 
 
 6 6. The Great Sympathetic Nerv-es, descending on each side of the Spinal 
 
 Column, and forming various Ganglia, or swellings in their course, 
 from which filaments are sent forth in various directions, to the Pneu- 
 mogastric Nerve in the Neck, and to various Spinal Nerves, 
 
 7 7. Ganglia of the Pneumogastric Nerves. 
 
No. 6. 
 The Principal Arteries of the Brain, removed from their situation, 
 and represented on a plane surface, in order to shew tiikili 
 
 COIVEVTUNICATIONS, CALLED THE ClKCLE OF WiLLIS. ThE ArROWS SHEW 
 THE COURSE OP THE BlOOD. 
 
 ^•^< 
 
 ^^, ^- 
 
 \ / 
 
 1 1. The Vertebral Arteries. 
 
 2. Tlie Basilar Artery, lying along the middle of the Base of the Brain, iu the Central Groove 
 
 of the Pons Varolii. 
 3 3. The Internal Carotid Arteries. These are the principal arteries of the Cerebrum. 
 4. Anterior Cerebral Arteries. 
 6 5. Middle Cerebral Arteries. 
 
 6 6. Ophthalmic Arteries. 
 
 7 7. Posterior Cerebral Arteries. 
 
 8 8. Superior Cerebellar Aj-teries. 
 
 By observing the flexures, or bendings of the Arteries which bring the blood from the Heart 
 to the Brain, especially, the Internal Carotid Ai-teries, wliich supply the Cerebnun, and 
 the angles at which the Smaller Arteries are given ofl', it will be seen, that on the prin- 
 ciples of Hj'drauhcs, the msh of the blood from the Heart to the brain is prevented, and 
 the mechanical an-angement of the smaller Arteries, is such, as to placo them more 
 directly under the control of the Brain. The blood being rather invited than/c>/-mf into 
 its course. 
 
 [In the Brains of animals which hang their heads do-vvnwards for the purpose of taking fixxl 
 —as tlie deer or ox, for example,— accumulation of blood would probably take place iu 
 an undue degree, but for the further provision of dividing the Arteries into an inmienso 
 number of small vessels communicatint; with each other, below tlieha.se of the hr.iin 
 and before entering into its substance.] 
 

No. 7. 
 
 A Diagram representing the Venous Ciiannei^, called Sinuses, 
 IN the upper and back part of the Head, by which the Blo<^>d 
 IS conveyed away from the Brain. 
 
 111. The fold of Dura Mater dipping down between the Hemispheres of 
 the Cerebrum, called Falx Cerebri. 
 
 2 2, The principal Venous Channel of the Dura Mater, called the Superior 
 
 Longitudinal Sinus. 
 
 3 3. The Lower, or Inferior, Longitudinal Sinus. 
 4. The Fourth, or Straight, Sinus. 
 
 5 5. The two Lateral Sinuses, which receive the Blood from the above- 
 
 named Sinuses. The dilalation at their junction is the Torcular Ile- 
 rophili. 
 
 6 6. The Internal Jugular Veins ; the swelHngs upon them correspond 
 
 with the Jugular Fossje. 
 By observing the course of the Venous Blood, as indicated by the arrows, it 
 will be seen that the Veins of the Superior Lonp:itudinal Sinus, enter 
 that Channel in a direction contrary to the stream of the Blood; so that 
 while by the arrangement of the Arteries, the Blood is prevented from 
 unduly entering the Brain, the situation and course of these Veins wiili 
 respect to the Sinus, have a similar tendency to retard its esrnpe, ami 
 the same effect is assisted by the horizontal course o( the Lateral 
 Sinuses. 
 
 7. The Terminations of the Inferior Petrosal Sinus. 
 
I 
 
He. S ?:, 
 
 A Section of the Globe of the Eye, cut through the middle 
 
 FROM FRONT TO BACK, SHEWING THE CHAMBERS. 
 
 1 . The Cornea, or transparent case in front of the Eye. 
 
 2. The Anterior Chamber, containing the Aqueous Humour. 
 
 3. The Pupil. The dark lines above and below, represent the Iri^, or 
 
 coloured part of the Eye. 
 
 4. The Crystalline Lens ; more convex behind than before. 
 
 5 5. The Principal Chamber of the Eye, containing the Vitreous humour, 
 enclosed in the Hyaloid Membrane, and in cells formed by it, which 
 are represented in section by the wavy lines. 
 
 6. The Sheath of the Artery of the Capsule of the Crystalline Lens. 
 
 7. The Optic Nerve, by which visual perceptions are conveyed to the 
 
 Brain. 
 
 8. The Central Artery of the Retina. 
 
 9. The Neurilema, or covering of the Optic Nerve. 
 
f? 
 
 /i 7 7. 
 
 r 
 

 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: Nov. 2004 
 
 PreservationTechnologies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111